# PaCkAgE DaTaStReAm tk 1 15189 # end of header 07070100047036000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c588f000000f30000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000000b00000000tk/pkginfoPKG=tk NAME=tk 8.5.8 SPARC 64bit Solaris 10 VERSION=8.5.8 PSTAMP=6th August 2010 VENDOR=The Tcl Project EMAIL=http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/ DESC=Tk GUI ARCH=sparc CATEGORY=utility CLASSES=none BASEDIR=/ ISTATES=S s 1 2 3 RSTATES=S s 1 2 3 07070100047035000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c588f0000b3650000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000000a00000000tk/pkgmap: 1 15189 1 d none /usr ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local/bin 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/bin/wish8.5 0755 root root 11120 62761 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/include 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/include/tk.h 0644 root root 57479 52182 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkDecls.h 0644 root root 109265 56005 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkPlatDecls.h 0644 root root 7731 41319 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtk8.5.so 0555 root root 2259688 15172 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtkstub8.5.a 0644 root root 13168 49223 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/bgerror.tcl 0644 root root 8054 10046 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/button.tcl 0644 root root 19904 1268 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/choosedir.tcl 0644 root root 9701 17635 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 21293 41607 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/comdlg.tcl 0644 root root 7793 41038 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/console.tcl 0644 root root 29119 27895 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/README 0644 root root 2141 58836 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/anilabel.tcl 0644 root root 6738 40709 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/aniwave.tcl 0644 root root 3562 47158 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/arrow.tcl 0644 root root 8049 61936 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bind.tcl 0644 root root 3007 1843 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bitmap.tcl 0644 root root 1477 58526 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/browse 0755 root root 1820 20825 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/button.tcl 0644 root root 1570 1777 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/check.tcl 0644 root root 2343 1397 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 1498 61393 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/colors.tcl 0644 root root 5061 42637 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/combo.tcl 0644 root root 2048 45910 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/cscroll.tcl 0644 root root 3456 23401 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ctext.tcl 0644 root root 4939 24246 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog1.tcl 0644 root root 731 62697 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog2.tcl 0644 root root 680 57289 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/en.msg 0644 root root 3890 8985 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry1.tcl 0644 root root 1451 60413 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry2.tcl 0644 root root 2177 58082 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry3.tcl 0644 root root 6160 63870 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/filebox.tcl 0644 root root 2325 57798 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/floor.tcl 0644 root root 79163 59939 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/form.tcl 0644 root root 1110 26793 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/goldberg.tcl 0644 root root 56556 38917 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hello 0755 root root 568 46656 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hscale.tcl 0644 root root 1563 61608 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/icon.tcl 0644 root root 2127 57931 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image1.tcl 0644 root root 1068 25983 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image2.tcl 0644 root root 3429 27175 1281120322 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earth.gif 0644 root root 51712 45825 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earthris.gif 0644 root root 6343 14546 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/face.xbm 0644 root root 12720 3276 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagdown.xbm 0644 root root 1886 45912 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagup.xbm 0644 root root 1880 48731 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/gray25.xbm 0644 root root 275 17845 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/letters.xbm 0644 root root 1883 45587 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/noletter.xbm 0644 root root 1889 49923 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/pattern.xbm 0644 root root 272 18096 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/tcllogo.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/teapot.ppm 0644 root root 196623 33672 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/items.tcl 0644 root root 9789 6165 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ixset 0755 root root 8159 59762 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/knightstour.tcl 0644 root root 8586 25243 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/label.tcl 0644 root root 1383 53705 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/labelframe.tcl 0644 root root 1917 25905 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/license.terms 0644 root root 2209 55092 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/mclist.tcl 0644 root root 3484 32310 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menu.tcl 0644 root root 6800 60623 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menubu.tcl 0644 root root 4545 63986 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 2089 48065 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/nl.msg 0644 root root 6769 55873 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned1.tcl 0644 root root 1176 36965 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned2.tcl 0644 root root 2295 1052 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/pendulum.tcl 0644 root root 7710 55003 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/plot.tcl 0644 root root 2822 32225 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/puzzle.tcl 0644 root root 2663 20288 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/radio.tcl 0644 root root 2817 43941 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rmt 0755 root root 5397 60715 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rolodex 0755 root root 8363 48619 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ruler.tcl 0644 root root 5276 42965 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/sayings.tcl 0644 root root 2330 5682 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/search.tcl 0644 root root 4464 51974 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/spin.tcl 0644 root root 1884 30594 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/square 0644 root root 1375 45123 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/states.tcl 0644 root root 1733 18157 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/style.tcl 0644 root root 7003 27534 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tclIndex 0644 root root 4354 10748 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tcolor 0755 root root 11307 609 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/text.tcl 0644 root root 3485 48726 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/textpeer.tcl 0644 root root 2251 61228 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/timer 0755 root root 1175 33223 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/toolbar.tcl 0644 root root 3799 64580 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tree.tcl 0644 root root 3431 28586 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkbut.tcl 0644 root root 3491 42588 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkmenu.tcl 0644 root root 2478 16925 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttknote.tcl 0644 root root 2539 23294 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkpane.tcl 0644 root root 4114 25134 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkprogress.tcl 0644 root root 1627 9296 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/twind.tcl 0644 root root 10893 1717 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/unicodeout.tcl 0644 root root 3124 57959 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/vscale.tcl 0644 root root 1543 59807 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/widget 0755 root root 23224 13175 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/dialog.tcl 0644 root root 6633 25547 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/entry.tcl 0644 root root 17026 31944 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/focus.tcl 0644 root root 4923 10923 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/README 0644 root root 388 32710 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo.eps 0644 root root 32900 31317 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo100.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo64.gif 0644 root root 1670 61083 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoLarge.gif 0644 root root 11000 38754 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoMed.gif 0644 root root 3889 4936 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo.eps 0644 root root 27809 41490 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo100.gif 0644 root root 1615 38261 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo150.gif 0644 root root 2489 17507 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo175.gif 0644 root root 2981 10815 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo200.gif 0644 root root 3491 7374 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo75.gif 0644 root root 1171 58456 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/tai-ku.gif 0644 root root 5473 11946 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/listbox.tcl 0644 root root 14044 41000 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/menu.tcl 0644 root root 36663 30131 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/mkpsenc.tcl 0644 root root 27260 10069 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 17011 2573 1281120319 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/cs.msg 0644 root root 4506 23632 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/da.msg 0644 root root 3866 38980 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/de.msg 0644 root root 3937 51585 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/el.msg 0644 root root 8609 32579 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en.msg 0644 root root 2793 22312 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en_gb.msg 0644 root root 63 5359 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/eo.msg 0644 root root 3845 44025 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/es.msg 0644 root root 3924 49269 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/fr.msg 0644 root root 3727 35326 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/hu.msg 0644 root root 4588 34168 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/it.msg 0644 root root 3557 20496 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/nl.msg 0644 root root 7095 53520 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pl.msg 0644 root root 3948 50303 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pt.msg 0644 root root 3973 59980 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/ru.msg 0644 root root 7105 56197 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/sv.msg 0644 root root 3762 33687 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/obsolete.tcl 0644 root root 5562 5783 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/optMenu.tcl 0644 root root 1653 8919 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/palette.tcl 0644 root root 7946 4770 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 5250 37963 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/pkgIndex.tcl 0644 root root 125 10611 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/safetk.tcl 0644 root root 7254 14429 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scale.tcl 0644 root root 7685 33041 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scrlbar.tcl 0644 root root 12080 14381 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/spinbox.tcl 0644 root root 15159 7260 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tclIndex 0644 root root 22293 22880 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tearoff.tcl 0644 root root 4851 2016 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/text.tcl 0644 root root 32384 54059 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tk.tcl 0644 root root 18124 43866 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkAppInit.c 0644 root root 3905 36295 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkfbox.tcl 0644 root root 53996 20875 1281120319 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/altTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3344 19218 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/aquaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2306 3441 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/button.tcl 0644 root root 2986 59193 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/clamTheme.tcl 0644 root root 4343 24939 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/classicTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3508 36443 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/combobox.tcl 0644 root root 12018 28903 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/cursors.tcl 0644 root root 4068 9948 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/defaults.tcl 0644 root root 3523 32446 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/entry.tcl 0644 root root 15996 25578 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/fonts.tcl 0644 root root 5627 8822 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/menubutton.tcl 0644 root root 4948 22178 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/notebook.tcl 0644 root root 5424 62453 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 2040 34510 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/progress.tcl 0644 root root 1149 31276 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scale.tcl 0644 root root 2612 3332 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scrollbar.tcl 0644 root root 3156 61029 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/sizegrip.tcl 0644 root root 1865 18289 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/treeview.tcl 0644 root root 9252 44871 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/ttk.tcl 0644 root root 4472 50277 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/utils.tcl 0644 root root 7406 23846 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/vistaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 9109 51770 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/winTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2654 32917 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/xpTheme.tcl 0644 root root 1747 18125 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/unsupported.tcl 0644 root root 11461 15276 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/xmfbox.tcl 0644 root root 25905 13986 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tkConfig.sh 0644 root root 4016 3431 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/man 0755 root root 1 d none /usr/local/man/man1 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/man1/wish.1 0444 root root 15122 41445 1281120323 1 d none /usr/local/man/man3 0755 root root 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 0444 root root 19675 64494 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AddOption.3 0444 root root 7540 16933 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3 0444 root root 6789 12738 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Attributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_BindEvent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 0444 root root 12442 4044 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 0444 root root 10664 40638 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsY.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3 0444 root root 10213 64436 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Changes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CharBbox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3 0444 root root 7940 50833 1281120330 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClearSelection.3 0444 root root 7119 43311 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3 0444 root root 8936 13657 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CollapseMotionEvents.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Colormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWidget.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CoordsToWindow.3 0444 root root 7600 22084 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 0444 root root 8507 39411 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 0444 root root 12168 47407 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateEventHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3 0444 root root 9246 41215 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateImageType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3 0444 root root 17984 34663 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 0444 root root 11125 15529 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 0444 root root 8915 10112 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteImage.3 0444 root root 6786 12055 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Depth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Display.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 0444 root root 12040 32986 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3 0444 root root 7038 36260 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 0444 root root 20123 57212 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FindPhoto.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FontId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 0444 root root 13344 18016 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 0444 root root 9017 21860 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeConfigOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 0444 root root 16172 17974 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3 0444 root root 8700 54226 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 0444 root root 34947 60048 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 0444 root root 7614 22378 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeXId.3 0444 root root 7786 38617 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 0444 root root 8958 8340 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 0444 root root 7852 44026 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 0444 root root 12581 20144 1281120324 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 0444 root root 16138 446 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 0444 root root 7922 48570 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorByValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromData.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetDash.3 0444 root root 8441 24320 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 0444 root root 10406 13053 1281120327 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 0444 root root 9422 54644 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHINSTANCE.3 0444 root root 6460 49599 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 0444 root root 17571 1905 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3 0444 root root 30138 21989 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 0444 root root 7937 50925 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 0444 root root 9036 20520 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetMMFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetNumMainWindows.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOption.3 0444 root root 7340 62610 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 0444 root root 9343 49959 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 0444 root root 8812 59367 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetReliefFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRootCoords.3 0444 root root 7265 57987 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScreenMM.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 0444 root root 8716 55947 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetSelection.3 0444 root root 9007 18395 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUserInactiveTime.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3 0444 root root 7712 31850 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVisual.3 0444 root root 9469 58889 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3 0444 root root 8266 17985 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HWNDToWindow.3 0444 root root 6569 59897 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HandleEvent.3 0444 root root 7537 16074 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Height.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IdToWindow.3 0444 root root 6763 10968 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ImageChanged.3 0444 root root 8335 20885 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3 0444 root root 8485 35151 1281120331 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitConsoleChannels.3 0444 root root 7445 8532 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitImageArgs.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitStubs.3 0444 root root 8767 63410 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternAtom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderBottom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderLeft.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderRight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Interp.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsContainer.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsEmbedded.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsMapped.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsTopLevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Main.3 0444 root root 8074 64755 1281120331 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainLoop.3 0444 root root 6859 20302 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 0444 root root 7149 46615 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 0444 root root 10031 49768 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 0444 root root 12431 3751 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ManageGeometry.3 0444 root root 9376 54457 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 0444 root root 7553 17075 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 0444 root root 11870 17321 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3 0444 root root 8065 279 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 0444 root root 9081 23155 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfImage.3 0444 root root 6745 8577 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameToWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 0444 root root 38706 36077 1281120330 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_OwnSelection.3 0444 root root 7720 33211 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Parent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ParseArgv.3 0444 root root 20499 43201 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PathName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoBlank.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoExpand.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 0444 root root 16640 47525 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PointToChar.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PreserveColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 0444 root root 7775 38682 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RedrawImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 0444 root root 6991 34564 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 0444 root root 12111 42808 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestackWindow.3 0444 root root 7510 12838 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestoreSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestrictEvents.3 0444 root root 9446 61064 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Screen.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ScreenNumber.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetAppName.3 0444 root root 8258 16031 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetCaretPos.3 0444 root root 6929 25712 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClassProcs.3 0444 root root 9166 33861 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetGrid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 0444 root root 10055 52462 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorderEx.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackground.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowVisual.3 0444 root root 7709 31983 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 0444 root root 10947 57115 1281120327 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_StrictMotif.3 0444 root root 7072 39666 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3 0444 root root 7507 10820 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UndefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmapWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 0444 root root 8261 17838 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Visual.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Width.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_WindowId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_X.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Y.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_AddPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_BoxContains.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 0444 root root 6895 22506 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 0444 root root 13854 51207 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetCurrentTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetDefaultTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetStickyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakeBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PackBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PadBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PlaceBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_RelievePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_UniformPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 d none /usr/local/man/mann 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bell.n 0444 root root 7047 35993 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bind.n 0444 root root 37781 53551 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bindtags.n 0444 root root 9898 29930 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bitmap.n 0444 root root 10095 48801 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/button.n 0444 root root 14485 54559 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/canvas.n 0444 root root 85273 5636 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/checkbutton.n 0444 root root 18663 45182 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/clipboard.n 0444 root root 11419 28414 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/colors.n 0444 root root 27434 413 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/console.n 0444 root root 11642 60553 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/cursors.n 0444 root root 8161 13150 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/destroy.n 0444 root root 7168 46431 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/entry.n 0444 root root 29335 32429 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/event.n 0444 root root 23686 37491 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/focus.n 0444 root root 11418 39795 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/font.n 0444 root root 21656 43790 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/frame.n 0444 root root 11947 22696 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grab.n 0444 root root 11637 62382 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grid.n 0444 root root 25412 56716 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/image.n 0444 root root 9815 23919 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/keysyms.n 0444 root root 51214 24926 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/label.n 0444 root root 11095 5198 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/labelframe.n 0444 root root 13154 56785 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/listbox.n 0444 root root 29251 28475 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/loadTk.n 0444 root root 9065 21068 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/lower.n 0444 root root 7177 48655 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 0444 root root 39314 25095 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menubutton.n 0444 root root 14723 21859 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/message.n 0444 root root 12225 46365 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/option.n 0444 root root 9992 44759 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/options.n 0444 root root 24205 43770 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack-old.n 0444 root root 13767 58603 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack.n 0444 root root 17310 40835 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/panedwindow.n 0444 root root 18492 23047 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/photo.n 0444 root root 26127 54002 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/place.n 0444 root root 16874 9199 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/radiobutton.n 0444 root root 18006 57855 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/raise.n 0444 root root 7590 18456 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scale.n 0444 root root 16558 45869 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scrollbar.n 0444 root root 20989 57531 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/selection.n 0444 root root 13940 3605 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/send.n 0444 root root 10111 51727 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/spinbox.n 0444 root root 31995 16659 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/text.n 0444 root root 110626 49824 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk.n 0444 root root 11224 19651 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 0444 root root 7217 51483 1281120334 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bisque.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseColor.n 0444 root root 7442 7269 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseDirectory.n 0444 root root 7819 41906 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_dialog.n 0444 root root 8284 14744 1281120332 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusFollowsMouse.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 0444 root root 8351 28560 1281120333 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusPrev.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getOpenFile.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 0444 root root 13589 32944 1281120333 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuBar.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuSetFocus.n=/usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_messageBox.n 0444 root root 9145 26345 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_optionMenu.n 0444 root root 7450 8166 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_popup.n 0444 root root 7387 64834 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 0444 root root 9073 28654 1281120334 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCopy.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCut.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkerror.n 0444 root root 7344 64973 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkvars.n 0444 root root 9147 34476 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkwait.n 0444 root root 7895 50341 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/toplevel.n 0444 root root 12803 35639 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_button.n 0444 root root 8522 34146 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_checkbutton.n 0444 root root 8421 27988 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_combobox.n 0444 root root 9631 7212 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_entry.n 0444 root root 24330 26498 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_frame.n 0444 root root 7594 18355 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_image.n 0444 root root 8584 40434 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_intro.n 0444 root root 12246 45938 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_label.n 0444 root root 8495 34809 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_labelframe.n 0444 root root 8869 40 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_menubutton.n 0444 root root 7428 3778 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_notebook.n 0444 root root 12885 32509 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_panedwindow.n 0444 root root 9845 28661 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_progressbar.n 0444 root root 9157 31501 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_radiobutton.n 0444 root root 8174 6563 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scale.n 0444 root root 9648 7320 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scrollbar.n 0444 root root 12437 63731 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_separator.n 0444 root root 6858 19099 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_sizegrip.n 0444 root root 7787 35288 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_style.n 0444 root root 10777 46235 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_treeview.n 0444 root root 21734 39072 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_vsapi.n 0444 root root 9843 25887 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_widget.n 0444 root root 14573 58219 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/winfo.n 0444 root root 20183 60180 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/wm.n 0444 root root 40738 33677 1281120337 1 i checkinstall 785 2565 1281120399 1 i pkginfo 243 18235 1281120399 07070100000000000000000000000000000000000000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000b00000000TRAILER!!!07070100047036000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c588f000000f30000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000000800000000pkginfoPKG=tk NAME=tk 8.5.8 SPARC 64bit Solaris 10 VERSION=8.5.8 PSTAMP=6th August 2010 VENDOR=The Tcl Project EMAIL=http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/ DESC=Tk GUI ARCH=sparc CATEGORY=utility CLASSES=none BASEDIR=/ ISTATES=S s 1 2 3 RSTATES=S s 1 2 3 07070100047035000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c588f0000b3650000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000000700000000pkgmap: 1 15189 1 d none /usr ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local/bin 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/bin/wish8.5 0755 root root 11120 62761 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/include 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/include/tk.h 0644 root root 57479 52182 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkDecls.h 0644 root root 109265 56005 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkPlatDecls.h 0644 root root 7731 41319 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtk8.5.so 0555 root root 2259688 15172 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtkstub8.5.a 0644 root root 13168 49223 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/bgerror.tcl 0644 root root 8054 10046 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/button.tcl 0644 root root 19904 1268 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/choosedir.tcl 0644 root root 9701 17635 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 21293 41607 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/comdlg.tcl 0644 root root 7793 41038 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/console.tcl 0644 root root 29119 27895 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/README 0644 root root 2141 58836 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/anilabel.tcl 0644 root root 6738 40709 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/aniwave.tcl 0644 root root 3562 47158 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/arrow.tcl 0644 root root 8049 61936 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bind.tcl 0644 root root 3007 1843 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bitmap.tcl 0644 root root 1477 58526 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/browse 0755 root root 1820 20825 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/button.tcl 0644 root root 1570 1777 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/check.tcl 0644 root root 2343 1397 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 1498 61393 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/colors.tcl 0644 root root 5061 42637 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/combo.tcl 0644 root root 2048 45910 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/cscroll.tcl 0644 root root 3456 23401 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ctext.tcl 0644 root root 4939 24246 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog1.tcl 0644 root root 731 62697 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog2.tcl 0644 root root 680 57289 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/en.msg 0644 root root 3890 8985 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry1.tcl 0644 root root 1451 60413 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry2.tcl 0644 root root 2177 58082 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry3.tcl 0644 root root 6160 63870 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/filebox.tcl 0644 root root 2325 57798 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/floor.tcl 0644 root root 79163 59939 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/form.tcl 0644 root root 1110 26793 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/goldberg.tcl 0644 root root 56556 38917 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hello 0755 root root 568 46656 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hscale.tcl 0644 root root 1563 61608 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/icon.tcl 0644 root root 2127 57931 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image1.tcl 0644 root root 1068 25983 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image2.tcl 0644 root root 3429 27175 1281120322 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earth.gif 0644 root root 51712 45825 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earthris.gif 0644 root root 6343 14546 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/face.xbm 0644 root root 12720 3276 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagdown.xbm 0644 root root 1886 45912 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagup.xbm 0644 root root 1880 48731 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/gray25.xbm 0644 root root 275 17845 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/letters.xbm 0644 root root 1883 45587 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/noletter.xbm 0644 root root 1889 49923 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/pattern.xbm 0644 root root 272 18096 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/tcllogo.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/teapot.ppm 0644 root root 196623 33672 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/items.tcl 0644 root root 9789 6165 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ixset 0755 root root 8159 59762 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/knightstour.tcl 0644 root root 8586 25243 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/label.tcl 0644 root root 1383 53705 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/labelframe.tcl 0644 root root 1917 25905 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/license.terms 0644 root root 2209 55092 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/mclist.tcl 0644 root root 3484 32310 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menu.tcl 0644 root root 6800 60623 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menubu.tcl 0644 root root 4545 63986 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 2089 48065 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/nl.msg 0644 root root 6769 55873 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned1.tcl 0644 root root 1176 36965 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned2.tcl 0644 root root 2295 1052 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/pendulum.tcl 0644 root root 7710 55003 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/plot.tcl 0644 root root 2822 32225 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/puzzle.tcl 0644 root root 2663 20288 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/radio.tcl 0644 root root 2817 43941 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rmt 0755 root root 5397 60715 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rolodex 0755 root root 8363 48619 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ruler.tcl 0644 root root 5276 42965 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/sayings.tcl 0644 root root 2330 5682 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/search.tcl 0644 root root 4464 51974 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/spin.tcl 0644 root root 1884 30594 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/square 0644 root root 1375 45123 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/states.tcl 0644 root root 1733 18157 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/style.tcl 0644 root root 7003 27534 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tclIndex 0644 root root 4354 10748 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tcolor 0755 root root 11307 609 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/text.tcl 0644 root root 3485 48726 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/textpeer.tcl 0644 root root 2251 61228 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/timer 0755 root root 1175 33223 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/toolbar.tcl 0644 root root 3799 64580 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tree.tcl 0644 root root 3431 28586 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkbut.tcl 0644 root root 3491 42588 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkmenu.tcl 0644 root root 2478 16925 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttknote.tcl 0644 root root 2539 23294 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkpane.tcl 0644 root root 4114 25134 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkprogress.tcl 0644 root root 1627 9296 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/twind.tcl 0644 root root 10893 1717 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/unicodeout.tcl 0644 root root 3124 57959 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/vscale.tcl 0644 root root 1543 59807 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/widget 0755 root root 23224 13175 1281120323 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/dialog.tcl 0644 root root 6633 25547 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/entry.tcl 0644 root root 17026 31944 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/focus.tcl 0644 root root 4923 10923 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/README 0644 root root 388 32710 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo.eps 0644 root root 32900 31317 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo100.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo64.gif 0644 root root 1670 61083 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoLarge.gif 0644 root root 11000 38754 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoMed.gif 0644 root root 3889 4936 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo.eps 0644 root root 27809 41490 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo100.gif 0644 root root 1615 38261 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo150.gif 0644 root root 2489 17507 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo175.gif 0644 root root 2981 10815 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo200.gif 0644 root root 3491 7374 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo75.gif 0644 root root 1171 58456 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/tai-ku.gif 0644 root root 5473 11946 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/listbox.tcl 0644 root root 14044 41000 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/menu.tcl 0644 root root 36663 30131 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/mkpsenc.tcl 0644 root root 27260 10069 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 17011 2573 1281120319 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/cs.msg 0644 root root 4506 23632 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/da.msg 0644 root root 3866 38980 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/de.msg 0644 root root 3937 51585 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/el.msg 0644 root root 8609 32579 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en.msg 0644 root root 2793 22312 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en_gb.msg 0644 root root 63 5359 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/eo.msg 0644 root root 3845 44025 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/es.msg 0644 root root 3924 49269 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/fr.msg 0644 root root 3727 35326 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/hu.msg 0644 root root 4588 34168 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/it.msg 0644 root root 3557 20496 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/nl.msg 0644 root root 7095 53520 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pl.msg 0644 root root 3948 50303 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pt.msg 0644 root root 3973 59980 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/ru.msg 0644 root root 7105 56197 1281120321 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/sv.msg 0644 root root 3762 33687 1281120322 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/obsolete.tcl 0644 root root 5562 5783 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/optMenu.tcl 0644 root root 1653 8919 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/palette.tcl 0644 root root 7946 4770 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 5250 37963 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/pkgIndex.tcl 0644 root root 125 10611 1281120318 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/safetk.tcl 0644 root root 7254 14429 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scale.tcl 0644 root root 7685 33041 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scrlbar.tcl 0644 root root 12080 14381 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/spinbox.tcl 0644 root root 15159 7260 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tclIndex 0644 root root 22293 22880 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tearoff.tcl 0644 root root 4851 2016 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/text.tcl 0644 root root 32384 54059 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tk.tcl 0644 root root 18124 43866 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkAppInit.c 0644 root root 3905 36295 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkfbox.tcl 0644 root root 53996 20875 1281120319 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/altTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3344 19218 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/aquaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2306 3441 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/button.tcl 0644 root root 2986 59193 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/clamTheme.tcl 0644 root root 4343 24939 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/classicTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3508 36443 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/combobox.tcl 0644 root root 12018 28903 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/cursors.tcl 0644 root root 4068 9948 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/defaults.tcl 0644 root root 3523 32446 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/entry.tcl 0644 root root 15996 25578 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/fonts.tcl 0644 root root 5627 8822 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/menubutton.tcl 0644 root root 4948 22178 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/notebook.tcl 0644 root root 5424 62453 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 2040 34510 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/progress.tcl 0644 root root 1149 31276 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scale.tcl 0644 root root 2612 3332 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scrollbar.tcl 0644 root root 3156 61029 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/sizegrip.tcl 0644 root root 1865 18289 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/treeview.tcl 0644 root root 9252 44871 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/ttk.tcl 0644 root root 4472 50277 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/utils.tcl 0644 root root 7406 23846 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/vistaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 9109 51770 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/winTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2654 32917 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/xpTheme.tcl 0644 root root 1747 18125 1281120320 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/unsupported.tcl 0644 root root 11461 15276 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/xmfbox.tcl 0644 root root 25905 13986 1281120319 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tkConfig.sh 0644 root root 4016 3431 1281120318 1 d none /usr/local/man 0755 root root 1 d none /usr/local/man/man1 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/man1/wish.1 0444 root root 15122 41445 1281120323 1 d none /usr/local/man/man3 0755 root root 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 0444 root root 19675 64494 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AddOption.3 0444 root root 7540 16933 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3 0444 root root 6789 12738 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Attributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_BindEvent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 0444 root root 12442 4044 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 0444 root root 10664 40638 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsY.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3 0444 root root 10213 64436 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Changes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CharBbox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3 0444 root root 7940 50833 1281120330 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClearSelection.3 0444 root root 7119 43311 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3 0444 root root 8936 13657 1281120324 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CollapseMotionEvents.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Colormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWidget.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CoordsToWindow.3 0444 root root 7600 22084 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 0444 root root 8507 39411 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 0444 root root 12168 47407 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateEventHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3 0444 root root 9246 41215 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateImageType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3 0444 root root 17984 34663 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 0444 root root 11125 15529 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 0444 root root 8915 10112 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteImage.3 0444 root root 6786 12055 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Depth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Display.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 0444 root root 12040 32986 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3 0444 root root 7038 36260 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 0444 root root 20123 57212 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FindPhoto.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FontId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 0444 root root 13344 18016 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 0444 root root 9017 21860 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeConfigOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 0444 root root 16172 17974 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3 0444 root root 8700 54226 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3 0444 root root 34947 60048 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 0444 root root 7614 22378 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeXId.3 0444 root root 7786 38617 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 0444 root root 8958 8340 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 0444 root root 7852 44026 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3 0444 root root 12581 20144 1281120324 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 0444 root root 16138 446 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 0444 root root 7922 48570 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorByValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromData.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetDash.3 0444 root root 8441 24320 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 0444 root root 10406 13053 1281120327 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 0444 root root 9422 54644 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHINSTANCE.3 0444 root root 6460 49599 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 0444 root root 17571 1905 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3 0444 root root 30138 21989 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 0444 root root 7937 50925 1281120327 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 0444 root root 9036 20520 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetMMFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetNumMainWindows.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOption.3 0444 root root 7340 62610 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 0444 root root 9343 49959 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 0444 root root 8812 59367 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetReliefFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRootCoords.3 0444 root root 7265 57987 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScreenMM.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 0444 root root 8716 55947 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetSelection.3 0444 root root 9007 18395 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUserInactiveTime.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3 0444 root root 7712 31850 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVisual.3 0444 root root 9469 58889 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3 0444 root root 8266 17985 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HWNDToWindow.3 0444 root root 6569 59897 1281120328 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HandleEvent.3 0444 root root 7537 16074 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Height.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IdToWindow.3 0444 root root 6763 10968 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ImageChanged.3 0444 root root 8335 20885 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3 0444 root root 8485 35151 1281120331 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitConsoleChannels.3 0444 root root 7445 8532 1281120325 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitImageArgs.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitStubs.3 0444 root root 8767 63410 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternAtom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderBottom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderLeft.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderRight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Interp.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsContainer.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsEmbedded.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsMapped.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsTopLevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Main.3 0444 root root 8074 64755 1281120331 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainLoop.3 0444 root root 6859 20302 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 0444 root root 7149 46615 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 0444 root root 10031 49768 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3 0444 root root 12431 3751 1281120326 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ManageGeometry.3 0444 root root 9376 54457 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 0444 root root 7553 17075 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 0444 root root 11870 17321 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3 0444 root root 8065 279 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 0444 root root 9081 23155 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfImage.3 0444 root root 6745 8577 1281120329 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameToWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 0444 root root 38706 36077 1281120330 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_OwnSelection.3 0444 root root 7720 33211 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Parent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ParseArgv.3 0444 root root 20499 43201 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PathName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoBlank.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoExpand.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 0444 root root 16640 47525 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PointToChar.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PreserveColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 0444 root root 7775 38682 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RedrawImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 0444 root root 6991 34564 1281120329 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 0444 root root 12111 42808 1281120325 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestackWindow.3 0444 root root 7510 12838 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestoreSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestrictEvents.3 0444 root root 9446 61064 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Screen.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ScreenNumber.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetAppName.3 0444 root root 8258 16031 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetCaretPos.3 0444 root root 6929 25712 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClassProcs.3 0444 root root 9166 33861 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetGrid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 0444 root root 10055 52462 1281120326 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorderEx.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackground.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowVisual.3 0444 root root 7709 31983 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3 0444 root root 10947 57115 1281120327 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_StrictMotif.3 0444 root root 7072 39666 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3 0444 root root 7507 10820 1281120328 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UndefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmapWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 0444 root root 8261 17838 1281120330 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Visual.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Width.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_WindowId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_X.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Y.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_AddPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_BoxContains.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 0444 root root 6895 22506 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 0444 root root 13854 51207 1281120331 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetCurrentTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetDefaultTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetStickyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakeBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PackBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PadBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PlaceBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_RelievePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_UniformPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3 1 d none /usr/local/man/mann 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bell.n 0444 root root 7047 35993 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bind.n 0444 root root 37781 53551 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bindtags.n 0444 root root 9898 29930 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bitmap.n 0444 root root 10095 48801 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/button.n 0444 root root 14485 54559 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/canvas.n 0444 root root 85273 5636 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/checkbutton.n 0444 root root 18663 45182 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/clipboard.n 0444 root root 11419 28414 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/colors.n 0444 root root 27434 413 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/console.n 0444 root root 11642 60553 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/cursors.n 0444 root root 8161 13150 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/destroy.n 0444 root root 7168 46431 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/entry.n 0444 root root 29335 32429 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/event.n 0444 root root 23686 37491 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/focus.n 0444 root root 11418 39795 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/font.n 0444 root root 21656 43790 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/frame.n 0444 root root 11947 22696 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grab.n 0444 root root 11637 62382 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grid.n 0444 root root 25412 56716 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/image.n 0444 root root 9815 23919 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/keysyms.n 0444 root root 51214 24926 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/label.n 0444 root root 11095 5198 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/labelframe.n 0444 root root 13154 56785 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/listbox.n 0444 root root 29251 28475 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/loadTk.n 0444 root root 9065 21068 1281120333 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/lower.n 0444 root root 7177 48655 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 0444 root root 39314 25095 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menubutton.n 0444 root root 14723 21859 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/message.n 0444 root root 12225 46365 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/option.n 0444 root root 9992 44759 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/options.n 0444 root root 24205 43770 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack-old.n 0444 root root 13767 58603 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack.n 0444 root root 17310 40835 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/panedwindow.n 0444 root root 18492 23047 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/photo.n 0444 root root 26127 54002 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/place.n 0444 root root 16874 9199 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/radiobutton.n 0444 root root 18006 57855 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/raise.n 0444 root root 7590 18456 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scale.n 0444 root root 16558 45869 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scrollbar.n 0444 root root 20989 57531 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/selection.n 0444 root root 13940 3605 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/send.n 0444 root root 10111 51727 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/spinbox.n 0444 root root 31995 16659 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/text.n 0444 root root 110626 49824 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk.n 0444 root root 11224 19651 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 0444 root root 7217 51483 1281120334 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bisque.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseColor.n 0444 root root 7442 7269 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseDirectory.n 0444 root root 7819 41906 1281120332 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_dialog.n 0444 root root 8284 14744 1281120332 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusFollowsMouse.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 0444 root root 8351 28560 1281120333 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusPrev.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getOpenFile.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 0444 root root 13589 32944 1281120333 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuBar.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuSetFocus.n=/usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_messageBox.n 0444 root root 9145 26345 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_optionMenu.n 0444 root root 7450 8166 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_popup.n 0444 root root 7387 64834 1281120334 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 0444 root root 9073 28654 1281120334 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCopy.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCut.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n=/usr/local/man/mann/text.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkerror.n 0444 root root 7344 64973 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkvars.n 0444 root root 9147 34476 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkwait.n 0444 root root 7895 50341 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/toplevel.n 0444 root root 12803 35639 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_button.n 0444 root root 8522 34146 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_checkbutton.n 0444 root root 8421 27988 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_combobox.n 0444 root root 9631 7212 1281120335 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_entry.n 0444 root root 24330 26498 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_frame.n 0444 root root 7594 18355 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_image.n 0444 root root 8584 40434 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_intro.n 0444 root root 12246 45938 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_label.n 0444 root root 8495 34809 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_labelframe.n 0444 root root 8869 40 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_menubutton.n 0444 root root 7428 3778 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_notebook.n 0444 root root 12885 32509 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_panedwindow.n 0444 root root 9845 28661 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_progressbar.n 0444 root root 9157 31501 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_radiobutton.n 0444 root root 8174 6563 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scale.n 0444 root root 9648 7320 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scrollbar.n 0444 root root 12437 63731 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_separator.n 0444 root root 6858 19099 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_sizegrip.n 0444 root root 7787 35288 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_style.n 0444 root root 10777 46235 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_treeview.n 0444 root root 21734 39072 1281120336 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_vsapi.n 0444 root root 9843 25887 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_widget.n 0444 root root 14573 58219 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/winfo.n 0444 root root 20183 60180 1281120337 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/wm.n 0444 root root 40738 33677 1281120337 1 i checkinstall 785 2565 1281120399 1 i pkginfo 243 18235 1281120399 0707010004719f000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c588f000000000000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000000800000000install070701000471a0000081ed0000000000000000000000014c5c588f000003110000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001500000000install/checkinstall#!/bin/sh # expected_bits="64" expected_release="5.10" expected_platform="sparc" # release=`uname -r` platform=`uname -p` bits=`isainfo -b` # if [ ${platform} != ${expected_platform} ]; then echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_platform} architecture\n" echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" exit 1 fi if [ ${release} != ${expected_release} ]; then echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_release} machine\n" echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" exit 1 fi if [ ${bits} != ${expected_bits} ]; then echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_bits} bit machine\n" echo "\tYour machine is running a ${bits} bit O.S. currently\n" echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" exit 1 fi exit 0 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.h/* * tk.h -- * * Declarations for Tk-related things that are visible outside of the Tk * module itself. * * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California. * Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University. * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. * Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Ajuba Solutions. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution of * this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. * * RCS: @(#) $Id: tk.h,v 1.109.2.12 2009/11/03 20:15:25 dgp Exp $ */ #ifndef _TK #define _TK #include #if (TCL_MAJOR_VERSION != 8) || (TCL_MINOR_VERSION != 5) # error Tk 8.5 must be compiled with tcl.h from Tcl 8.5 #endif /* * For C++ compilers, use extern "C" */ #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif /* * When version numbers change here, you must also go into the following files * and update the version numbers: * * library/tk.tcl (2 LOC patch) * unix/configure.in (2 LOC Major, 2 LOC minor, 1 LOC patch) * win/configure.in (as above) * README (sections 0 and 1) * macosx/Wish.xcode/project.pbxproj (not patchlevel) 1 LOC * macosx/Wish-Common.xcconfig (not patchlevel) 1 LOC * win/README (not patchlevel) * unix/README (not patchlevel) * unix/tk.spec (1 LOC patch) * win/tcl.m4 (not patchlevel) * * You may also need to update some of these files when the numbers change for * the version of Tcl that this release of Tk is compiled against. */ #define TK_MAJOR_VERSION 8 #define TK_MINOR_VERSION 5 #define TK_RELEASE_LEVEL TCL_FINAL_RELEASE #define TK_RELEASE_SERIAL 8 #define TK_VERSION "8.5" #define TK_PATCH_LEVEL "8.5.8" /* * A special definition used to allow this header file to be included from * windows or mac resource files so that they can obtain version information. * RC_INVOKED is defined by default by the windows RC tool and manually set * for macintosh. * * Resource compilers don't like all the C stuff, like typedefs and procedure * declarations, that occur below, so block them out. */ #ifndef RC_INVOKED #ifndef _XLIB_H # if defined(MAC_OSX_TK) # include # include # else # include # endif #endif #ifdef __STDC__ # include #endif #ifdef BUILD_tk # undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS # define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif /* * Decide whether or not to use input methods. */ #ifdef XNQueryInputStyle #define TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS #endif /* * Dummy types that are used by clients: */ typedef struct Tk_BindingTable_ *Tk_BindingTable; typedef struct Tk_Canvas_ *Tk_Canvas; typedef struct Tk_Cursor_ *Tk_Cursor; typedef struct Tk_ErrorHandler_ *Tk_ErrorHandler; typedef struct Tk_Font_ *Tk_Font; typedef struct Tk_Image__ *Tk_Image; typedef struct Tk_ImageMaster_ *Tk_ImageMaster; typedef struct Tk_OptionTable_ *Tk_OptionTable; typedef struct Tk_PostscriptInfo_ *Tk_PostscriptInfo; typedef struct Tk_TextLayout_ *Tk_TextLayout; typedef struct Tk_Window_ *Tk_Window; typedef struct Tk_3DBorder_ *Tk_3DBorder; typedef struct Tk_Style_ *Tk_Style; typedef struct Tk_StyleEngine_ *Tk_StyleEngine; typedef struct Tk_StyledElement_ *Tk_StyledElement; /* * Additional types exported to clients. */ typedef const char *Tk_Uid; /* * The enum below defines the valid types for Tk configuration options as * implemented by Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, etc. */ typedef enum { TK_OPTION_BOOLEAN, TK_OPTION_INT, TK_OPTION_DOUBLE, TK_OPTION_STRING, TK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE, TK_OPTION_COLOR, TK_OPTION_FONT, TK_OPTION_BITMAP, TK_OPTION_BORDER, TK_OPTION_RELIEF, TK_OPTION_CURSOR, TK_OPTION_JUSTIFY, TK_OPTION_ANCHOR, TK_OPTION_SYNONYM, TK_OPTION_PIXELS, TK_OPTION_WINDOW, TK_OPTION_END, TK_OPTION_CUSTOM, TK_OPTION_STYLE } Tk_OptionType; /* * Structures of the following type are used by widgets to specify their * configuration options. Typically each widget has a static array of these * structures, where each element of the array describes a single * configuration option. The array is passed to Tk_CreateOptionTable. */ typedef struct Tk_OptionSpec { Tk_OptionType type; /* Type of option, such as TK_OPTION_COLOR; * see definitions above. Last option in table * must have type TK_OPTION_END. */ const char *optionName; /* Name used to specify option in Tcl * commands. */ const char *dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */ const char *dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */ const char *defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified * in command line, the option database, or * the system. */ int objOffset; /* Where in record to store a Tcl_Obj * that * holds the value of this option, specified * as an offset in bytes from the start of the * record. Use the Tk_Offset macro to generate * values for this. -1 means don't store the * Tcl_Obj in the record. */ int internalOffset; /* Where in record to store the internal * representation of the value of this option, * such as an int or XColor *. This field is * specified as an offset in bytes from the * start of the record. Use the Tk_Offset * macro to generate values for it. -1 means * don't store the internal representation in * the record. */ int flags; /* Any combination of the values defined * below. */ ClientData clientData; /* An alternate place to put option-specific * data. Used for the monochrome default value * for colors, etc. */ int typeMask; /* An arbitrary bit mask defined by the class * manager; typically bits correspond to * certain kinds of options such as all those * that require a redisplay when they change. * Tk_SetOptions returns the bit-wise OR of * the typeMasks of all options that were * changed. */ } Tk_OptionSpec; /* * Flag values for Tk_OptionSpec structures. These flags are shared by * Tk_ConfigSpec structures, so be sure to coordinate any changes carefully. */ #define TK_OPTION_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #define TK_OPTION_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) /* * The following structure and function types are used by TK_OPTION_CUSTOM * options; the structure holds pointers to the functions needed by the Tk * option config code to handle a custom option. */ typedef int (Tk_CustomOptionSetProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj **value, char *widgRec, int offset, char *saveInternalPtr, int flags)); typedef Tcl_Obj *(Tk_CustomOptionGetProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset)); typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr, char *saveInternalPtr)); typedef void (Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *internalPtr)); typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption { const char *name; /* Name of the custom option. */ Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *setProc; /* Function to use to set a record's option * value from a Tcl_Obj */ Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *getProc; /* Function to use to get a Tcl_Obj * representation from an internal * representation of an option. */ Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *restoreProc; /* Function to use to restore a saved value * for the internal representation. */ Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *freeProc; /* Function to use to free the internal * representation of an option. */ ClientData clientData; /* Arbitrary one-word value passed to the * handling procs. */ } Tk_ObjCustomOption; /* * Macro to use to fill in "offset" fields of the Tk_OptionSpec structure. * Computes number of bytes from beginning of structure to a given field. */ #ifdef offsetof #define Tk_Offset(type, field) ((int) offsetof(type, field)) #else #define Tk_Offset(type, field) ((int) ((char *) &((type *) 0)->field)) #endif /* * The following two structures are used for error handling. When config * options are being modified, the old values are saved in a Tk_SavedOptions * structure. If an error occurs, then the contents of the structure can be * used to restore all of the old values. The contents of this structure are * for the private use Tk. No-one outside Tk should ever read or write any of * the fields of these structures. */ typedef struct Tk_SavedOption { struct TkOption *optionPtr; /* Points to information that describes the * option. */ Tcl_Obj *valuePtr; /* The old value of the option, in the form of * a Tcl object; may be NULL if the value was * not saved as an object. */ double internalForm; /* The old value of the option, in some * internal representation such as an int or * (XColor *). Valid only if the field * optionPtr->specPtr->objOffset is < 0. The * space must be large enough to accommodate a * double, a long, or a pointer; right now it * looks like a double (i.e., 8 bytes) is big * enough. Also, using a double guarantees * that the field is properly aligned for * storing large values. */ } Tk_SavedOption; #ifdef TCL_MEM_DEBUG # define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 2 #else # define TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS 20 #endif typedef struct Tk_SavedOptions { char *recordPtr; /* The data structure in which to restore * configuration options. */ Tk_Window tkwin; /* Window associated with recordPtr; needed to * restore certain options. */ int numItems; /* The number of valid items in items field. */ Tk_SavedOption items[TK_NUM_SAVED_OPTIONS]; /* Items used to hold old values. */ struct Tk_SavedOptions *nextPtr; /* Points to next structure in list; needed if * too many options changed to hold all the * old values in a single structure. NULL * means no more structures. */ } Tk_SavedOptions; /* * Structure used to describe application-specific configuration options: * indicates procedures to call to parse an option and to return a text string * describing an option. THESE ARE DEPRECATED; PLEASE USE THE NEW STRUCTURES * LISTED ABOVE. */ /* * This is a temporary flag used while tkObjConfig and new widgets are in * development. */ #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG typedef int (Tk_OptionParseProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST84 char *value, char *widgRec, int offset)); typedef char *(Tk_OptionPrintProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char *widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc **freeProcPtr)); typedef struct Tk_CustomOption { Tk_OptionParseProc *parseProc; /* Procedure to call to parse an option and * store it in converted form. */ Tk_OptionPrintProc *printProc; /* Procedure to return a printable string * describing an existing option. */ ClientData clientData; /* Arbitrary one-word value used by option * parser: passed to parseProc and * printProc. */ } Tk_CustomOption; /* * Structure used to specify information for Tk_ConfigureWidget. Each * structure gives complete information for one option, including how the * option is specified on the command line, where it appears in the option * database, etc. */ typedef struct Tk_ConfigSpec { int type; /* Type of option, such as TK_CONFIG_COLOR; * see definitions below. Last option in table * must have type TK_CONFIG_END. */ char *argvName; /* Switch used to specify option in argv. NULL * means this spec is part of a group. */ Tk_Uid dbName; /* Name for option in option database. */ Tk_Uid dbClass; /* Class for option in database. */ Tk_Uid defValue; /* Default value for option if not specified * in command line or database. */ int offset; /* Where in widget record to store value; use * Tk_Offset macro to generate values for * this. */ int specFlags; /* Any combination of the values defined * below; other bits are used internally by * tkConfig.c. */ Tk_CustomOption *customPtr; /* If type is TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM then this is a * pointer to info about how to parse and * print the option. Otherwise it is * irrelevant. */ } Tk_ConfigSpec; /* * Type values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures. See the user documentation for * details. */ typedef enum { TK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN, TK_CONFIG_INT, TK_CONFIG_DOUBLE, TK_CONFIG_STRING, TK_CONFIG_UID, TK_CONFIG_COLOR, TK_CONFIG_FONT, TK_CONFIG_BITMAP, TK_CONFIG_BORDER, TK_CONFIG_RELIEF, TK_CONFIG_CURSOR, TK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR, TK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY, TK_CONFIG_ANCHOR, TK_CONFIG_SYNONYM, TK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE, TK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE, TK_CONFIG_PIXELS, TK_CONFIG_MM, TK_CONFIG_WINDOW, TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, TK_CONFIG_END } Tk_ConfigTypes; /* * Possible values for flags argument to Tk_ConfigureWidget: */ #define TK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY 1 #define TK_CONFIG_OBJS 0x80 /* * Possible flag values for Tk_ConfigSpec structures. Any bits at or above * TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT may be used by clients for selecting certain entries. * Before changing any values here, coordinate with tkOldConfig.c * (internal-use-only flags are defined there). */ #define TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK (1 << 0) #define TK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY (1 << 1) #define TK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY (1 << 2) #define TK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT (1 << 3) #define TK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED (1 << 4) #define TK_CONFIG_USER_BIT 0x100 #endif /* __NO_OLD_CONFIG */ /* * Structure used to specify how to handle argv options. */ typedef struct { char *key; /* The key string that flags the option in the * argv array. */ int type; /* Indicates option type; see below. */ char *src; /* Value to be used in setting dst; usage * depends on type. */ char *dst; /* Address of value to be modified; usage * depends on type. */ char *help; /* Documentation message describing this * option. */ } Tk_ArgvInfo; /* * Legal values for the type field of a Tk_ArgvInfo: see the user * documentation for details. */ #define TK_ARGV_CONSTANT 15 #define TK_ARGV_INT 16 #define TK_ARGV_STRING 17 #define TK_ARGV_UID 18 #define TK_ARGV_REST 19 #define TK_ARGV_FLOAT 20 #define TK_ARGV_FUNC 21 #define TK_ARGV_GENFUNC 22 #define TK_ARGV_HELP 23 #define TK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION 24 #define TK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE 25 #define TK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE 26 #define TK_ARGV_END 27 /* * Flag bits for passing to Tk_ParseArgv: */ #define TK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS 0x1 #define TK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS 0x2 #define TK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV 0x4 #define TK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG 0x8 /* * Enumerated type for describing actions to be taken in response to a * restrictProc established by Tk_RestrictEvents. */ typedef enum { TK_DEFER_EVENT, TK_PROCESS_EVENT, TK_DISCARD_EVENT } Tk_RestrictAction; /* * Priority levels to pass to Tk_AddOption: */ #define TK_WIDGET_DEFAULT_PRIO 20 #define TK_STARTUP_FILE_PRIO 40 #define TK_USER_DEFAULT_PRIO 60 #define TK_INTERACTIVE_PRIO 80 #define TK_MAX_PRIO 100 /* * Relief values returned by Tk_GetRelief: */ #define TK_RELIEF_NULL -1 #define TK_RELIEF_FLAT 0 #define TK_RELIEF_GROOVE 1 #define TK_RELIEF_RAISED 2 #define TK_RELIEF_RIDGE 3 #define TK_RELIEF_SOLID 4 #define TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN 5 /* * "Which" argument values for Tk_3DBorderGC: */ #define TK_3D_FLAT_GC 1 #define TK_3D_LIGHT_GC 2 #define TK_3D_DARK_GC 3 /* * Special EnterNotify/LeaveNotify "mode" for use in events generated by * tkShare.c. Pick a high enough value that it's unlikely to conflict with * existing values (like NotifyNormal) or any new values defined in the * future. */ #define TK_NOTIFY_SHARE 20 /* * Enumerated type for describing a point by which to anchor something: */ typedef enum { TK_ANCHOR_N, TK_ANCHOR_NE, TK_ANCHOR_E, TK_ANCHOR_SE, TK_ANCHOR_S, TK_ANCHOR_SW, TK_ANCHOR_W, TK_ANCHOR_NW, TK_ANCHOR_CENTER } Tk_Anchor; /* * Enumerated type for describing a style of justification: */ typedef enum { TK_JUSTIFY_LEFT, TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT, TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER } Tk_Justify; /* * The following structure is used by Tk_GetFontMetrics() to return * information about the properties of a Tk_Font. */ typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics { int ascent; /* The amount in pixels that the tallest * letter sticks up above the baseline, plus * any extra blank space added by the designer * of the font. */ int descent; /* The largest amount in pixels that any * letter sticks below the baseline, plus any * extra blank space added by the designer of * the font. */ int linespace; /* The sum of the ascent and descent. How far * apart two lines of text in the same font * should be placed so that none of the * characters in one line overlap any of the * characters in the other line. */ } Tk_FontMetrics; /* * Flags passed to Tk_MeasureChars: */ #define TK_WHOLE_WORDS 1 #define TK_AT_LEAST_ONE 2 #define TK_PARTIAL_OK 4 /* * Flags passed to Tk_ComputeTextLayout: */ #define TK_IGNORE_TABS 8 #define TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES 16 /* * Widget class procedures used to implement platform specific widget * behavior. */ typedef Window (Tk_ClassCreateProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, Window parent, ClientData instanceData)); typedef void (Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData)); typedef void (Tk_ClassModalProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr)); typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs { unsigned int size; Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *worldChangedProc; /* Procedure to invoke when the widget needs * to respond in some way to a change in the * world (font changes, etc.) */ Tk_ClassCreateProc *createProc; /* Procedure to invoke when the platform- * dependent window needs to be created. */ Tk_ClassModalProc *modalProc; /* Procedure to invoke after all bindings on a * widget have been triggered in order to * handle a modal loop. */ } Tk_ClassProcs; /* * Simple accessor for Tk_ClassProcs structure. Checks that the structure is * not NULL, then checks the size field and returns either the requested * field, if present, or NULL if the structure is too small to have the field * (or NULL if the structure is NULL). * * A more general version of this function may be useful if other * size-versioned structure pop up in the future: * * #define Tk_GetField(name, who, which) \ * (((who) == NULL) ? NULL : * (((who)->size <= Tk_Offset(name, which)) ? NULL :(name)->which)) */ #define Tk_GetClassProc(procs, which) \ (((procs) == NULL) ? NULL : \ (((procs)->size <= Tk_Offset(Tk_ClassProcs, which)) ? NULL:(procs)->which)) /* * Each geometry manager (the packer, the placer, etc.) is represented by a * structure of the following form, which indicates procedures to invoke in * the geometry manager to carry out certain functions. */ typedef void (Tk_GeomRequestProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin)); typedef void (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin)); typedef struct Tk_GeomMgr { const char *name; /* Name of the geometry manager (command used * to invoke it, or name of widget class that * allows embedded widgets). */ Tk_GeomRequestProc *requestProc; /* Procedure to invoke when a slave's * requested geometry changes. */ Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *lostSlaveProc; /* Procedure to invoke when a slave is taken * away from one geometry manager by another. * NULL means geometry manager doesn't care * when slaves are lost. */ } Tk_GeomMgr; /* * Result values returned by Tk_GetScrollInfo: */ #define TK_SCROLL_MOVETO 1 #define TK_SCROLL_PAGES 2 #define TK_SCROLL_UNITS 3 #define TK_SCROLL_ERROR 4 /* *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- * * Extensions to the X event set * *--------------------------------------------------------------------------- */ #define VirtualEvent (MappingNotify + 1) #define ActivateNotify (MappingNotify + 2) #define DeactivateNotify (MappingNotify + 3) #define MouseWheelEvent (MappingNotify + 4) #define TK_LASTEVENT (MappingNotify + 5) #define MouseWheelMask (1L << 28) #define ActivateMask (1L << 29) #define VirtualEventMask (1L << 30) /* * A virtual event shares most of its fields with the XKeyEvent and * XButtonEvent structures. 99% of the time a virtual event will be an * abstraction of a key or button event, so this structure provides the most * information to the user. The only difference is the changing of the detail * field for a virtual event so that it holds the name of the virtual event * being triggered. * * When using this structure, you should ensure that you zero out all the * fields first using memset() or bzero(). */ typedef struct { int type; unsigned long serial; /* # of last request processed by server. */ Bool send_event; /* True if this came from a SendEvent * request. */ Display *display; /* Display the event was read from. */ Window event; /* Window on which event was requested. */ Window root; /* Root window that the event occured on. */ Window subwindow; /* Child window. */ Time time; /* Milliseconds. */ int x, y; /* Pointer x, y coordinates in event * window. */ int x_root, y_root; /* Coordinates relative to root. */ unsigned int state; /* Key or button mask */ Tk_Uid name; /* Name of virtual event. */ Bool same_screen; /* Same screen flag. */ Tcl_Obj *user_data; /* Application-specific data reference; Tk * will decrement the reference count *once* * when it has finished processing the * event. */ } XVirtualEvent; typedef struct { int type; unsigned long serial; /* # of last request processed by server. */ Bool send_event; /* True if this came from a SendEvent * request. */ Display *display; /* Display the event was read from. */ Window window; /* Window in which event occurred. */ } XActivateDeactivateEvent; typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XActivateEvent; typedef XActivateDeactivateEvent XDeactivateEvent; /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Macros for querying Tk_Window structures. See the manual entries for * documentation. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ #define Tk_Display(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->display) #define Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->screenNum) #define Tk_Screen(tkwin) \ (ScreenOfDisplay(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin))) #define Tk_Depth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->depth) #define Tk_Visual(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->visual) #define Tk_WindowId(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->window) #define Tk_PathName(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->pathName) #define Tk_Name(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->nameUid) #define Tk_Class(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->classUid) #define Tk_X(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.x) #define Tk_Y(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.y) #define Tk_Width(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.width) #define Tk_Height(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes.height) #define Tk_Changes(tkwin) (&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->changes) #define Tk_Attributes(tkwin) (&((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts) #define Tk_IsEmbedded(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) #define Tk_IsContainer(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_CONTAINER) #define Tk_IsMapped(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_MAPPED) #define Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) #define Tk_HasWrapper(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_HAS_WRAPPER) #define Tk_WinManaged(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WIN_MANAGED) #define Tk_TopWinHierarchy(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_TOP_HIERARCHY) #define Tk_IsManageable(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->flags & TK_WM_MANAGEABLE) #define Tk_ReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqWidth) #define Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->reqHeight) /* Tk_InternalBorderWidth is deprecated */ #define Tk_InternalBorderWidth(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft) #define Tk_InternalBorderLeft(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderLeft) #define Tk_InternalBorderRight(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderRight) #define Tk_InternalBorderTop(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderTop) #define Tk_InternalBorderBottom(tkwin) \ (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->internalBorderBottom) #define Tk_MinReqWidth(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqWidth) #define Tk_MinReqHeight(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->minReqHeight) #define Tk_Parent(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->parentPtr) #define Tk_Colormap(tkwin) (((Tk_FakeWin *) (tkwin))->atts.colormap) /* * The structure below is needed by the macros above so that they can access * the fields of a Tk_Window. The fields not needed by the macros are declared * as "dummyX". The structure has its own type in order to prevent apps from * accessing Tk_Window fields except using official macros. WARNING!! The * structure definition must be kept consistent with the TkWindow structure in * tkInt.h. If you change one, then change the other. See the declaration in * tkInt.h for documentation on what the fields are used for internally. */ typedef struct Tk_FakeWin { Display *display; char *dummy1; /* dispPtr */ int screenNum; Visual *visual; int depth; Window window; char *dummy2; /* childList */ char *dummy3; /* lastChildPtr */ Tk_Window parentPtr; /* parentPtr */ char *dummy4; /* nextPtr */ char *dummy5; /* mainPtr */ char *pathName; Tk_Uid nameUid; Tk_Uid classUid; XWindowChanges changes; unsigned int dummy6; /* dirtyChanges */ XSetWindowAttributes atts; unsigned long dummy7; /* dirtyAtts */ unsigned int flags; char *dummy8; /* handlerList */ #ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS XIC dummy9; /* inputContext */ #endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */ ClientData *dummy10; /* tagPtr */ int dummy11; /* numTags */ int dummy12; /* optionLevel */ char *dummy13; /* selHandlerList */ char *dummy14; /* geomMgrPtr */ ClientData dummy15; /* geomData */ int reqWidth, reqHeight; int internalBorderLeft; char *dummy16; /* wmInfoPtr */ char *dummy17; /* classProcPtr */ ClientData dummy18; /* instanceData */ char *dummy19; /* privatePtr */ int internalBorderRight; int internalBorderTop; int internalBorderBottom; int minReqWidth; int minReqHeight; } Tk_FakeWin; /* * Flag values for TkWindow (and Tk_FakeWin) structures are: * * TK_MAPPED: 1 means window is currently mapped, * 0 means unmapped. * TK_TOP_LEVEL: 1 means this is a top-level widget. * TK_ALREADY_DEAD: 1 means the window is in the process of * being destroyed already. * TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY: 1 means that the window has been reconfigured * before it was made to exist. At the time of * making it exist a ConfigureNotify event needs * to be generated. * TK_GRAB_FLAG: Used to manage grabs. See tkGrab.c for details * TK_CHECKED_IC: 1 means we've already tried to get an input * context for this window; if the ic field is * NULL it means that there isn't a context for * the field. * TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW: 1 means that Tk_DestroyWindow should not * invoke XDestroyWindow to destroy this widget's * X window. The flag is set when the window has * already been destroyed elsewhere (e.g. by * another application) or when it will be * destroyed later (e.g. by destroying its parent) * TK_WM_COLORMAP_WINDOW: 1 means that this window has at some time * appeared in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property * for its toplevel, so we have to remove it from * that property if the window is deleted and the * toplevel isn't. * TK_EMBEDDED: 1 means that this window (which must be a * toplevel) is not a free-standing window but * rather is embedded in some other application. * TK_CONTAINER: 1 means that this window is a container, and * that some other application (either in this * process or elsewhere) may be embedding itself * inside the window. * TK_BOTH_HALVES: 1 means that this window is used for * application embedding (either as container or * embedded application), and both the containing * and embedded halves are associated with * windows in this particular process. * TK_DEFER_MODAL: 1 means that this window has deferred a modal * loop until all of the bindings for the current * event have been invoked. * TK_WRAPPER: 1 means that this window is the extra wrapper * window created around a toplevel to hold the * menubar under Unix. See tkUnixWm.c for more * information. * TK_REPARENTED: 1 means that this window has been reparented * so that as far as the window system is * concerned it isn't a child of its Tk parent. * Initially this is used only for special Unix * menubar windows. * TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW: 1 means that this window has no name, and is * thus not accessible from Tk. * TK_HAS_WRAPPER 1 means that this window has a wrapper window * TK_WIN_MANAGED 1 means that this window is a child of the root * window, and is managed by the window manager. * TK_TOP_HIERARCHY 1 means this window is at the top of a physical * window hierarchy within this process, i.e. the * window's parent either doesn't exist or is not * owned by this Tk application. * TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE 1 means that PropertyNotify events in the * window's children should propagate up to this * window. * TK_WM_MANAGEABLE 1 marks a window as capable of being converted * into a toplevel using [wm manage]. */ #define TK_MAPPED 1 #define TK_TOP_LEVEL 2 #define TK_ALREADY_DEAD 4 #define TK_NEED_CONFIG_NOTIFY 8 #define TK_GRAB_FLAG 0x10 #define TK_CHECKED_IC 0x20 #define TK_DONT_DESTROY_WINDOW 0x40 #define TK_WM_COLORMAP_WINDOW 0x80 #define TK_EMBEDDED 0x100 #define TK_CONTAINER 0x200 #define TK_BOTH_HALVES 0x400 #define TK_DEFER_MODAL 0x800 #define TK_WRAPPER 0x1000 #define TK_REPARENTED 0x2000 #define TK_ANONYMOUS_WINDOW 0x4000 #define TK_HAS_WRAPPER 0x8000 #define TK_WIN_MANAGED 0x10000 #define TK_TOP_HIERARCHY 0x20000 #define TK_PROP_PROPCHANGE 0x40000 #define TK_WM_MANAGEABLE 0x80000 /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for defining new canvas items: * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef enum { TK_STATE_NULL = -1, TK_STATE_ACTIVE, TK_STATE_DISABLED, TK_STATE_NORMAL, TK_STATE_HIDDEN } Tk_State; typedef struct Tk_SmoothMethod { char *name; int (*coordProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, double *pointPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps, XPoint xPoints[], double dblPoints[])); void (*postscriptProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double *coordPtr, int numPoints, int numSteps)); } Tk_SmoothMethod; /* * For each item in a canvas widget there exists one record with the following * structure. Each actual item is represented by a record with the following * stuff at its beginning, plus additional type-specific stuff after that. */ #define TK_TAG_SPACE 3 typedef struct Tk_Item { int id; /* Unique identifier for this item (also * serves as first tag for item). */ struct Tk_Item *nextPtr; /* Next in display list of all items in this * canvas. Later items in list are drawn on * top of earlier ones. */ Tk_Uid staticTagSpace[TK_TAG_SPACE]; /* Built-in space for limited # of tags. */ Tk_Uid *tagPtr; /* Pointer to array of tags. Usually points to * staticTagSpace, but may point to malloc-ed * space if there are lots of tags. */ int tagSpace; /* Total amount of tag space available at * tagPtr. */ int numTags; /* Number of tag slots actually used at * *tagPtr. */ struct Tk_ItemType *typePtr;/* Table of procedures that implement this * type of item. */ int x1, y1, x2, y2; /* Bounding box for item, in integer canvas * units. Set by item-specific code and * guaranteed to contain every pixel drawn in * item. Item area includes x1 and y1 but not * x2 and y2. */ struct Tk_Item *prevPtr; /* Previous in display list of all items in * this canvas. Later items in list are drawn * just below earlier ones. */ Tk_State state; /* State of item. */ char *reserved1; /* reserved for future use */ int redraw_flags; /* Some flags used in the canvas */ /* *------------------------------------------------------------------ * Starting here is additional type-specific stuff; see the declarations * for individual types to see what is part of each type. The actual space * below is determined by the "itemInfoSize" of the type's Tk_ItemType * record. *------------------------------------------------------------------ */ } Tk_Item; /* * Flag bits for canvases (redraw_flags): * * TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT - 1 means that object needs to be redrawn if the * canvas state changes. * TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW - 1 means that the object redraw is already been * prepared, so the general canvas code doesn't * need to do that any more. */ #define TK_ITEM_STATE_DEPENDANT 1 #define TK_ITEM_DONT_REDRAW 2 /* * Records of the following type are used to describe a type of item (e.g. * lines, circles, etc.) that can form part of a canvas widget. */ #ifdef USE_OLD_CANVAS typedef int Tk_ItemCreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv)); typedef int Tk_ItemConfigureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv, int flags)); typedef int Tk_ItemCoordProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, char **argv)); #else typedef int Tk_ItemCreateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[])); typedef int Tk_ItemConfigureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], int flags)); typedef int Tk_ItemCoordProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int argc, Tcl_Obj *const argv[])); #endif typedef void Tk_ItemDeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display)); typedef void Tk_ItemDisplayProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, Display *display, Drawable dst, int x, int y, int width, int height)); typedef double Tk_ItemPointProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *pointPtr)); typedef int Tk_ItemAreaProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double *rectPtr)); typedef int Tk_ItemPostscriptProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int prepass)); typedef void Tk_ItemScaleProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double originX, double originY, double scaleX, double scaleY)); typedef void Tk_ItemTranslateProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, double deltaX, double deltaY)); typedef int Tk_ItemIndexProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, char *indexString, int *indexPtr)); typedef void Tk_ItemCursorProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int index)); typedef int Tk_ItemSelectionProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes)); typedef void Tk_ItemInsertProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int beforeThis, char *string)); typedef void Tk_ItemDCharsProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item *itemPtr, int first, int last)); #ifndef __NO_OLD_CONFIG typedef struct Tk_ItemType { char *name; /* The name of this type of item, such as * "line". */ int itemSize; /* Total amount of space needed for item's * record. */ Tk_ItemCreateProc *createProc; /* Procedure to create a new item of this * type. */ Tk_ConfigSpec *configSpecs; /* Pointer to array of configuration specs for * this type. Used for returning configuration * info. */ Tk_ItemConfigureProc *configProc; /* Procedure to call to change configuration * options. */ Tk_ItemCoordProc *coordProc;/* Procedure to call to get and set the item's * coordinates. */ Tk_ItemDeleteProc *deleteProc; /* Procedure to delete existing item of this * type. */ Tk_ItemDisplayProc *displayProc; /* Procedure to display items of this type. */ int alwaysRedraw; /* Non-zero means displayProc should be called * even when the item has been moved * off-screen. */ Tk_ItemPointProc *pointProc;/* Computes distance from item to a given * point. */ Tk_ItemAreaProc *areaProc; /* Computes whether item is inside, outside, * or overlapping an area. */ Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *postscriptProc; /* Procedure to write a Postscript description * for items of this type. */ Tk_ItemScaleProc *scaleProc;/* Procedure to rescale items of this type. */ Tk_ItemTranslateProc *translateProc; /* Procedure to translate items of this * type. */ Tk_ItemIndexProc *indexProc;/* Procedure to determine index of indicated * character. NULL if item doesn't support * indexing. */ Tk_ItemCursorProc *icursorProc; /* Procedure to set insert cursor posn to just * before a given position. */ Tk_ItemSelectionProc *selectionProc; /* Procedure to return selection (in STRING * format) when it is in this item. */ Tk_ItemInsertProc *insertProc; /* Procedure to insert something into an * item. */ Tk_ItemDCharsProc *dCharsProc; /* Procedure to delete characters from an * item. */ struct Tk_ItemType *nextPtr;/* Used to link types together into a list. */ char *reserved1; /* Reserved for future extension. */ int reserved2; /* Carefully compatible with */ char *reserved3; /* Jan Nijtmans dash patch */ char *reserved4; } Tk_ItemType; #endif /* * The following structure provides information about the selection and the * insertion cursor. It is needed by only a few items, such as those that * display text. It is shared by the generic canvas code and the item-specific * code, but most of the fields should be written only by the canvas generic * code. */ typedef struct Tk_CanvasTextInfo { Tk_3DBorder selBorder; /* Border and background for selected * characters. Read-only to items.*/ int selBorderWidth; /* Width of border around selection. Read-only * to items. */ XColor *selFgColorPtr; /* Foreground color for selected text. * Read-only to items. */ Tk_Item *selItemPtr; /* Pointer to selected item. NULL means * selection isn't in this canvas. Writable by * items. */ int selectFirst; /* Character index of first selected * character. Writable by items. */ int selectLast; /* Character index of last selected character. * Writable by items. */ Tk_Item *anchorItemPtr; /* Item corresponding to "selectAnchor": not * necessarily selItemPtr. Read-only to * items. */ int selectAnchor; /* Character index of fixed end of selection * (i.e. "select to" operation will use this * as one end of the selection). Writable by * items. */ Tk_3DBorder insertBorder; /* Used to draw vertical bar for insertion * cursor. Read-only to items. */ int insertWidth; /* Total width of insertion cursor. Read-only * to items. */ int insertBorderWidth; /* Width of 3-D border around insert cursor. * Read-only to items. */ Tk_Item *focusItemPtr; /* Item that currently has the input focus, or * NULL if no such item. Read-only to items. */ int gotFocus; /* Non-zero means that the canvas widget has * the input focus. Read-only to items.*/ int cursorOn; /* Non-zero means that an insertion cursor * should be displayed in focusItemPtr. * Read-only to items.*/ } Tk_CanvasTextInfo; /* * Structures used for Dashing and Outline. */ typedef struct Tk_Dash { int number; union { char *pt; char array[sizeof(char *)]; } pattern; } Tk_Dash; typedef struct Tk_TSOffset { int flags; /* Flags; see below for possible values */ int xoffset; /* x offset */ int yoffset; /* y offset */ } Tk_TSOffset; /* * Bit fields in Tk_Offset->flags: */ #define TK_OFFSET_INDEX 1 #define TK_OFFSET_RELATIVE 2 #define TK_OFFSET_LEFT 4 #define TK_OFFSET_CENTER 8 #define TK_OFFSET_RIGHT 16 #define TK_OFFSET_TOP 32 #define TK_OFFSET_MIDDLE 64 #define TK_OFFSET_BOTTOM 128 typedef struct Tk_Outline { GC gc; /* Graphics context. */ double width; /* Width of outline. */ double activeWidth; /* Width of outline. */ double disabledWidth; /* Width of outline. */ int offset; /* Dash offset. */ Tk_Dash dash; /* Dash pattern. */ Tk_Dash activeDash; /* Dash pattern if state is active. */ Tk_Dash disabledDash; /* Dash pattern if state is disabled. */ VOID *reserved1; /* Reserved for future expansion. */ VOID *reserved2; VOID *reserved3; Tk_TSOffset tsoffset; /* Stipple offset for outline. */ XColor *color; /* Outline color. */ XColor *activeColor; /* Outline color if state is active. */ XColor *disabledColor; /* Outline color if state is disabled. */ Pixmap stipple; /* Outline Stipple pattern. */ Pixmap activeStipple; /* Outline Stipple pattern if state is * active. */ Pixmap disabledStipple; /* Outline Stipple pattern if state is * disabled. */ } Tk_Outline; /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing images: * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef struct Tk_ImageType Tk_ImageType; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, int argc, char **argv, Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master, ClientData *masterDataPtr)); #else typedef int (Tk_ImageCreateProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *name, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[], Tk_ImageType *typePtr, Tk_ImageMaster master, ClientData *masterDataPtr)); #endif typedef ClientData (Tk_ImageGetProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, ClientData masterData)); typedef void (Tk_ImageDisplayProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData, Display *display, Drawable drawable, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, int drawableX, int drawableY)); typedef void (Tk_ImageFreeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData instanceData, Display *display)); typedef void (Tk_ImageDeleteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData masterData)); typedef void (Tk_ImageChangedProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight)); typedef int (Tk_ImagePostscriptProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass)); /* * The following structure represents a particular type of image (bitmap, xpm * image, etc.). It provides information common to all images of that type, * such as the type name and a collection of procedures in the image manager * that respond to various events. Each image manager is represented by one of * these structures. */ struct Tk_ImageType { char *name; /* Name of image type. */ Tk_ImageCreateProc *createProc; /* Procedure to call to create a new image of * this type. */ Tk_ImageGetProc *getProc; /* Procedure to call the first time * Tk_GetImage is called in a new way (new * visual or screen). */ Tk_ImageDisplayProc *displayProc; /* Call to draw image, in response to * Tk_RedrawImage calls. */ Tk_ImageFreeProc *freeProc; /* Procedure to call whenever Tk_FreeImage is * called to release an instance of an * image. */ Tk_ImageDeleteProc *deleteProc; /* Procedure to call to delete image. It will * not be called until after freeProc has been * called for each instance of the image. */ Tk_ImagePostscriptProc *postscriptProc; /* Procedure to call to produce postscript * output for the image. */ struct Tk_ImageType *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all image types currently * known. Filled in by Tk, not by image * manager. */ char *reserved; /* reserved for future expansion */ }; /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Additional definitions used to manage images of type "photo". * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ /* * The following type is used to identify a particular photo image to be * manipulated: */ typedef void *Tk_PhotoHandle; /* * The following structure describes a block of pixels in memory: */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageBlock { unsigned char *pixelPtr; /* Pointer to the first pixel. */ int width; /* Width of block, in pixels. */ int height; /* Height of block, in pixels. */ int pitch; /* Address difference between corresponding * pixels in successive lines. */ int pixelSize; /* Address difference between successive * pixels in the same line. */ int offset[4]; /* Address differences between the red, green, * blue and alpha components of the pixel and * the pixel as a whole. */ } Tk_PhotoImageBlock; /* * The following values control how blocks are combined into photo images when * the alpha component of a pixel is not 255, a.k.a. the compositing rule. */ #define TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY 0 #define TK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET 1 /* * Procedure prototypes and structures used in reading and writing photo * images: */ typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat Tk_PhotoImageFormat; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, char *formatString, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((char *string, char *formatString, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, char *fileName, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *string, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY)); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, char *fileName, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_DString *dataPtr, char *formatString, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)); #else typedef int (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringMatchProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr, Tcl_Interp *interp)); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Channel chan, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringReadProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *dataObj, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoHandle imageHandle, int destX, int destY, int width, int height, int srcX, int srcY)); typedef int (Tk_ImageFileWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *fileName, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)); typedef int (Tk_ImageStringWriteProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *format, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr)); #endif /* * The following structure represents a particular file format for storing * images (e.g., PPM, GIF, JPEG, etc.). It provides information to allow image * files of that format to be recognized and read into a photo image. */ struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat { char *name; /* Name of image file format */ Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *fileMatchProc; /* Procedure to call to determine whether an * image file matches this format. */ Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *stringMatchProc; /* Procedure to call to determine whether the * data in a string matches this format. */ Tk_ImageFileReadProc *fileReadProc; /* Procedure to call to read data from an * image file into a photo image. */ Tk_ImageStringReadProc *stringReadProc; /* Procedure to call to read data from a * string into a photo image. */ Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *fileWriteProc; /* Procedure to call to write data from a * photo image to a file. */ Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *stringWriteProc; /* Procedure to call to obtain a string * representation of the data in a photo * image.*/ struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat *nextPtr; /* Next in list of all photo image formats * currently known. Filled in by Tk, not by * image format handler. */ }; #ifdef USE_OLD_IMAGE #define Tk_CreateImageType Tk_CreateOldImageType #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #endif /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Procedure prototypes and structures used for managing styles: * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ /* * Style support version tag. */ #define TK_STYLE_VERSION_1 0x1 #define TK_STYLE_VERSION TK_STYLE_VERSION_1 /* * The following structures and prototypes are used as static templates to * declare widget elements. */ typedef void (Tk_GetElementSizeProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); typedef void (Tk_GetElementBoxProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int *xPtr, int *yPtr, int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr)); typedef int (Tk_GetElementBorderWidthProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin)); typedef void (Tk_DrawElementProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, char *recordPtr, const Tk_OptionSpec **optionsPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state)); typedef struct Tk_ElementOptionSpec { char *name; /* Name of the required option. */ Tk_OptionType type; /* Accepted option type. TK_OPTION_END means * any. */ } Tk_ElementOptionSpec; typedef struct Tk_ElementSpec { int version; /* Version of the style support. */ char *name; /* Name of element. */ Tk_ElementOptionSpec *options; /* List of required options. Last one's name * must be NULL. */ Tk_GetElementSizeProc *getSize; /* Compute the external (resp. internal) size * of the element from its desired internal * (resp. external) size. */ Tk_GetElementBoxProc *getBox; /* Compute the inscribed or bounding boxes * within a given area. */ Tk_GetElementBorderWidthProc *getBorderWidth; /* Return the element's internal border width. * Mostly useful for widgets. */ Tk_DrawElementProc *draw; /* Draw the element in the given bounding * box. */ } Tk_ElementSpec; /* * Element state flags. Can be OR'ed. */ #define TK_ELEMENT_STATE_ACTIVE 1<<0 #define TK_ELEMENT_STATE_DISABLED 1<<1 #define TK_ELEMENT_STATE_FOCUS 1<<2 #define TK_ELEMENT_STATE_PRESSED 1<<3 /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * The definitions below provide backward compatibility for functions and * types related to event handling that used to be in Tk but have moved to * Tcl. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ #define TK_READABLE TCL_READABLE #define TK_WRITABLE TCL_WRITABLE #define TK_EXCEPTION TCL_EXCEPTION #define TK_DONT_WAIT TCL_DONT_WAIT #define TK_X_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS #define TK_WINDOW_EVENTS TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS #define TK_FILE_EVENTS TCL_FILE_EVENTS #define TK_TIMER_EVENTS TCL_TIMER_EVENTS #define TK_IDLE_EVENTS TCL_IDLE_EVENTS #define TK_ALL_EVENTS TCL_ALL_EVENTS #define Tk_IdleProc Tcl_IdleProc #define Tk_FileProc Tcl_FileProc #define Tk_TimerProc Tcl_TimerProc #define Tk_TimerToken Tcl_TimerToken #define Tk_BackgroundError Tcl_BackgroundError #define Tk_CancelIdleCall Tcl_CancelIdleCall #define Tk_CreateFileHandler Tcl_CreateFileHandler #define Tk_CreateTimerHandler Tcl_CreateTimerHandler #define Tk_DeleteFileHandler Tcl_DeleteFileHandler #define Tk_DeleteTimerHandler Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler #define Tk_DoOneEvent Tcl_DoOneEvent #define Tk_DoWhenIdle Tcl_DoWhenIdle #define Tk_Sleep Tcl_Sleep /* Additional stuff that has moved to Tcl: */ #define Tk_EventuallyFree Tcl_EventuallyFree #define Tk_FreeProc Tcl_FreeProc #define Tk_Preserve Tcl_Preserve #define Tk_Release Tcl_Release /* Removed Tk_Main, use macro instead */ #define Tk_Main(argc, argv, proc) \ Tk_MainEx(argc, argv, proc, Tcl_CreateInterp()) const char * Tk_InitStubs _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version, int exact)); EXTERN const char * Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, const char *version, int exact)); #ifndef USE_TK_STUBS #define Tk_InitStubs(interp, version, exact) \ Tk_PkgInitStubsCheck(interp, version, exact) #endif #define Tk_InitImageArgs(interp, argc, argv) /**/ /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Additional procedure types defined by Tk. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ typedef int (Tk_ErrorProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, XErrorEvent *errEventPtr)); typedef void (Tk_EventProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)); typedef int (Tk_GenericProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)); typedef int (Tk_ClientMessageProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr)); typedef int (Tk_GetSelProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp *interp, char *portion)); typedef void (Tk_LostSelProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData)); typedef Tk_RestrictAction (Tk_RestrictProc) _ANSI_ARGS_(( ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr)); typedef int (Tk_SelectionProc) _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData, int offset, char *buffer, int maxBytes)); /* *-------------------------------------------------------------- * * Platform independant exported procedures and variables. * *-------------------------------------------------------------- */ #include "tkDecls.h" /* * Allow users to say that they don't want to alter their source to add extra * arguments to Tk_PhotoPutBlock() et al; DO NOT DEFINE THIS WHEN BUILDING TK. * * This goes after the inclusion of the stubbed-decls so that the declarations * of what is actually there can be correct. */ #ifdef USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutBlock Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite # define USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE #else /* !USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */ # ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutBlock Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # undef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock # endif # define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic # endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ #endif /* USE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK */ #ifdef USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE # ifdef Tk_PhotoExpand # undef Tk_PhotoExpand # endif # define Tk_PhotoExpand Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic # ifdef Tk_PhotoSetSize # undef Tk_PhotoSetSize # endif # define Tk_PhotoSetSize Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #endif /* USE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE */ /* * Tcl commands exported by Tk: */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* RC_INVOKED */ /* * end block for C++ */ #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #endif /* _TK */ /* * Local Variables: * mode: c * c-basic-offset: 4 * fill-column: 78 * End: */ 0707010004703e000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c583e0001aad10000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/include/tkDecls.h/* * tkDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform independent public Tcl API. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. * * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkDecls.h,v 1.30 2007/05/14 20:58:26 dgp Exp $ */ #ifndef _TKDECLS #define _TKDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif /* * WARNING: This file is automatically generated by the tools/genStubs.tcl * script. Any modifications to the function declarations below should be made * in the generic/tk.decls script. */ /* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */ /* * Exported function declarations: */ #ifndef Tk_MainLoop_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MainLoop_TCL_DECLARED /* 0 */ EXTERN void Tk_MainLoop (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_3DBorderColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_3DBorderColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 1 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_3DBorderColor (Tk_3DBorder border); #endif #ifndef Tk_3DBorderGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_3DBorderGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 2 */ EXTERN GC Tk_3DBorderGC (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which); #endif #ifndef Tk_3DHorizontalBevel_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_3DHorizontalBevel_TCL_DECLARED /* 3 */ EXTERN void Tk_3DHorizontalBevel (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftIn, int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief); #endif #ifndef Tk_3DVerticalBevel_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_3DVerticalBevel_TCL_DECLARED /* 4 */ EXTERN void Tk_3DVerticalBevel (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftBevel, int relief); #endif #ifndef Tk_AddOption_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AddOption_TCL_DECLARED /* 5 */ EXTERN void Tk_AddOption (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, CONST char * value, int priority); #endif #ifndef Tk_BindEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_BindEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 6 */ EXTERN void Tk_BindEvent (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, XEvent * eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int numObjects, ClientData * objectPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords_TCL_DECLARED /* 7 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short * drawableXPtr, short * drawableYPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw_TCL_DECLARED /* 8 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw (Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoord_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasGetCoord_TCL_DECLARED /* 9 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasGetCoord (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, CONST char * str, double * doublePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo_TCL_DECLARED /* 10 */ EXTERN Tk_CanvasTextInfo * Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo (Tk_Canvas canvas); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 11 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasPsBitmap (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 12 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasPsColor (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor * colorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsFont_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsFont_TCL_DECLARED /* 13 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasPsFont (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsPath_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsPath_TCL_DECLARED /* 14 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasPsPath (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double * coordPtr, int numPoints); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsStipple_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsStipple_TCL_DECLARED /* 15 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasPsStipple (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsY_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsY_TCL_DECLARED /* 16 */ EXTERN double Tk_CanvasPsY (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin_TCL_DECLARED /* 17 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc_TCL_DECLARED /* 18 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * value, char * widgRec, int offset); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc_TCL_DECLARED /* 19 */ EXTERN char * Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char * widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc ** freeProcPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTkwin_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasTkwin_TCL_DECLARED /* 20 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CanvasTkwin (Tk_Canvas canvas); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasWindowCoords_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasWindowCoords_TCL_DECLARED /* 21 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasWindowCoords (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short * screenXPtr, short * screenYPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes_TCL_DECLARED /* 22 */ EXTERN void Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes * attsPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CharBbox_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CharBbox_TCL_DECLARED /* 23 */ EXTERN int Tk_CharBbox (Tk_TextLayout layout, int index, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_ClearSelection_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ClearSelection_TCL_DECLARED /* 24 */ EXTERN void Tk_ClearSelection (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); #endif #ifndef Tk_ClipboardAppend_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ClipboardAppend_TCL_DECLARED /* 25 */ EXTERN int Tk_ClipboardAppend (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, char* buffer); #endif #ifndef Tk_ClipboardClear_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ClipboardClear_TCL_DECLARED /* 26 */ EXTERN int Tk_ClipboardClear (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureInfo_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ConfigureInfo_TCL_DECLARED /* 27 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureInfo (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, CONST char * argvName, int flags); #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureValue_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ConfigureValue_TCL_DECLARED /* 28 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureValue (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, CONST char * argvName, int flags); #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureWidget_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ConfigureWidget_TCL_DECLARED /* 29 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigureWidget (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, int argc, CONST84 char ** argv, char * widgRec, int flags); #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ConfigureWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 30 */ EXTERN void Tk_ConfigureWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges * valuePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_ComputeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ComputeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 31 */ EXTERN Tk_TextLayout Tk_ComputeTextLayout (Tk_Font font, CONST char * str, int numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CoordsToWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 32 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CoordsToWindow (int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateBinding_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateBinding_TCL_DECLARED /* 33 */ EXTERN unsigned long Tk_CreateBinding (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr, CONST char * command, int append); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED /* 34 */ EXTERN Tk_BindingTable Tk_CreateBindingTable (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 35 */ EXTERN Tk_ErrorHandler Tk_CreateErrorHandler (Display * display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc * errorProc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 36 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateEventHandler (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 37 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateGenericHandler (Tk_GenericProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateImageType_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateImageType_TCL_DECLARED /* 38 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateImageType (Tk_ImageType * typePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateItemType_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateItemType_TCL_DECLARED /* 39 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateItemType (Tk_ItemType * typePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED /* 40 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat ( Tk_PhotoImageFormat * formatPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 41 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateSelHandler (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_SelectionProc * proc, ClientData clientData, Atom format); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 42 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CreateWindow (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char * name, CONST char * screenName); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateWindowFromPath_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateWindowFromPath_TCL_DECLARED /* 43 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CreateWindowFromPath (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * pathName, CONST char * screenName); #endif #ifndef Tk_DefineBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DefineBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 44 */ EXTERN int Tk_DefineBitmap (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, CONST char * source, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_DefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 45 */ EXTERN void Tk_DefineCursor (Tk_Window window, Tk_Cursor cursor); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED /* 46 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteAllBindings (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteBinding_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteBinding_TCL_DECLARED /* 47 */ EXTERN int Tk_DeleteBinding (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteBindingTable_TCL_DECLARED /* 48 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteBindingTable (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteErrorHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 49 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteErrorHandler (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteEventHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 50 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteEventHandler (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteGenericHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 51 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteGenericHandler (Tk_GenericProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 52 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteImage (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteSelHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 53 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteSelHandler (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); #endif #ifndef Tk_DestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DestroyWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 54 */ EXTERN void Tk_DestroyWindow (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_DisplayName_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DisplayName_TCL_DECLARED /* 55 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_DisplayName (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_DistanceToTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DistanceToTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 56 */ EXTERN int Tk_DistanceToTextLayout (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_Draw3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Draw3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED /* 57 */ EXTERN void Tk_Draw3DPolygon (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint * pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); #endif #ifndef Tk_Draw3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Draw3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED /* 58 */ EXTERN void Tk_Draw3DRectangle (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawChars_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DrawChars_TCL_DECLARED /* 59 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawChars (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int numBytes, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DrawFocusHighlight_TCL_DECLARED /* 60 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawFocusHighlight (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable); #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DrawTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 61 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawTextLayout (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int firstChar, int lastChar); #endif #ifndef Tk_Fill3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Fill3DPolygon_TCL_DECLARED /* 62 */ EXTERN void Tk_Fill3DPolygon (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint * pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); #endif #ifndef Tk_Fill3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Fill3DRectangle_TCL_DECLARED /* 63 */ EXTERN void Tk_Fill3DRectangle (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); #endif #ifndef Tk_FindPhoto_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FindPhoto_TCL_DECLARED /* 64 */ EXTERN Tk_PhotoHandle Tk_FindPhoto (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * imageName); #endif #ifndef Tk_FontId_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FontId_TCL_DECLARED /* 65 */ EXTERN Font Tk_FontId (Tk_Font font); #endif #ifndef Tk_Free3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Free3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 66 */ EXTERN void Tk_Free3DBorder (Tk_3DBorder border); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 67 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeBitmap (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 68 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColor (XColor * colorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeColormap_TCL_DECLARED /* 69 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColormap (Display * display, Colormap colormap); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 70 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeCursor (Display * display, Tk_Cursor cursor); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeFont_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeFont_TCL_DECLARED /* 71 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeFont (Tk_Font f); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 72 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeGC (Display * display, GC gc); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 73 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeImage (Tk_Image image); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 74 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeOptions (Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, Display * display, int needFlags); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreePixmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreePixmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 75 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreePixmap (Display * display, Pixmap pixmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 76 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeTextLayout (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeXId_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeXId_TCL_DECLARED /* 77 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeXId (Display * display, XID xid); #endif #ifndef Tk_GCForColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GCForColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 78 */ EXTERN GC Tk_GCForColor (XColor * colorPtr, Drawable drawable); #endif #ifndef Tk_GeometryRequest_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GeometryRequest_TCL_DECLARED /* 79 */ EXTERN void Tk_GeometryRequest (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); #endif #ifndef Tk_Get3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Get3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 80 */ EXTERN Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorder (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetAllBindings_TCL_DECLARED /* 81 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetAllBindings (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAnchor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetAnchor_TCL_DECLARED /* 82 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetAnchor (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, Tk_Anchor * anchorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetAtomName_TCL_DECLARED /* 83 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetAtomName (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBinding_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetBinding_TCL_DECLARED /* 84 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_GetBinding (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 85 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmap (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetBitmapFromData_TCL_DECLARED /* 86 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromData (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * source, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 87 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetCapStyle (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, int * capPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 88 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColor (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColorByValue_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetColorByValue_TCL_DECLARED /* 89 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColorByValue (Tk_Window tkwin, XColor * colorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColormap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetColormap_TCL_DECLARED /* 90 */ EXTERN Colormap Tk_GetColormap (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 91 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursor (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetCursorFromData_TCL_DECLARED /* 92 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromData (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * source, CONST char * mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFont_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetFont_TCL_DECLARED /* 93 */ EXTERN Tk_Font Tk_GetFont (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 94 */ EXTERN Tk_Font Tk_GetFontFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFontMetrics_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetFontMetrics_TCL_DECLARED /* 95 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetFontMetrics (Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics * fmPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 96 */ EXTERN GC Tk_GetGC (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues * valuePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 97 */ EXTERN Tk_Image Tk_GetImage (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, Tk_ImageChangedProc * changeProc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetImageMasterData_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetImageMasterData_TCL_DECLARED /* 98 */ EXTERN ClientData Tk_GetImageMasterData (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, Tk_ImageType ** typePtrPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetItemTypes_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetItemTypes_TCL_DECLARED /* 99 */ EXTERN Tk_ItemType * Tk_GetItemTypes (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 100 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJoinStyle (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, int * joinPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJustify_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetJustify_TCL_DECLARED /* 101 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJustify (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, Tk_Justify * justifyPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetNumMainWindows_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetNumMainWindows_TCL_DECLARED /* 102 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetNumMainWindows (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOption_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetOption_TCL_DECLARED /* 103 */ EXTERN Tk_Uid Tk_GetOption (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, CONST char * className); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixels_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetPixels_TCL_DECLARED /* 104 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetPixels (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, int * intPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetPixmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 105 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetPixmap (Display * display, Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetRelief_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetRelief_TCL_DECLARED /* 106 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetRelief (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, int * reliefPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetRootCoords_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetRootCoords_TCL_DECLARED /* 107 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetRootCoords (Tk_Window tkwin, int * xPtr, int * yPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfo_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetScrollInfo_TCL_DECLARED /* 108 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfo (Tcl_Interp * interp, int argc, CONST84 char ** argv, double * dblPtr, int * intPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScreenMM_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetScreenMM_TCL_DECLARED /* 109 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScreenMM (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, double * doublePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetSelection_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetSelection_TCL_DECLARED /* 110 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetSelection (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetUid_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetUid_TCL_DECLARED /* 111 */ EXTERN Tk_Uid Tk_GetUid (CONST char * str); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetVisual_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetVisual_TCL_DECLARED /* 112 */ EXTERN Visual * Tk_GetVisual (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, int * depthPtr, Colormap * colormapPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetVRootGeometry_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetVRootGeometry_TCL_DECLARED /* 113 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetVRootGeometry (Tk_Window tkwin, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_Grab_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Grab_TCL_DECLARED /* 114 */ EXTERN int Tk_Grab (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); #endif #ifndef Tk_HandleEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_HandleEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 115 */ EXTERN void Tk_HandleEvent (XEvent * eventPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_IdToWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_IdToWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 116 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_IdToWindow (Display * display, Window window); #endif #ifndef Tk_ImageChanged_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ImageChanged_TCL_DECLARED /* 117 */ EXTERN void Tk_ImageChanged (Tk_ImageMaster master, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); #endif #ifndef Tk_Init_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Init_TCL_DECLARED /* 118 */ EXTERN int Tk_Init (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_InternAtom_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_InternAtom_TCL_DECLARED /* 119 */ EXTERN Atom Tk_InternAtom (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_IntersectTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_IntersectTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 120 */ EXTERN int Tk_IntersectTextLayout (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_MaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED /* 121 */ EXTERN void Tk_MaintainGeometry (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_MainWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MainWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 122 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_MainWindow (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_MakeWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MakeWindowExist_TCL_DECLARED /* 123 */ EXTERN void Tk_MakeWindowExist (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_ManageGeometry_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ManageGeometry_TCL_DECLARED /* 124 */ EXTERN void Tk_ManageGeometry (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST Tk_GeomMgr * mgrPtr, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_MapWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MapWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 125 */ EXTERN void Tk_MapWindow (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_MeasureChars_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MeasureChars_TCL_DECLARED /* 126 */ EXTERN int Tk_MeasureChars (Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int * lengthPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MoveResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 127 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveResizeWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MoveWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 128 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveToplevelWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MoveToplevelWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 129 */ EXTERN void Tk_MoveToplevelWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOf3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOf3DBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 130 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOf3DBorder (Tk_3DBorder border); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfAnchor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfAnchor_TCL_DECLARED /* 131 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfAnchor (Tk_Anchor anchor); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 132 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfBitmap (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfCapStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 133 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCapStyle (int cap); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 134 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfColor (XColor * colorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 135 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfCursor (Display * display, Tk_Cursor cursor); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfFont_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfFont_TCL_DECLARED /* 136 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfFont (Tk_Font font); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 137 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfImage (Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfJoinStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 138 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJoinStyle (int join); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfJustify_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfJustify_TCL_DECLARED /* 139 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfJustify (Tk_Justify justify); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfRelief_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfRelief_TCL_DECLARED /* 140 */ EXTERN CONST84_RETURN char * Tk_NameOfRelief (int relief); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameToWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameToWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 141 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_NameToWindow (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_OwnSelection_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_OwnSelection_TCL_DECLARED /* 142 */ EXTERN void Tk_OwnSelection (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc * proc, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_ParseArgv_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ParseArgv_TCL_DECLARED /* 143 */ EXTERN int Tk_ParseArgv (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int * argcPtr, CONST84 char ** argv, Tk_ArgvInfo * argTable, int flags); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED /* 144 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite_TCL_DECLARED /* 145 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite ( Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoGetImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoGetImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 146 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoGetImage (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoBlank_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoBlank_TCL_DECLARED /* 147 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoBlank (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic_TCL_DECLARED /* 148 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoGetSize_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoGetSize_TCL_DECLARED /* 149 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoGetSize (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic_TCL_DECLARED /* 150 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PointToChar_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PointToChar_TCL_DECLARED /* 151 */ EXTERN int Tk_PointToChar (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptFontName_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptFontName_TCL_DECLARED /* 152 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptFontName (Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString * dsPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_PreserveColormap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PreserveColormap_TCL_DECLARED /* 153 */ EXTERN void Tk_PreserveColormap (Display * display, Colormap colormap); #endif #ifndef Tk_QueueWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_QueueWindowEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 154 */ EXTERN void Tk_QueueWindowEvent (XEvent * eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position); #endif #ifndef Tk_RedrawImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RedrawImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 155 */ EXTERN void Tk_RedrawImage (Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY); #endif #ifndef Tk_ResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ResizeWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 156 */ EXTERN void Tk_ResizeWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_RestackWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RestackWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 157 */ EXTERN int Tk_RestackWindow (Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); #endif #ifndef Tk_RestrictEvents_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RestrictEvents_TCL_DECLARED /* 158 */ EXTERN Tk_RestrictProc * Tk_RestrictEvents (Tk_RestrictProc * proc, ClientData arg, ClientData * prevArgPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_SafeInit_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SafeInit_TCL_DECLARED /* 159 */ EXTERN int Tk_SafeInit (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetAppName_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetAppName_TCL_DECLARED /* 160 */ EXTERN CONST char * Tk_SetAppName (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 161 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetClass_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetClass_TCL_DECLARED /* 162 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetClass (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * className); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetGrid_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetGrid_TCL_DECLARED /* 163 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetGrid (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetInternalBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 164 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetInternalBorder (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowBackground_TCL_DECLARED /* 165 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowBackground (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 166 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowBorder_TCL_DECLARED /* 167 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowBorder (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED /* 168 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 169 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowColormap_TCL_DECLARED /* 170 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetWindowColormap (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowVisual_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetWindowVisual_TCL_DECLARED /* 171 */ EXTERN int Tk_SetWindowVisual (Tk_Window tkwin, Visual * visual, int depth, Colormap colormap); #endif #ifndef Tk_SizeOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SizeOfBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 172 */ EXTERN void Tk_SizeOfBitmap (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_SizeOfImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SizeOfImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 173 */ EXTERN void Tk_SizeOfImage (Tk_Image image, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_StrictMotif_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_StrictMotif_TCL_DECLARED /* 174 */ EXTERN int Tk_StrictMotif (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript_TCL_DECLARED /* 175 */ EXTERN void Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_TextLayout layout); #endif #ifndef Tk_TextWidth_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_TextWidth_TCL_DECLARED /* 176 */ EXTERN int Tk_TextWidth (Tk_Font font, CONST char * str, int numBytes); #endif #ifndef Tk_UndefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UndefineCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 177 */ EXTERN void Tk_UndefineCursor (Tk_Window window); #endif #ifndef Tk_UnderlineChars_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UnderlineChars_TCL_DECLARED /* 178 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnderlineChars (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int x, int y, int firstByte, int lastByte); #endif #ifndef Tk_UnderlineTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UnderlineTextLayout_TCL_DECLARED /* 179 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnderlineTextLayout (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int underline); #endif #ifndef Tk_Ungrab_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Ungrab_TCL_DECLARED /* 180 */ EXTERN void Tk_Ungrab (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_UnmaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UnmaintainGeometry_TCL_DECLARED /* 181 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnmaintainGeometry (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master); #endif #ifndef Tk_UnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UnmapWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 182 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnmapWindow (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_UnsetGrid_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UnsetGrid_TCL_DECLARED /* 183 */ EXTERN void Tk_UnsetGrid (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_UpdatePointer_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_UpdatePointer_TCL_DECLARED /* 184 */ EXTERN void Tk_UpdatePointer (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int state); #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 185 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 186 */ EXTERN Tk_3DBorder Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AllocColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 187 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_AllocColorFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AllocCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 188 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_AllocCursorFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AllocFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 189 */ EXTERN Tk_Font Tk_AllocFontFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED /* 190 */ EXTERN Tk_OptionTable Tk_CreateOptionTable (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST Tk_OptionSpec * templatePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteOptionTable_TCL_DECLARED /* 191 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteOptionTable (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); #endif #ifndef Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 192 */ EXTERN void Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 193 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 194 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeColorFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeConfigOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeConfigOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 195 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeConfigOptions (char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 196 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeSavedOptions (Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 197 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeCursorFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeFontFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 198 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeFontFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 199 */ EXTERN Tk_3DBorder Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAnchorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetAnchorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 200 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetAnchorFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Tk_Anchor * anchorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetBitmapFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 201 */ EXTERN Pixmap Tk_GetBitmapFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetColorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 202 */ EXTERN XColor * Tk_GetColorFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetCursorFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 203 */ EXTERN Tk_Cursor Tk_GetCursorFromObj (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOptionInfo_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetOptionInfo_TCL_DECLARED /* 204 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionInfo (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj * namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOptionValue_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetOptionValue_TCL_DECLARED /* 205 */ EXTERN Tcl_Obj * Tk_GetOptionValue (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj * namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJustifyFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetJustifyFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 206 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetJustifyFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Tk_Justify * justifyPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetMMFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetMMFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 207 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetMMFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, double * doublePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixelsFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetPixelsFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 208 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetPixelsFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * intPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetReliefFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetReliefFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 209 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetReliefFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * resultPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfoObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetScrollInfoObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 210 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetScrollInfoObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double * dblPtr, int * intPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_InitOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_InitOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 211 */ EXTERN int Tk_InitOptions (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_MainEx_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MainEx_TCL_DECLARED /* 212 */ EXTERN void Tk_MainEx (int argc, char ** argv, Tcl_AppInitProc * appInitProc, Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_RestoreSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RestoreSavedOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 213 */ EXTERN void Tk_RestoreSavedOptions (Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetOptions_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetOptions_TCL_DECLARED /* 214 */ EXTERN int Tk_SetOptions (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr, int * maskPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_InitConsoleChannels_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_InitConsoleChannels_TCL_DECLARED /* 215 */ EXTERN void Tk_InitConsoleChannels (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateConsoleWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 216 */ EXTERN int Tk_CreateConsoleWindow (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateSmoothMethod_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateSmoothMethod_TCL_DECLARED /* 217 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateSmoothMethod (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_SmoothMethod * method); #endif /* Slot 218 is reserved */ /* Slot 219 is reserved */ #ifndef Tk_GetDash_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetDash_TCL_DECLARED /* 220 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetDash (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * value, Tk_Dash * dash); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOutline_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateOutline_TCL_DECLARED /* 221 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOutline (Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteOutline_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteOutline_TCL_DECLARED /* 222 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteOutline (Display * display, Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ConfigOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 223 */ EXTERN int Tk_ConfigOutlineGC (XGCValues * gcValues, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_ChangeOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ChangeOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 224 */ EXTERN int Tk_ChangeOutlineGC (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_ResetOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ResetOutlineGC_TCL_DECLARED /* 225 */ EXTERN int Tk_ResetOutlineGC (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsOutline_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasPsOutline_TCL_DECLARED /* 226 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasPsOutline (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetTSOrigin_TCL_DECLARED /* 227 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetTSOrigin (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 228 */ EXTERN int Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj * obj, double * doublePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasSetOffset_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CanvasSetOffset_TCL_DECLARED /* 229 */ EXTERN void Tk_CanvasSetOffset (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc, Tk_TSOffset * offset); #endif #ifndef Tk_DitherPhoto_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DitherPhoto_TCL_DECLARED /* 230 */ EXTERN void Tk_DitherPhoto (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int x, int y, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptBitmap_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptBitmap_TCL_DECLARED /* 231 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptBitmap (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap, int startX, int startY, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptColor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptColor_TCL_DECLARED /* 232 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptColor (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor * colorPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptFont_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptFont_TCL_DECLARED /* 233 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptFont (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptImage_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptImage_TCL_DECLARED /* 234 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptImage (Tk_Image image, Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptPath_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptPath_TCL_DECLARED /* 235 */ EXTERN void Tk_PostscriptPath (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, double * coordPtr, int numPoints); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptStipple_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptStipple_TCL_DECLARED /* 236 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptStipple (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptY_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptY_TCL_DECLARED /* 237 */ EXTERN double Tk_PostscriptY (double y, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo); #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptPhoto_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PostscriptPhoto_TCL_DECLARED /* 238 */ EXTERN int Tk_PostscriptPhoto (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 239 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler ( Tk_ClientMessageProc * proc); #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 240 */ EXTERN void Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler ( Tk_ClientMessageProc * proc); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 241 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char * screenName); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetClassProcs_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetClassProcs_TCL_DECLARED /* 242 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetClassProcs (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ClassProcs * procs, ClientData instanceData); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorderEx_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetInternalBorderEx_TCL_DECLARED /* 243 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetInternalBorderEx (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize_TCL_DECLARED /* 244 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); #endif #ifndef Tk_SetCaretPos_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_SetCaretPos_TCL_DECLARED /* 245 */ EXTERN void Tk_SetCaretPos (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED /* 246 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic_TCL_DECLARED /* 247 */ EXTERN void Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); #endif #ifndef Tk_CollapseMotionEvents_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CollapseMotionEvents_TCL_DECLARED /* 248 */ EXTERN int Tk_CollapseMotionEvents (Display * display, int collapse); #endif #ifndef Tk_RegisterStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RegisterStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED /* 249 */ EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine Tk_RegisterStyleEngine (CONST char * name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetStyleEngine_TCL_DECLARED /* 250 */ EXTERN Tk_StyleEngine Tk_GetStyleEngine (CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_RegisterStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_RegisterStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED /* 251 */ EXTERN int Tk_RegisterStyledElement (Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec * templatePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementId_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetElementId_TCL_DECLARED /* 252 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetElementId (CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 253 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_CreateStyle (CONST char * name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 254 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_GetStyle (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 255 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyle (Tk_Style style); #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfStyle_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_NameOfStyle_TCL_DECLARED /* 256 */ EXTERN CONST char * Tk_NameOfStyle (Tk_Style style); #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AllocStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 257 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_AllocStyleFromObj (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 258 */ EXTERN Tk_Style Tk_GetStyleFromObj (Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj_TCL_DECLARED /* 259 */ EXTERN void Tk_FreeStyleFromObj (Tcl_Obj * objPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetStyledElement_TCL_DECLARED /* 260 */ EXTERN Tk_StyledElement Tk_GetStyledElement (Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementSize_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetElementSize_TCL_DECLARED /* 261 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementSize (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementBox_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetElementBox_TCL_DECLARED /* 262 */ EXTERN void Tk_GetElementBox (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetElementBorderWidth_TCL_DECLARED /* 263 */ EXTERN int Tk_GetElementBorderWidth (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawElement_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_DrawElement_TCL_DECLARED /* 264 */ EXTERN void Tk_DrawElement (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoExpand_TCL_DECLARED /* 265 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoExpand (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_TCL_DECLARED /* 266 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoPutBlock (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_TCL_DECLARED /* 267 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PhotoSetSize_TCL_DECLARED /* 268 */ EXTERN int Tk_PhotoSetSize (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED /* 269 */ EXTERN long Tk_GetUserInactiveTime (Display * dpy); #endif #ifndef Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime_TCL_DECLARED /* 270 */ EXTERN void Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime (Display * dpy); #endif #ifndef Tk_Interp_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_Interp_TCL_DECLARED /* 271 */ EXTERN Tcl_Interp * Tk_Interp (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOldImageType_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateOldImageType_TCL_DECLARED /* 272 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldImageType (Tk_ImageType * typePtr); #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat_TCL_DECLARED /* 273 */ EXTERN void Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat ( Tk_PhotoImageFormat * formatPtr); #endif typedef struct TkStubHooks { struct TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubs; struct TkIntStubs *tkIntStubs; struct TkIntPlatStubs *tkIntPlatStubs; struct TkIntXlibStubs *tkIntXlibStubs; } TkStubHooks; typedef struct TkStubs { int magic; struct TkStubHooks *hooks; void (*tk_MainLoop) (void); /* 0 */ XColor * (*tk_3DBorderColor) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 1 */ GC (*tk_3DBorderGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border, int which); /* 2 */ void (*tk_3DHorizontalBevel) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftIn, int rightIn, int topBevel, int relief); /* 3 */ void (*tk_3DVerticalBevel) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int leftBevel, int relief); /* 4 */ void (*tk_AddOption) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, CONST char * value, int priority); /* 5 */ void (*tk_BindEvent) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, XEvent * eventPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int numObjects, ClientData * objectPtr); /* 6 */ void (*tk_CanvasDrawableCoords) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short * drawableXPtr, short * drawableYPtr); /* 7 */ void (*tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw) (Tk_Canvas canvas, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2); /* 8 */ int (*tk_CanvasGetCoord) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, CONST char * str, double * doublePtr); /* 9 */ Tk_CanvasTextInfo * (*tk_CanvasGetTextInfo) (Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 10 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsBitmap) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 11 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsColor) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, XColor * colorPtr); /* 12 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsFont) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Font font); /* 13 */ void (*tk_CanvasPsPath) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, double * coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 14 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsStipple) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Pixmap bitmap); /* 15 */ double (*tk_CanvasPsY) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double y); /* 16 */ void (*tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc); /* 17 */ int (*tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) (ClientData clientData, Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * value, char * widgRec, int offset); /* 18 */ char * (*tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc) (ClientData clientData, Tk_Window tkwin, char * widgRec, int offset, Tcl_FreeProc ** freeProcPtr); /* 19 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CanvasTkwin) (Tk_Canvas canvas); /* 20 */ void (*tk_CanvasWindowCoords) (Tk_Canvas canvas, double x, double y, short * screenXPtr, short * screenYPtr); /* 21 */ void (*tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XSetWindowAttributes * attsPtr); /* 22 */ int (*tk_CharBbox) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int index, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 23 */ void (*tk_ClearSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection); /* 24 */ int (*tk_ClipboardAppend) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom target, Atom format, char* buffer); /* 25 */ int (*tk_ClipboardClear) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 26 */ int (*tk_ConfigureInfo) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, CONST char * argvName, int flags); /* 27 */ int (*tk_ConfigureValue) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, CONST char * argvName, int flags); /* 28 */ int (*tk_ConfigureWidget) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, int argc, CONST84 char ** argv, char * widgRec, int flags); /* 29 */ void (*tk_ConfigureWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned int valueMask, XWindowChanges * valuePtr); /* 30 */ Tk_TextLayout (*tk_ComputeTextLayout) (Tk_Font font, CONST char * str, int numChars, int wrapLength, Tk_Justify justify, int flags, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 31 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CoordsToWindow) (int rootX, int rootY, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 32 */ unsigned long (*tk_CreateBinding) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr, CONST char * command, int append); /* 33 */ Tk_BindingTable (*tk_CreateBindingTable) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 34 */ Tk_ErrorHandler (*tk_CreateErrorHandler) (Display * display, int errNum, int request, int minorCode, Tk_ErrorProc * errorProc, ClientData clientData); /* 35 */ void (*tk_CreateEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 36 */ void (*tk_CreateGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 37 */ void (*tk_CreateImageType) (Tk_ImageType * typePtr); /* 38 */ void (*tk_CreateItemType) (Tk_ItemType * typePtr); /* 39 */ void (*tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat) (Tk_PhotoImageFormat * formatPtr); /* 40 */ void (*tk_CreateSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_SelectionProc * proc, ClientData clientData, Atom format); /* 41 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindow) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char * name, CONST char * screenName); /* 42 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateWindowFromPath) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * pathName, CONST char * screenName); /* 43 */ int (*tk_DefineBitmap) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, CONST char * source, int width, int height); /* 44 */ void (*tk_DefineCursor) (Tk_Window window, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 45 */ void (*tk_DeleteAllBindings) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 46 */ int (*tk_DeleteBinding) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr); /* 47 */ void (*tk_DeleteBindingTable) (Tk_BindingTable bindingTable); /* 48 */ void (*tk_DeleteErrorHandler) (Tk_ErrorHandler handler); /* 49 */ void (*tk_DeleteEventHandler) (Tk_Window token, unsigned long mask, Tk_EventProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 50 */ void (*tk_DeleteGenericHandler) (Tk_GenericProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 51 */ void (*tk_DeleteImage) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name); /* 52 */ void (*tk_DeleteSelHandler) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target); /* 53 */ void (*tk_DestroyWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 54 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_DisplayName) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 55 */ int (*tk_DistanceToTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 56 */ void (*tk_Draw3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint * pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 57 */ void (*tk_Draw3DRectangle) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 58 */ void (*tk_DrawChars) (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int numBytes, int x, int y); /* 59 */ void (*tk_DrawFocusHighlight) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int width, Drawable drawable); /* 60 */ void (*tk_DrawTextLayout) (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int firstChar, int lastChar); /* 61 */ void (*tk_Fill3DPolygon) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, XPoint * pointPtr, int numPoints, int borderWidth, int leftRelief); /* 62 */ void (*tk_Fill3DRectangle) (Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable drawable, Tk_3DBorder border, int x, int y, int width, int height, int borderWidth, int relief); /* 63 */ Tk_PhotoHandle (*tk_FindPhoto) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * imageName); /* 64 */ Font (*tk_FontId) (Tk_Font font); /* 65 */ void (*tk_Free3DBorder) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 66 */ void (*tk_FreeBitmap) (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 67 */ void (*tk_FreeColor) (XColor * colorPtr); /* 68 */ void (*tk_FreeColormap) (Display * display, Colormap colormap); /* 69 */ void (*tk_FreeCursor) (Display * display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 70 */ void (*tk_FreeFont) (Tk_Font f); /* 71 */ void (*tk_FreeGC) (Display * display, GC gc); /* 72 */ void (*tk_FreeImage) (Tk_Image image); /* 73 */ void (*tk_FreeOptions) (Tk_ConfigSpec * specs, char * widgRec, Display * display, int needFlags); /* 74 */ void (*tk_FreePixmap) (Display * display, Pixmap pixmap); /* 75 */ void (*tk_FreeTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout textLayout); /* 76 */ void (*tk_FreeXId) (Display * display, XID xid); /* 77 */ GC (*tk_GCForColor) (XColor * colorPtr, Drawable drawable); /* 78 */ void (*tk_GeometryRequest) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight); /* 79 */ Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorder) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid colorName); /* 80 */ void (*tk_GetAllBindings) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object); /* 81 */ int (*tk_GetAnchor) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, Tk_Anchor * anchorPtr); /* 82 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetAtomName) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom atom); /* 83 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_GetBinding) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_BindingTable bindingTable, ClientData object, CONST char * eventStr); /* 84 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmap) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); /* 85 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromData) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * source, int width, int height); /* 86 */ int (*tk_GetCapStyle) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, int * capPtr); /* 87 */ XColor * (*tk_GetColor) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid name); /* 88 */ XColor * (*tk_GetColorByValue) (Tk_Window tkwin, XColor * colorPtr); /* 89 */ Colormap (*tk_GetColormap) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); /* 90 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursor) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_Uid str); /* 91 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromData) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * source, CONST char * mask, int width, int height, int xHot, int yHot, Tk_Uid fg, Tk_Uid bg); /* 92 */ Tk_Font (*tk_GetFont) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str); /* 93 */ Tk_Font (*tk_GetFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 94 */ void (*tk_GetFontMetrics) (Tk_Font font, Tk_FontMetrics * fmPtr); /* 95 */ GC (*tk_GetGC) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long valueMask, XGCValues * valuePtr); /* 96 */ Tk_Image (*tk_GetImage) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, Tk_ImageChangedProc * changeProc, ClientData clientData); /* 97 */ ClientData (*tk_GetImageMasterData) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, Tk_ImageType ** typePtrPtr); /* 98 */ Tk_ItemType * (*tk_GetItemTypes) (void); /* 99 */ int (*tk_GetJoinStyle) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, int * joinPtr); /* 100 */ int (*tk_GetJustify) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * str, Tk_Justify * justifyPtr); /* 101 */ int (*tk_GetNumMainWindows) (void); /* 102 */ Tk_Uid (*tk_GetOption) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name, CONST char * className); /* 103 */ int (*tk_GetPixels) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, int * intPtr); /* 104 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetPixmap) (Display * display, Drawable d, int width, int height, int depth); /* 105 */ int (*tk_GetRelief) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name, int * reliefPtr); /* 106 */ void (*tk_GetRootCoords) (Tk_Window tkwin, int * xPtr, int * yPtr); /* 107 */ int (*tk_GetScrollInfo) (Tcl_Interp * interp, int argc, CONST84 char ** argv, double * dblPtr, int * intPtr); /* 108 */ int (*tk_GetScreenMM) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, double * doublePtr); /* 109 */ int (*tk_GetSelection) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Atom target, Tk_GetSelProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 110 */ Tk_Uid (*tk_GetUid) (CONST char * str); /* 111 */ Visual * (*tk_GetVisual) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * str, int * depthPtr, Colormap * colormapPtr); /* 112 */ void (*tk_GetVRootGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 113 */ int (*tk_Grab) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int grabGlobal); /* 114 */ void (*tk_HandleEvent) (XEvent * eventPtr); /* 115 */ Tk_Window (*tk_IdToWindow) (Display * display, Window window); /* 116 */ void (*tk_ImageChanged) (Tk_ImageMaster master, int x, int y, int width, int height, int imageWidth, int imageHeight); /* 117 */ int (*tk_Init) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 118 */ Atom (*tk_InternAtom) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name); /* 119 */ int (*tk_IntersectTextLayout) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 120 */ void (*tk_MaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 121 */ Tk_Window (*tk_MainWindow) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 122 */ void (*tk_MakeWindowExist) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 123 */ void (*tk_ManageGeometry) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST Tk_GeomMgr * mgrPtr, ClientData clientData); /* 124 */ void (*tk_MapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 125 */ int (*tk_MeasureChars) (Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int numBytes, int maxPixels, int flags, int * lengthPtr); /* 126 */ void (*tk_MoveResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 127 */ void (*tk_MoveWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 128 */ void (*tk_MoveToplevelWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y); /* 129 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOf3DBorder) (Tk_3DBorder border); /* 130 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfAnchor) (Tk_Anchor anchor); /* 131 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfBitmap) (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap); /* 132 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCapStyle) (int cap); /* 133 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfColor) (XColor * colorPtr); /* 134 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfCursor) (Display * display, Tk_Cursor cursor); /* 135 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfFont) (Tk_Font font); /* 136 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfImage) (Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster); /* 137 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJoinStyle) (int join); /* 138 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfJustify) (Tk_Justify justify); /* 139 */ CONST84_RETURN char * (*tk_NameOfRelief) (int relief); /* 140 */ Tk_Window (*tk_NameToWindow) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * pathName, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 141 */ void (*tk_OwnSelection) (Tk_Window tkwin, Atom selection, Tk_LostSelProc * proc, ClientData clientData); /* 142 */ int (*tk_ParseArgv) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, int * argcPtr, CONST84 char ** argv, Tk_ArgvInfo * argTable, int flags); /* 143 */ void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 144 */ void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY); /* 145 */ int (*tk_PhotoGetImage) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr); /* 146 */ void (*tk_PhotoBlank) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle); /* 147 */ void (*tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 148 */ void (*tk_PhotoGetSize) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 149 */ void (*tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 150 */ int (*tk_PointToChar) (Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y); /* 151 */ int (*tk_PostscriptFontName) (Tk_Font tkfont, Tcl_DString * dsPtr); /* 152 */ void (*tk_PreserveColormap) (Display * display, Colormap colormap); /* 153 */ void (*tk_QueueWindowEvent) (XEvent * eventPtr, Tcl_QueuePosition position); /* 154 */ void (*tk_RedrawImage) (Tk_Image image, int imageX, int imageY, int width, int height, Drawable drawable, int drawableX, int drawableY); /* 155 */ void (*tk_ResizeWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height); /* 156 */ int (*tk_RestackWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin, int aboveBelow, Tk_Window other); /* 157 */ Tk_RestrictProc * (*tk_RestrictEvents) (Tk_RestrictProc * proc, ClientData arg, ClientData * prevArgPtr); /* 158 */ int (*tk_SafeInit) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 159 */ CONST char * (*tk_SetAppName) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * name); /* 160 */ void (*tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_3DBorder border); /* 161 */ void (*tk_SetClass) (Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char * className); /* 162 */ void (*tk_SetGrid) (Tk_Window tkwin, int reqWidth, int reqHeight, int gridWidth, int gridHeight); /* 163 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); /* 164 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBackground) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); /* 165 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); /* 166 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBorder) (Tk_Window tkwin, unsigned long pixel); /* 167 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBorderWidth) (Tk_Window tkwin, int width); /* 168 */ void (*tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Pixmap pixmap); /* 169 */ void (*tk_SetWindowColormap) (Tk_Window tkwin, Colormap colormap); /* 170 */ int (*tk_SetWindowVisual) (Tk_Window tkwin, Visual * visual, int depth, Colormap colormap); /* 171 */ void (*tk_SizeOfBitmap) (Display * display, Pixmap bitmap, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 172 */ void (*tk_SizeOfImage) (Tk_Image image, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 173 */ int (*tk_StrictMotif) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 174 */ void (*tk_TextLayoutToPostscript) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_TextLayout layout); /* 175 */ int (*tk_TextWidth) (Tk_Font font, CONST char * str, int numBytes); /* 176 */ void (*tk_UndefineCursor) (Tk_Window window); /* 177 */ void (*tk_UnderlineChars) (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont, CONST char * source, int x, int y, int firstByte, int lastByte); /* 178 */ void (*tk_UnderlineTextLayout) (Display * display, Drawable drawable, GC gc, Tk_TextLayout layout, int x, int y, int underline); /* 179 */ void (*tk_Ungrab) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 180 */ void (*tk_UnmaintainGeometry) (Tk_Window slave, Tk_Window master); /* 181 */ void (*tk_UnmapWindow) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 182 */ void (*tk_UnsetGrid) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 183 */ void (*tk_UpdatePointer) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int state); /* 184 */ Pixmap (*tk_AllocBitmapFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 185 */ Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 186 */ XColor * (*tk_AllocColorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 187 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_AllocCursorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 188 */ Tk_Font (*tk_AllocFontFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 189 */ Tk_OptionTable (*tk_CreateOptionTable) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST Tk_OptionSpec * templatePtr); /* 190 */ void (*tk_DeleteOptionTable) (Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 191 */ void (*tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 192 */ void (*tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 193 */ void (*tk_FreeColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 194 */ void (*tk_FreeConfigOptions) (char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 195 */ void (*tk_FreeSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr); /* 196 */ void (*tk_FreeCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 197 */ void (*tk_FreeFontFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 198 */ Tk_3DBorder (*tk_Get3DBorderFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 199 */ int (*tk_GetAnchorFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Tk_Anchor * anchorPtr); /* 200 */ Pixmap (*tk_GetBitmapFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 201 */ XColor * (*tk_GetColorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 202 */ Tk_Cursor (*tk_GetCursorFromObj) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 203 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionInfo) (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj * namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 204 */ Tcl_Obj * (*tk_GetOptionValue) (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, Tcl_Obj * namePtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 205 */ int (*tk_GetJustifyFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, Tk_Justify * justifyPtr); /* 206 */ int (*tk_GetMMFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, double * doublePtr); /* 207 */ int (*tk_GetPixelsFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * intPtr); /* 208 */ int (*tk_GetReliefFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr, int * resultPtr); /* 209 */ int (*tk_GetScrollInfoObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], double * dblPtr, int * intPtr); /* 210 */ int (*tk_InitOptions) (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionToken, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 211 */ void (*tk_MainEx) (int argc, char ** argv, Tcl_AppInitProc * appInitProc, Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 212 */ void (*tk_RestoreSavedOptions) (Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr); /* 213 */ int (*tk_SetOptions) (Tcl_Interp * interp, char * recordPtr, Tk_OptionTable optionTable, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_SavedOptions * savePtr, int * maskPtr); /* 214 */ void (*tk_InitConsoleChannels) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 215 */ int (*tk_CreateConsoleWindow) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 216 */ void (*tk_CreateSmoothMethod) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_SmoothMethod * method); /* 217 */ void *reserved218; void *reserved219; int (*tk_GetDash) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * value, Tk_Dash * dash); /* 220 */ void (*tk_CreateOutline) (Tk_Outline * outline); /* 221 */ void (*tk_DeleteOutline) (Display * display, Tk_Outline * outline); /* 222 */ int (*tk_ConfigOutlineGC) (XGCValues * gcValues, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); /* 223 */ int (*tk_ChangeOutlineGC) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); /* 224 */ int (*tk_ResetOutlineGC) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); /* 225 */ int (*tk_CanvasPsOutline) (Tk_Canvas canvas, Tk_Item * item, Tk_Outline * outline); /* 226 */ void (*tk_SetTSOrigin) (Tk_Window tkwin, GC gc, int x, int y); /* 227 */ int (*tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Canvas canvas, Tcl_Obj * obj, double * doublePtr); /* 228 */ void (*tk_CanvasSetOffset) (Tk_Canvas canvas, GC gc, Tk_TSOffset * offset); /* 229 */ void (*tk_DitherPhoto) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int x, int y, int width, int height); /* 230 */ int (*tk_PostscriptBitmap) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap, int startX, int startY, int width, int height); /* 231 */ int (*tk_PostscriptColor) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, XColor * colorPtr); /* 232 */ int (*tk_PostscriptFont) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Tk_Font font); /* 233 */ int (*tk_PostscriptImage) (Tk_Image image, Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psinfo, int x, int y, int width, int height, int prepass); /* 234 */ void (*tk_PostscriptPath) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, double * coordPtr, int numPoints); /* 235 */ int (*tk_PostscriptStipple) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, Pixmap bitmap); /* 236 */ double (*tk_PostscriptY) (double y, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo); /* 237 */ int (*tk_PostscriptPhoto) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, Tk_PostscriptInfo psInfo, int width, int height); /* 238 */ void (*tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc * proc); /* 239 */ void (*tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) (Tk_ClientMessageProc * proc); /* 240 */ Tk_Window (*tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_Window parent, CONST char * screenName); /* 241 */ void (*tk_SetClassProcs) (Tk_Window tkwin, Tk_ClassProcs * procs, ClientData instanceData); /* 242 */ void (*tk_SetInternalBorderEx) (Tk_Window tkwin, int left, int right, int top, int bottom); /* 243 */ void (*tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) (Tk_Window tkwin, int minWidth, int minHeight); /* 244 */ void (*tk_SetCaretPos) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int height); /* 245 */ void (*tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 246 */ void (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) (Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 247 */ int (*tk_CollapseMotionEvents) (Display * display, int collapse); /* 248 */ Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_RegisterStyleEngine) (CONST char * name, Tk_StyleEngine parent); /* 249 */ Tk_StyleEngine (*tk_GetStyleEngine) (CONST char * name); /* 250 */ int (*tk_RegisterStyledElement) (Tk_StyleEngine engine, Tk_ElementSpec * templatePtr); /* 251 */ int (*tk_GetElementId) (CONST char * name); /* 252 */ Tk_Style (*tk_CreateStyle) (CONST char * name, Tk_StyleEngine engine, ClientData clientData); /* 253 */ Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyle) (Tcl_Interp * interp, CONST char * name); /* 254 */ void (*tk_FreeStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 255 */ CONST char * (*tk_NameOfStyle) (Tk_Style style); /* 256 */ Tk_Style (*tk_AllocStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 257 */ Tk_Style (*tk_GetStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 258 */ void (*tk_FreeStyleFromObj) (Tcl_Obj * objPtr); /* 259 */ Tk_StyledElement (*tk_GetStyledElement) (Tk_Style style, int elementId, Tk_OptionTable optionTable); /* 260 */ void (*tk_GetElementSize) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int width, int height, int inner, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 261 */ void (*tk_GetElementBox) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int inner, int * xPtr, int * yPtr, int * widthPtr, int * heightPtr); /* 262 */ int (*tk_GetElementBorderWidth) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin); /* 263 */ void (*tk_DrawElement) (Tk_Style style, Tk_StyledElement element, char * recordPtr, Tk_Window tkwin, Drawable d, int x, int y, int width, int height, int state); /* 264 */ int (*tk_PhotoExpand) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 265 */ int (*tk_PhotoPutBlock) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int compRule); /* 266 */ int (*tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, Tk_PhotoImageBlock * blockPtr, int x, int y, int width, int height, int zoomX, int zoomY, int subsampleX, int subsampleY, int compRule); /* 267 */ int (*tk_PhotoSetSize) (Tcl_Interp * interp, Tk_PhotoHandle handle, int width, int height); /* 268 */ long (*tk_GetUserInactiveTime) (Display * dpy); /* 269 */ void (*tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) (Display * dpy); /* 270 */ Tcl_Interp * (*tk_Interp) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 271 */ void (*tk_CreateOldImageType) (Tk_ImageType * typePtr); /* 272 */ void (*tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) (Tk_PhotoImageFormat * formatPtr); /* 273 */ } TkStubs; #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif extern TkStubs *tkStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #if defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) /* * Inline function declarations: */ #ifndef Tk_MainLoop #define Tk_MainLoop \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MainLoop) /* 0 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_3DBorderColor #define Tk_3DBorderColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_3DBorderColor) /* 1 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_3DBorderGC #define Tk_3DBorderGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_3DBorderGC) /* 2 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_3DHorizontalBevel #define Tk_3DHorizontalBevel \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_3DHorizontalBevel) /* 3 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_3DVerticalBevel #define Tk_3DVerticalBevel \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_3DVerticalBevel) /* 4 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AddOption #define Tk_AddOption \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AddOption) /* 5 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_BindEvent #define Tk_BindEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_BindEvent) /* 6 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords #define Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasDrawableCoords) /* 7 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw #define Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw) /* 8 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoord #define Tk_CanvasGetCoord \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasGetCoord) /* 9 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo #define Tk_CanvasGetTextInfo \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasGetTextInfo) /* 10 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsBitmap #define Tk_CanvasPsBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsBitmap) /* 11 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsColor #define Tk_CanvasPsColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsColor) /* 12 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsFont #define Tk_CanvasPsFont \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsFont) /* 13 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsPath #define Tk_CanvasPsPath \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsPath) /* 14 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsStipple #define Tk_CanvasPsStipple \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsStipple) /* 15 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsY #define Tk_CanvasPsY \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsY) /* 16 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin #define Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin) /* 17 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc #define Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasTagsParseProc) /* 18 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc #define Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc) /* 19 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasTkwin #define Tk_CanvasTkwin \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasTkwin) /* 20 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasWindowCoords #define Tk_CanvasWindowCoords \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasWindowCoords) /* 21 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes #define Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ChangeWindowAttributes) /* 22 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CharBbox #define Tk_CharBbox \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CharBbox) /* 23 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ClearSelection #define Tk_ClearSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ClearSelection) /* 24 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ClipboardAppend #define Tk_ClipboardAppend \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ClipboardAppend) /* 25 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ClipboardClear #define Tk_ClipboardClear \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ClipboardClear) /* 26 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureInfo #define Tk_ConfigureInfo \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ConfigureInfo) /* 27 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureValue #define Tk_ConfigureValue \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ConfigureValue) /* 28 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureWidget #define Tk_ConfigureWidget \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ConfigureWidget) /* 29 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigureWindow #define Tk_ConfigureWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ConfigureWindow) /* 30 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ComputeTextLayout #define Tk_ComputeTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ComputeTextLayout) /* 31 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CoordsToWindow #define Tk_CoordsToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CoordsToWindow) /* 32 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateBinding #define Tk_CreateBinding \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateBinding) /* 33 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateBindingTable #define Tk_CreateBindingTable \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateBindingTable) /* 34 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateErrorHandler #define Tk_CreateErrorHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateErrorHandler) /* 35 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateEventHandler #define Tk_CreateEventHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateEventHandler) /* 36 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateGenericHandler #define Tk_CreateGenericHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateGenericHandler) /* 37 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateImageType #define Tk_CreateImageType \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateImageType) /* 38 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateItemType #define Tk_CreateItemType \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateItemType) /* 39 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat #define Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat) /* 40 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateSelHandler #define Tk_CreateSelHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateSelHandler) /* 41 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateWindow #define Tk_CreateWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateWindow) /* 42 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateWindowFromPath #define Tk_CreateWindowFromPath \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateWindowFromPath) /* 43 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DefineBitmap #define Tk_DefineBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DefineBitmap) /* 44 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DefineCursor #define Tk_DefineCursor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DefineCursor) /* 45 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteAllBindings #define Tk_DeleteAllBindings \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteAllBindings) /* 46 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteBinding #define Tk_DeleteBinding \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteBinding) /* 47 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteBindingTable #define Tk_DeleteBindingTable \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteBindingTable) /* 48 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteErrorHandler #define Tk_DeleteErrorHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteErrorHandler) /* 49 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteEventHandler #define Tk_DeleteEventHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteEventHandler) /* 50 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteGenericHandler #define Tk_DeleteGenericHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteGenericHandler) /* 51 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteImage #define Tk_DeleteImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteImage) /* 52 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteSelHandler #define Tk_DeleteSelHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteSelHandler) /* 53 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DestroyWindow #define Tk_DestroyWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DestroyWindow) /* 54 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DisplayName #define Tk_DisplayName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DisplayName) /* 55 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DistanceToTextLayout #define Tk_DistanceToTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DistanceToTextLayout) /* 56 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Draw3DPolygon #define Tk_Draw3DPolygon \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Draw3DPolygon) /* 57 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Draw3DRectangle #define Tk_Draw3DRectangle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Draw3DRectangle) /* 58 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawChars #define Tk_DrawChars \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawChars) /* 59 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawFocusHighlight #define Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawFocusHighlight) /* 60 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawTextLayout #define Tk_DrawTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawTextLayout) /* 61 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Fill3DPolygon #define Tk_Fill3DPolygon \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Fill3DPolygon) /* 62 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Fill3DRectangle #define Tk_Fill3DRectangle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Fill3DRectangle) /* 63 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FindPhoto #define Tk_FindPhoto \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FindPhoto) /* 64 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FontId #define Tk_FontId \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FontId) /* 65 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Free3DBorder #define Tk_Free3DBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Free3DBorder) /* 66 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeBitmap #define Tk_FreeBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeBitmap) /* 67 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColor #define Tk_FreeColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeColor) /* 68 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColormap #define Tk_FreeColormap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeColormap) /* 69 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeCursor #define Tk_FreeCursor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeCursor) /* 70 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeFont #define Tk_FreeFont \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeFont) /* 71 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeGC #define Tk_FreeGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeGC) /* 72 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeImage #define Tk_FreeImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeImage) /* 73 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeOptions #define Tk_FreeOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeOptions) /* 74 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreePixmap #define Tk_FreePixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreePixmap) /* 75 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeTextLayout #define Tk_FreeTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeTextLayout) /* 76 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeXId #define Tk_FreeXId \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeXId) /* 77 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GCForColor #define Tk_GCForColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GCForColor) /* 78 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GeometryRequest #define Tk_GeometryRequest \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GeometryRequest) /* 79 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Get3DBorder #define Tk_Get3DBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Get3DBorder) /* 80 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAllBindings #define Tk_GetAllBindings \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetAllBindings) /* 81 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAnchor #define Tk_GetAnchor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetAnchor) /* 82 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAtomName #define Tk_GetAtomName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetAtomName) /* 83 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBinding #define Tk_GetBinding \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetBinding) /* 84 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmap #define Tk_GetBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetBitmap) /* 85 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromData #define Tk_GetBitmapFromData \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetBitmapFromData) /* 86 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCapStyle #define Tk_GetCapStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetCapStyle) /* 87 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColor #define Tk_GetColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetColor) /* 88 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColorByValue #define Tk_GetColorByValue \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetColorByValue) /* 89 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColormap #define Tk_GetColormap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetColormap) /* 90 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursor #define Tk_GetCursor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetCursor) /* 91 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromData #define Tk_GetCursorFromData \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetCursorFromData) /* 92 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFont #define Tk_GetFont \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFont) /* 93 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFontFromObj #define Tk_GetFontFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontFromObj) /* 94 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetFontMetrics #define Tk_GetFontMetrics \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetFontMetrics) /* 95 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetGC #define Tk_GetGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetGC) /* 96 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetImage #define Tk_GetImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetImage) /* 97 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetImageMasterData #define Tk_GetImageMasterData \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetImageMasterData) /* 98 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetItemTypes #define Tk_GetItemTypes \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetItemTypes) /* 99 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJoinStyle #define Tk_GetJoinStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetJoinStyle) /* 100 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJustify #define Tk_GetJustify \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetJustify) /* 101 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetNumMainWindows #define Tk_GetNumMainWindows \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetNumMainWindows) /* 102 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOption #define Tk_GetOption \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetOption) /* 103 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixels #define Tk_GetPixels \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetPixels) /* 104 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixmap #define Tk_GetPixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetPixmap) /* 105 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetRelief #define Tk_GetRelief \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetRelief) /* 106 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetRootCoords #define Tk_GetRootCoords \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetRootCoords) /* 107 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfo #define Tk_GetScrollInfo \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetScrollInfo) /* 108 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScreenMM #define Tk_GetScreenMM \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetScreenMM) /* 109 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetSelection #define Tk_GetSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetSelection) /* 110 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetUid #define Tk_GetUid \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetUid) /* 111 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetVisual #define Tk_GetVisual \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetVisual) /* 112 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetVRootGeometry #define Tk_GetVRootGeometry \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetVRootGeometry) /* 113 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Grab #define Tk_Grab \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Grab) /* 114 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_HandleEvent #define Tk_HandleEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_HandleEvent) /* 115 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_IdToWindow #define Tk_IdToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_IdToWindow) /* 116 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ImageChanged #define Tk_ImageChanged \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ImageChanged) /* 117 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Init #define Tk_Init \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Init) /* 118 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_InternAtom #define Tk_InternAtom \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InternAtom) /* 119 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_IntersectTextLayout #define Tk_IntersectTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_IntersectTextLayout) /* 120 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MaintainGeometry #define Tk_MaintainGeometry \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MaintainGeometry) /* 121 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MainWindow #define Tk_MainWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MainWindow) /* 122 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MakeWindowExist #define Tk_MakeWindowExist \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MakeWindowExist) /* 123 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ManageGeometry #define Tk_ManageGeometry \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ManageGeometry) /* 124 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MapWindow #define Tk_MapWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MapWindow) /* 125 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MeasureChars #define Tk_MeasureChars \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MeasureChars) /* 126 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveResizeWindow #define Tk_MoveResizeWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MoveResizeWindow) /* 127 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveWindow #define Tk_MoveWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MoveWindow) /* 128 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MoveToplevelWindow #define Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MoveToplevelWindow) /* 129 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOf3DBorder #define Tk_NameOf3DBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOf3DBorder) /* 130 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfAnchor #define Tk_NameOfAnchor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfAnchor) /* 131 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfBitmap #define Tk_NameOfBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfBitmap) /* 132 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfCapStyle #define Tk_NameOfCapStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfCapStyle) /* 133 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfColor #define Tk_NameOfColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfColor) /* 134 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfCursor #define Tk_NameOfCursor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfCursor) /* 135 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfFont #define Tk_NameOfFont \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfFont) /* 136 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfImage #define Tk_NameOfImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfImage) /* 137 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfJoinStyle #define Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfJoinStyle) /* 138 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfJustify #define Tk_NameOfJustify \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfJustify) /* 139 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfRelief #define Tk_NameOfRelief \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfRelief) /* 140 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameToWindow #define Tk_NameToWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameToWindow) /* 141 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_OwnSelection #define Tk_OwnSelection \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_OwnSelection) /* 142 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ParseArgv #define Tk_ParseArgv \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ParseArgv) /* 143 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock_NoComposite) /* 144 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_NoComposite) /* 145 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoGetImage #define Tk_PhotoGetImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoGetImage) /* 146 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoBlank #define Tk_PhotoBlank \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoBlank) /* 147 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic #define Tk_PhotoExpand_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand_Panic) /* 148 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoGetSize #define Tk_PhotoGetSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoGetSize) /* 149 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic #define Tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize_Panic) /* 150 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PointToChar #define Tk_PointToChar \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PointToChar) /* 151 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptFontName #define Tk_PostscriptFontName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptFontName) /* 152 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PreserveColormap #define Tk_PreserveColormap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PreserveColormap) /* 153 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_QueueWindowEvent #define Tk_QueueWindowEvent \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_QueueWindowEvent) /* 154 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RedrawImage #define Tk_RedrawImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RedrawImage) /* 155 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ResizeWindow #define Tk_ResizeWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResizeWindow) /* 156 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RestackWindow #define Tk_RestackWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestackWindow) /* 157 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RestrictEvents #define Tk_RestrictEvents \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestrictEvents) /* 158 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SafeInit #define Tk_SafeInit \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SafeInit) /* 159 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetAppName #define Tk_SetAppName \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetAppName) /* 160 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder #define Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder) /* 161 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetClass #define Tk_SetClass \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetClass) /* 162 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetGrid #define Tk_SetGrid \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetGrid) /* 163 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorder #define Tk_SetInternalBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetInternalBorder) /* 164 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackground #define Tk_SetWindowBackground \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowBackground) /* 165 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap #define Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap) /* 166 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorder #define Tk_SetWindowBorder \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowBorder) /* 167 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth #define Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowBorderWidth) /* 168 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap #define Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap) /* 169 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowColormap #define Tk_SetWindowColormap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowColormap) /* 170 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetWindowVisual #define Tk_SetWindowVisual \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetWindowVisual) /* 171 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SizeOfBitmap #define Tk_SizeOfBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SizeOfBitmap) /* 172 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SizeOfImage #define Tk_SizeOfImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SizeOfImage) /* 173 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_StrictMotif #define Tk_StrictMotif \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_StrictMotif) /* 174 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript #define Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_TextLayoutToPostscript) /* 175 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_TextWidth #define Tk_TextWidth \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_TextWidth) /* 176 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UndefineCursor #define Tk_UndefineCursor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UndefineCursor) /* 177 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UnderlineChars #define Tk_UnderlineChars \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnderlineChars) /* 178 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UnderlineTextLayout #define Tk_UnderlineTextLayout \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnderlineTextLayout) /* 179 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Ungrab #define Tk_Ungrab \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Ungrab) /* 180 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UnmaintainGeometry #define Tk_UnmaintainGeometry \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnmaintainGeometry) /* 181 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UnmapWindow #define Tk_UnmapWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnmapWindow) /* 182 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UnsetGrid #define Tk_UnsetGrid \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UnsetGrid) /* 183 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_UpdatePointer #define Tk_UpdatePointer \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_UpdatePointer) /* 184 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj #define Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocBitmapFromObj) /* 185 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj #define Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj) /* 186 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocColorFromObj #define Tk_AllocColorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocColorFromObj) /* 187 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocCursorFromObj #define Tk_AllocCursorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocCursorFromObj) /* 188 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocFontFromObj #define Tk_AllocFontFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocFontFromObj) /* 189 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOptionTable #define Tk_CreateOptionTable \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOptionTable) /* 190 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteOptionTable #define Tk_DeleteOptionTable \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteOptionTable) /* 191 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj #define Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Free3DBorderFromObj) /* 192 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj #define Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeBitmapFromObj) /* 193 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeColorFromObj #define Tk_FreeColorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeColorFromObj) /* 194 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeConfigOptions #define Tk_FreeConfigOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeConfigOptions) /* 195 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeSavedOptions #define Tk_FreeSavedOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeSavedOptions) /* 196 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeCursorFromObj #define Tk_FreeCursorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeCursorFromObj) /* 197 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeFontFromObj #define Tk_FreeFontFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeFontFromObj) /* 198 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj #define Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Get3DBorderFromObj) /* 199 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetAnchorFromObj #define Tk_GetAnchorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetAnchorFromObj) /* 200 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetBitmapFromObj #define Tk_GetBitmapFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetBitmapFromObj) /* 201 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetColorFromObj #define Tk_GetColorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetColorFromObj) /* 202 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetCursorFromObj #define Tk_GetCursorFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetCursorFromObj) /* 203 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOptionInfo #define Tk_GetOptionInfo \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetOptionInfo) /* 204 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetOptionValue #define Tk_GetOptionValue \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetOptionValue) /* 205 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetJustifyFromObj #define Tk_GetJustifyFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetJustifyFromObj) /* 206 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetMMFromObj #define Tk_GetMMFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetMMFromObj) /* 207 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetPixelsFromObj #define Tk_GetPixelsFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetPixelsFromObj) /* 208 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetReliefFromObj #define Tk_GetReliefFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetReliefFromObj) /* 209 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetScrollInfoObj #define Tk_GetScrollInfoObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetScrollInfoObj) /* 210 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_InitOptions #define Tk_InitOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InitOptions) /* 211 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MainEx #define Tk_MainEx \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_MainEx) /* 212 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RestoreSavedOptions #define Tk_RestoreSavedOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RestoreSavedOptions) /* 213 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetOptions #define Tk_SetOptions \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetOptions) /* 214 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_InitConsoleChannels #define Tk_InitConsoleChannels \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_InitConsoleChannels) /* 215 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateConsoleWindow #define Tk_CreateConsoleWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateConsoleWindow) /* 216 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateSmoothMethod #define Tk_CreateSmoothMethod \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateSmoothMethod) /* 217 */ #endif /* Slot 218 is reserved */ /* Slot 219 is reserved */ #ifndef Tk_GetDash #define Tk_GetDash \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetDash) /* 220 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOutline #define Tk_CreateOutline \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOutline) /* 221 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteOutline #define Tk_DeleteOutline \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteOutline) /* 222 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ConfigOutlineGC #define Tk_ConfigOutlineGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ConfigOutlineGC) /* 223 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ChangeOutlineGC #define Tk_ChangeOutlineGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ChangeOutlineGC) /* 224 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ResetOutlineGC #define Tk_ResetOutlineGC \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetOutlineGC) /* 225 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasPsOutline #define Tk_CanvasPsOutline \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasPsOutline) /* 226 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetTSOrigin #define Tk_SetTSOrigin \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetTSOrigin) /* 227 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj #define Tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasGetCoordFromObj) /* 228 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CanvasSetOffset #define Tk_CanvasSetOffset \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CanvasSetOffset) /* 229 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DitherPhoto #define Tk_DitherPhoto \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DitherPhoto) /* 230 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptBitmap #define Tk_PostscriptBitmap \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptBitmap) /* 231 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptColor #define Tk_PostscriptColor \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptColor) /* 232 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptFont #define Tk_PostscriptFont \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptFont) /* 233 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptImage #define Tk_PostscriptImage \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptImage) /* 234 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptPath #define Tk_PostscriptPath \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptPath) /* 235 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptStipple #define Tk_PostscriptStipple \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptStipple) /* 236 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptY #define Tk_PostscriptY \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptY) /* 237 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PostscriptPhoto #define Tk_PostscriptPhoto \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PostscriptPhoto) /* 238 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler #define Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateClientMessageHandler) /* 239 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler #define Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler) /* 240 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow #define Tk_CreateAnonymousWindow \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateAnonymousWindow) /* 241 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetClassProcs #define Tk_SetClassProcs \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetClassProcs) /* 242 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetInternalBorderEx #define Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetInternalBorderEx) /* 243 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize #define Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetMinimumRequestSize) /* 244 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_SetCaretPos #define Tk_SetCaretPos \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_SetCaretPos) /* 245 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock_Panic) /* 246 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock_Panic) /* 247 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CollapseMotionEvents #define Tk_CollapseMotionEvents \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CollapseMotionEvents) /* 248 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RegisterStyleEngine #define Tk_RegisterStyleEngine \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RegisterStyleEngine) /* 249 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyleEngine #define Tk_GetStyleEngine \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyleEngine) /* 250 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_RegisterStyledElement #define Tk_RegisterStyledElement \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_RegisterStyledElement) /* 251 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementId #define Tk_GetElementId \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementId) /* 252 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateStyle #define Tk_CreateStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateStyle) /* 253 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyle #define Tk_GetStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyle) /* 254 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeStyle #define Tk_FreeStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeStyle) /* 255 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_NameOfStyle #define Tk_NameOfStyle \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_NameOfStyle) /* 256 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_AllocStyleFromObj #define Tk_AllocStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_AllocStyleFromObj) /* 257 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyleFromObj #define Tk_GetStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyleFromObj) /* 258 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_FreeStyleFromObj #define Tk_FreeStyleFromObj \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_FreeStyleFromObj) /* 259 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetStyledElement #define Tk_GetStyledElement \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetStyledElement) /* 260 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementSize #define Tk_GetElementSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementSize) /* 261 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementBox #define Tk_GetElementBox \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementBox) /* 262 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetElementBorderWidth #define Tk_GetElementBorderWidth \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetElementBorderWidth) /* 263 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_DrawElement #define Tk_DrawElement \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_DrawElement) /* 264 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoExpand #define Tk_PhotoExpand \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoExpand) /* 265 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutBlock #define Tk_PhotoPutBlock \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutBlock) /* 266 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock #define Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock) /* 267 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PhotoSetSize #define Tk_PhotoSetSize \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_PhotoSetSize) /* 268 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetUserInactiveTime #define Tk_GetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_GetUserInactiveTime) /* 269 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime #define Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_ResetUserInactiveTime) /* 270 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_Interp #define Tk_Interp \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_Interp) /* 271 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOldImageType #define Tk_CreateOldImageType \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldImageType) /* 272 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat #define Tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat \ (tkStubsPtr->tk_CreateOldPhotoImageFormat) /* 273 */ #endif #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* _TKDECLS */ 0707010004703f000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c583e00001e330000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/include/tkPlatDecls.h/* * tkPlatDecls.h -- * * Declarations of functions in the platform-specific public Tcl API. * * Copyright (c) 1998-1999 by Scriptics Corporation. * * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. * * RCS: @(#) $Id: tkPlatDecls.h,v 1.15 2007/12/13 15:24:16 dgp Exp $ */ #ifndef _TKPLATDECLS #define _TKPLATDECLS #ifdef BUILD_tk #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLEXPORT #endif /* * WARNING: This file is automatically generated by the tools/genStubs.tcl * script. Any modifications to the function declarations below should be made * in the generic/tk.decls script. */ /* !BEGIN!: Do not edit below this line. */ /* * Exported function declarations: */ #ifdef __WIN32__ /* WIN */ #ifndef Tk_AttachHWND_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_AttachHWND_TCL_DECLARED /* 0 */ EXTERN Window Tk_AttachHWND (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetHINSTANCE_TCL_DECLARED /* 1 */ EXTERN HINSTANCE Tk_GetHINSTANCE (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_GetHWND_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_GetHWND_TCL_DECLARED /* 2 */ EXTERN HWND Tk_GetHWND (Window window); #endif #ifndef Tk_HWNDToWindow_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_HWNDToWindow_TCL_DECLARED /* 3 */ EXTERN Tk_Window Tk_HWNDToWindow (HWND hwnd); #endif #ifndef Tk_PointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_PointerEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 4 */ EXTERN void Tk_PointerEvent (HWND hwnd, int x, int y); #endif #ifndef Tk_TranslateWinEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_TranslateWinEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 5 */ EXTERN int Tk_TranslateWinEvent (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT * result); #endif #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler_TCL_DECLARED /* 0 */ EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler ( Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc * registerWinProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc * getPortProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc * containerExistProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc * getClipProc, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc * getOffsetProc); #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus_TCL_DECLARED /* 1 */ EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor_TCL_DECLARED /* 2 */ EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor (int tkOwnsIt); #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInitMenus_TCL_DECLARED #define TkMacOSXInitMenus_TCL_DECLARED /* 3 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitMenus (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents_TCL_DECLARED #define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents_TCL_DECLARED /* 4 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents (Tcl_Interp * interp); #endif #ifndef TkGenWMConfigureEvent_TCL_DECLARED #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent_TCL_DECLARED /* 5 */ EXTERN void TkGenWMConfigureEvent (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns_TCL_DECLARED #define TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns_TCL_DECLARED /* 6 */ EXTERN void TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns (Tk_Window tkwin); #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort_TCL_DECLARED #define TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort_TCL_DECLARED /* 7 */ EXTERN GWorldPtr TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort (Drawable drawable); #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXGetRootControl_TCL_DECLARED #define TkMacOSXGetRootControl_TCL_DECLARED /* 8 */ EXTERN ControlRef TkMacOSXGetRootControl (Drawable drawable); #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier_TCL_DECLARED /* 9 */ EXTERN void Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier (void); #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront_TCL_DECLARED #define Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront_TCL_DECLARED /* 10 */ EXTERN int Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront (void); #endif #endif /* AQUA */ typedef struct TkPlatStubs { int magic; struct TkPlatStubHooks *hooks; #ifdef __WIN32__ /* WIN */ Window (*tk_AttachHWND) (Tk_Window tkwin, HWND hwnd); /* 0 */ HINSTANCE (*tk_GetHINSTANCE) (void); /* 1 */ HWND (*tk_GetHWND) (Window window); /* 2 */ Tk_Window (*tk_HWNDToWindow) (HWND hwnd); /* 3 */ void (*tk_PointerEvent) (HWND hwnd, int x, int y); /* 4 */ int (*tk_TranslateWinEvent) (HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam, LRESULT * result); /* 5 */ #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ void (*tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) (Tk_MacOSXEmbedRegisterWinProc * registerWinProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetGrafPortProc * getPortProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedMakeContainerExistProc * containerExistProcPtr, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetClipProc * getClipProc, Tk_MacOSXEmbedGetOffsetInParentProc * getOffsetProc); /* 0 */ void (*tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) (void); /* 1 */ void (*tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) (int tkOwnsIt); /* 2 */ void (*tkMacOSXInitMenus) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 3 */ void (*tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) (Tcl_Interp * interp); /* 4 */ void (*tkGenWMConfigureEvent) (Tk_Window tkwin, int x, int y, int width, int height, int flags); /* 5 */ void (*tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) (Tk_Window tkwin); /* 6 */ GWorldPtr (*tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) (Drawable drawable); /* 7 */ ControlRef (*tkMacOSXGetRootControl) (Drawable drawable); /* 8 */ void (*tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) (void); /* 9 */ int (*tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) (void); /* 10 */ #endif /* AQUA */ } TkPlatStubs; #ifdef __cplusplus extern "C" { #endif extern TkPlatStubs *tkPlatStubsPtr; #ifdef __cplusplus } #endif #if defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) /* * Inline function declarations: */ #ifdef __WIN32__ /* WIN */ #ifndef Tk_AttachHWND #define Tk_AttachHWND \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_AttachHWND) /* 0 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetHINSTANCE #define Tk_GetHINSTANCE \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHINSTANCE) /* 1 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_GetHWND #define Tk_GetHWND \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_GetHWND) /* 2 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_HWNDToWindow #define Tk_HWNDToWindow \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_HWNDToWindow) /* 3 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_PointerEvent #define Tk_PointerEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_PointerEvent) /* 4 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_TranslateWinEvent #define Tk_TranslateWinEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_TranslateWinEvent) /* 5 */ #endif #endif /* WIN */ #ifdef MAC_OSX_TK /* AQUA */ #ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler #define Tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXSetEmbedHandler) /* 0 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus #define Tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXTurnOffMenus) /* 1 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor #define Tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXTkOwnsCursor) /* 2 */ #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInitMenus #define TkMacOSXInitMenus \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitMenus) /* 3 */ #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents #define TkMacOSXInitAppleEvents \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInitAppleEvents) /* 4 */ #endif #ifndef TkGenWMConfigureEvent #define TkGenWMConfigureEvent \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkGenWMConfigureEvent) /* 5 */ #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns #define TkMacOSXInvalClipRgns \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXInvalClipRgns) /* 6 */ #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort #define TkMacOSXGetDrawablePort \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetDrawablePort) /* 7 */ #endif #ifndef TkMacOSXGetRootControl #define TkMacOSXGetRootControl \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tkMacOSXGetRootControl) /* 8 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier #define Tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXSetupTkNotifier) /* 9 */ #endif #ifndef Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront #define Tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront \ (tkPlatStubsPtr->tk_MacOSXIsAppInFront) /* 10 */ #endif #endif /* AQUA */ #endif /* defined(USE_TK_STUBS) && !defined(USE_TK_STUB_PROCS) */ /* !END!: Do not edit above this line. */ #undef TCL_STORAGE_CLASS #define TCL_STORAGE_CLASS DLLIMPORT #endif /* _TKPLATDECLS */ 070701000470ee000041ed0000000000000000000000054c5c588f000000000000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001300000000root/usr/local/man070701000470ef000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c588f000000000000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001800000000root/usr/local/man/man1070701000470f0000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584300003b120000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/man1/wish.1'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: wish.1,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:44 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS .IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20 .VS 8.5 Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR. This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument. .VE 8.5 .IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20 Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of using the default colormap for the screen. .IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20 Display (and screen) on which to display window. .IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20 Initial geometry to use for window. If this option is specified, its value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's Tcl interpreter. .IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20 Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands. .IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20 Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors are reported immediately. This will result in much slower execution, but it is useful for debugging. .IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20 Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an independent toplevel window. \fIId\fR must be specified in the same way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e. it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command). .RS Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its \fB\-container\fR option enabled. .RE .IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20 Specifies the visual to use for the window. \fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR procedure. .IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20 Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR variable without interpreting them. This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBWish\fR is a simple program consisting of the Tcl command language, the Tk toolkit, and a main program that reads commands from standard input or from a file. It creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands. If \fBwish\fR is invoked with arguments, then the first few arguments, ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName\fR? specify the name of a script file, and, optionally, the encoding of the text data stored in that script file. A value for \fIfileName\fR is recognized if the appropriate argument does not start with .QW \- . .PP If there are no arguments, or the arguments do not specify a \fIfileName\fR, then wish reads Tcl commands interactively from standard input. It will continue processing commands until all windows have been deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input. If there exists a file .QW \fB.wishrc\fR in the home directory of the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script just before reading the first command from standard input. .PP If arguments to \fBwish\fR do specify a \fIfileName\fR, then \fIfileName\fR is treated as the name of a script file. \fBWish\fR will evaluate the script in \fIfileName\fR (which presumably creates a user interface), then it will respond to events until all windows have been deleted. Commands will not be read from standard input. There is no automatic evaluation of .QW \fB.wishrc\fR when the name of a script file is presented on the \fBwish\fR command line, but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired. .PP Note that on Windows, the \fBwish\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program varies from the \fBtclsh\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program in an additional important way: it does not connect to a standard Windows console and is instead a windowed program. Because of this, it additionally provides access to its own \fBconsole\fR command. .SH "OPTION PROCESSING" .PP \fBWish\fR automatically processes all of the command-line options described in the \fBOPTIONS\fR summary above. Any other command-line arguments besides these are passed through to the application using the \fBargc\fR and \fBargv\fR variables described later. .SH "APPLICATION NAME AND CLASS" .PP The name of the application, which is used for purposes such as \fBsend\fR commands, is taken from the \fB\-name\fR option, if it is specified; otherwise it is taken from \fIfileName\fR, if it is specified, or from the command name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. In the last two cases, if the name contains a .QW / character, then only the characters after the last slash are used as the application name. .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP \fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables: .TP 15 \fBargc\fR Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none), not including the options described above. .TP 15 \fBargv\fR Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string if there are no such arguments. .TP 15 \fBargv0\fR Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified. Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. .TP 15 \fBgeometry\fR If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its value into this variable. If the variable still exists after \fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main window's geometry. .TP 15 \fBtcl_interactive\fR Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like device), 0 otherwise. .SH "SCRIPT FILES" .PP If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is .CS \fB#!/usr/local/bin/wish\fR .CE then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if you mark it as executable. This assumes that \fBwish\fR has been installed in the default location in /usr/local/bin; if it is installed somewhere else then you will have to modify the above line to match. Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about 30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBwish\fR executable can be accessed with a short file name. .PP An even better approach is to start your script files with the following three lines: .CS \fB#!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \e exec wish "$0" "$@"\fR .CE This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous paragraph. First, the location of the \fBwish\fR binary does not have to be hard-wired into the script: it can be anywhere in your shell search path. Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit in the previous approach. Third, this approach will work even if \fBwish\fR is itself a shell script (this is done on some systems in order to handle multiple architectures or operating systems: the \fBwish\fR script selects one of several binaries to run). The three lines cause both \fBsh\fR and \fBwish\fR to process the script, but the \fBexec\fR is only executed by \fBsh\fR. \fBsh\fR processes the script first; it treats the second line as a comment and executes the third line. The \fBexec\fR statement cause the shell to stop processing and instead to start up \fBwish\fR to reprocess the entire script. When \fBwish\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments, since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line. .PP The end of a script file may be marked either by the physical end of the medium, or by the character, .QW \e032 .PQ \eu001a ", control-Z" . If this character is present in the file, the \fBwish\fR application will read text up to but not including the character. An application that requires this character in the file may encode it as .QW \e032 , .QW \ex1a , or .QW \eu001a ; or may generate it by use of commands such as \fBformat\fR or \fBbinary\fR. .SH PROMPTS .PP When \fBwish\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each command with .QW "\fB% \fR" . You can change the prompt by setting the variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR. If variable \fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR. The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete; if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for incomplete commands. .SH KEYWORDS shell, toolkit 0707010004714b000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c588f000000000000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001800000000root/usr/local/man/mann0707010004719d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585100004ed70000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002000000000root/usr/local/man/mann/winfo.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: winfo.n,v 1.12 2007/12/13 15:23:44 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH winfo n 4.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME winfo \- Return window-related information .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwinfo\fR \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBwinfo\fR command is used to retrieve information about windows managed by Tk. It can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. The legal forms are: .TP \fBwinfo atom \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIname\fR Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the atom whose name is \fIname\fR. If no atom exists with the name \fIname\fR then a new one is created. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the atom is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo atomname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is \fIid\fR. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. This command is the inverse of the \fBwinfo atom\fR command. It generates an error if no such atom exists. .TP \fBwinfo cells \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the color map for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo children \fIwindow\fR Returns a list containing the path names of all the children of \fIwindow\fR. Top-level windows are returned as children of their logical parents. The list is in stacking order, with the lowest window first, except for Top-level windows which are not returned in stacking order. Use the \fBwm stackorder\fR command to query the stacking order of Top-level windows. .TP \fBwinfo class \fIwindow\fR Returns the class name for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo colormapfull \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if the colormap for \fIwindow\fR is known to be full, 0 otherwise. The colormap for a window is .QW known to be full if the last attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this application has not freed any colors in the colormap since the failed allocation. .TP \fBwinfo containing \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIrootX rootY\fR Returns the path name for the window containing the point given by \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR. \fIRootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are specified in screen units (i.e. any form acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR) in the coordinate system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used). If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the coordinates refer to the screen containing \fIwindow\fR; otherwise they refer to the screen of the application's main window. If no window in this application contains the point then an empty string is returned. In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is chosen. .TP \fBwinfo depth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the depth of \fIwindow\fR (number of bits per pixel). .TP \fBwinfo exists \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if there exists a window named \fIwindow\fR, 0 if no such window exists. .TP \fBwinfo fpixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR. \fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i . The return value may be fractional; for an integer value, use \fBwinfo pixels\fR. .TP \fBwinfo geometry \fIwindow\fR Returns the geometry for \fIwindow\fR, in the form \fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR. All dimensions are in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo height \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's height in pixels. When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel; the height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfill the window's needs. If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget, invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it, or use \fBwinfo reqheight\fR to get the window's requested height instead of its actual height. .TP \fBwinfo id \fIwindow\fR Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific identifier for \fIwindow\fR. On Unix platforms, this is the X window identifier. Under Windows, this is the Windows HWND. On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk. .TP \fBwinfo interps \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters (e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for a particular display. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the return value refers to the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it refers to the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo ismapped \fIwindow\fR Returns \fB1\fR if \fIwindow\fR is currently mapped, \fB0\fR otherwise. .TP \fBwinfo manager \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the geometry manager currently responsible for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not managed by any geometry manager. The name is usually the name of the Tcl command for the geometry manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR. If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the name is the widget's class command, such as \fBcanvas\fR. .TP \fBwinfo name \fIwindow\fR Returns \fIwindow\fR's name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed to its full path name). The command \fBwinfo name .\fR will return the name of the application. .TP \fBwinfo parent \fIwindow\fR Returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's parent, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is the main window of the application. .TP \fBwinfo pathname \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? \fIid\fR Returns the path name of the window whose X identifier is \fIid\fR. \fIId\fR must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must correspond to a window in the invoking application. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is given then the identifier is looked up on the display of \fIwindow\fR; otherwise it is looked up on the display of the application's main window. .TP \fBwinfo pixels \fIwindow\fR \fInumber\fR Returns the number of pixels in \fIwindow\fR corresponding to the distance given by \fInumber\fR. \fINumber\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR, such as .QW 2.0c or .QW 1i . The result is rounded to the nearest integer value; for a fractional result, use \fBwinfo fpixels\fR. .TP \fBwinfo pointerx \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is measured in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then -1 is returned. .TP \fBwinfo pointerxy \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns a list with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is computed in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then both of the returned coordinates are \-1. .TP \fBwinfo pointery \fIwindow\fR If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR, returns the pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window. If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is computed in the virtual root. If the mouse pointer is not on the same screen as \fIwindow\fR then -1 is returned. .TP \fBwinfo reqheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested height, in pixels. This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry manager to compute its geometry. .TP \fBwinfo reqwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's requested width, in pixels. This is the value used by \fIwindow\fR's geometry manager to compute its geometry. .TP \fBwinfo rgb \fIwindow color\fR Returns a list containing three decimal values in the range 0 to 65535, which are the red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to \fIcolor\fR in the window given by \fIwindow\fR. \fIColor\fR may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color option. .TP \fBwinfo rootx \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root window of the screen, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo rooty \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root window of the screen, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo screen \fIwindow\fR Returns the name of the screen associated with \fIwindow\fR, in the form \fIdisplayName\fR.\fIscreenIndex\fR. .TP \fBwinfo screencells \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default color map for \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo screendepth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window of \fIwindow\fR's screen (number of bits per pixel). .TP \fBwinfo screenheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo screenmmheight \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in millimeters. .TP \fBwinfo screenmmwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in millimeters. .TP \fBwinfo screenvisual \fIwindow\fR Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual class for \fIwindow\fR's screen: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR. .TP \fBwinfo screenwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen, in pixels. .TP \fBwinfo server \fIwindow\fR Returns a string containing information about the server for \fIwindow\fR's display. The exact format of this string may vary from platform to platform. For X servers the string has the form .QW "\fBX\fImajor\fBR\fIminor vendor vendorVersion\fR" where \fImajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are the version and revision numbers provided by the server (e.g., \fBX11R5\fR), \fIvendor\fR is the name of the vendor for the server, and \fIvendorRelease\fR is an integer release number provided by the server. .TP \fBwinfo toplevel \fIwindow\fR Returns the path name of the top-of-hierarchy window containing \fIwindow\fR. In standard Tk this will always be a \fBtoplevel\fR widget, but extensions may create other kinds of top-of-hierarchy widgets. .TP \fBwinfo viewable \fIwindow\fR Returns 1 if \fIwindow\fR and all of its ancestors up through the nearest toplevel window are mapped. Returns 0 if any of these windows are not mapped. .TP \fBwinfo visual \fIwindow\fR Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual class for \fIwindow\fR: \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR. .TP \fBwinfo visualid \fIwindow\fR Returns the X identifier for the visual for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo visualsavailable \fIwindow\fR ?\fBincludeids\fR? Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for \fIwindow\fR's screen. Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth. The class has the same form as returned by \fBwinfo visual\fR. The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual. In addition, if the \fBincludeids\fR argument is provided, then the depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual. .TP \fBwinfo vrootheight \fIwindow\fR Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR if there is one; otherwise returns the height of \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo vrootwidth \fIwindow\fR Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR if there is one; otherwise returns the width of \fIwindow\fR's screen. .TP \fBwinfo vrootx \fIwindow\fR Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR, relative to the root window of its screen. This is normally either zero or negative. Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo vrooty \fIwindow\fR Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with \fIwindow\fR, relative to the root window of its screen. This is normally either zero or negative. Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwinfo width \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving \fIwindow\fR's width in pixels. When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel; the width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfill the window's needs. If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget, invoke \fBupdate\fR to force the geometry manager to arrange it, or use \fBwinfo reqwidth\fR to get the window's requested width instead of its actual width. .TP \fBwinfo x \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's parent, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .TP \fBwinfo y \fIwindow\fR Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in \fIwindow\fR's parent, of the upper-left corner of \fIwindow\fR's border (or \fIwindow\fR if it has no border). .SH EXAMPLE Print where the mouse pointer is and what window it is currently over: .CS lassign [\fBwinfo pointerxy\fR .] x y puts \-nonewline "Mouse pointer at ($x,$y) which is " set win [\fBwinfo containing\fR $x $y] if {$win eq ""} { puts "over no window" } else { puts "over $win" } .CE .SH KEYWORDS atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters, mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window 0707010004719e000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585100009f220000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001d00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/wm.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: wm.n,v 1.38.2.1 2008/11/15 00:37:30 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH wm n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wm \- Communicate with window manager .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwm\fR \fIoption window \fR?\fIargs\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBwm\fR command is used to interact with window managers in order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry, or the increments in terms of which it may be resized. The \fBwm\fR command can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument. All of the forms expect at least one additional argument, \fIwindow\fR, which must be the path name of a top-level window. .PP The legal forms for the \fBwm\fR command are: .TP \fBwm aspect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIminNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom\fR? If \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of acceptable aspect ratios for \fIwindow\fR. The aspect ratio of \fIwindow\fR (width/length) will be constrained to lie between \fIminNumer\fR/\fIminDenom\fR and \fImaxNumer\fR/\fImaxDenom\fR. If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed. If \fIminNumer\fR etc. are specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise, it returns a Tcl list containing four elements, which are the current values of \fIminNumer\fR, \fIminDenom\fR, \fImaxNumer\fR, and \fImaxDenom\fR (if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is returned). .TP \fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR .TP \fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption\fR? .TP \fBwm attributes \fIwindow\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR? This subcommand returns or sets platform specific attributes associated with a window. The first form returns a list of the platform specific flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The values are as follows: .RS .PP All platforms support the following attributes (though X11 users should see the notes below): .TP \fB\-fullscreen\fR Places the window in a mode that takes up the entire screen, has no borders, and covers the general use area (i.e. Start menu and taskbar on Windows, dock and menubar on OSX, general window decorations on X11). .TP \fB\-topmost\fR Specifies whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows). .PP On Windows, the following attributes may be set. .TP \fB\-alpha\fR .VS 8.5 Specifies the alpha transparency level of the toplevel. It accepts a value from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque). Values outside that range will be constrained. This is supported on Windows 2000/XP+. Where not supported, the \fB\-alpha\fR value remains at \fB1.0\fR. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-disabled\fR Specifies whether the window is in a disabled state. .TP \fB\-toolwindow\fR Specifies a toolwindow style window (as defined in the MSDN). .TP \fB\-transparentcolor\fR .VS 8.5 Specifies the transparent color index of the toplevel. It takes any color value accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If the empty string is specified (default), no transparent color is used. This is supported on Windows 2000/XP+. Where not supported, the \fB\-transparentcolor\fR value remains at \fB{}\fR. .VE 8.5 .PP On Mac OS X, the following attributes may be set. .TP \fB\-alpha\fR Specifies the alpha transparency level of the window. It accepts a value from \fB0.0\fR (fully transparent) to \fB1.0\fR (opaque), values outside that range will be constrained. .TP \fB\-modified\fR Specifies the modification state of the window (determines whether the window close widget contains the modification indicator and whether the proxy icon is draggable). .TP \fB\-notify\fR Specifies process notification state (bouncing of the application dock icon). .TP \fB\-titlepath\fR Specifies the path of the file referenced as the window proxy icon (which can be dragged and dropped in lieu of the file's finder icon). .TP \fB\-transparent\fR Makes the window content area transparent and turns off the window shadow. For the transparency to be effecive, the toplevel background needs to be set to a color with some alpha, e.g. .QW systemTransparent . .PP On X11, the following attributes may be set. These are not supported by all window managers, and will have no effect under older WMs. .\" See http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/wm-spec .TP \fB\-zoomed\fR Requests that the window should be maximized. This is the same as \fBwm state zoomed\fR on Windows and Mac OS X. .PP On X11, changes to window attributes are performed asynchronously. Querying the value of an attribute returns the current state, which will not be the same as the value most recently set if the window manager has not yet processed the request or if it does not support the attribute. .RE .TP \fBwm client \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? If \fIname\fR is specified, this command stores \fIname\fR (which should be the name of the host on which the application is executing) in \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property for use by the window manager or session manager. The command returns an empty string in this case. If \fIname\fR is not specified, the command returns the last name set in a \fBwm client\fR command for \fIwindow\fR. If \fIname\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the \fBWM_CLIENT_MACHINE\fR property from \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwm colormapwindows \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwindowList\fR? This command is used to manipulate the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property, which provides information to the window managers about windows that have private colormaps. .RS .PP If \fIwindowList\fR is not specified, the command returns a list whose elements are the names of the windows in the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property. If \fIwindowList\fR is specified, it consists of a list of window path names; the command overwrites the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property with the given windows and returns an empty string. The \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property should normally contain a list of the internal windows within \fIwindow\fR whose colormaps differ from their parents. .PP The order of the windows in the property indicates a priority order: the window manager will attempt to install as many colormaps as possible from the head of this list when \fIwindow\fR gets the colormap focus. If \fIwindow\fR is not included among the windows in \fIwindowList\fR, Tk implicitly adds it at the end of the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property, so that its colormap is lowest in priority. If \fBwm colormapwindows\fR is not invoked, Tk will automatically set the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level itself; the order of the internal windows is undefined. See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the \fBWM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property. .RE .TP \fBwm command \fIwindow\fR ?\fIvalue\fR? If \fIvalue\fR is specified, this command stores \fIvalue\fR in \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property for use by the window manager or session manager and returns an empty string. \fIValue\fR must have proper list structure; the elements should contain the words of the command used to invoke the application. If \fIvalue\fR is not specified then the command returns the last value set in a \fBwm command\fR command for \fIwindow\fR. If \fIvalue\fR is specified as an empty string, the command deletes the \fBWM_COMMAND\fR property from \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwm deiconify \fIwindow\fR Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form. This is done by mapping the window. If the window has never been mapped then this command will not map the window, but it will ensure that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed in de-iconified form. On Windows, a deiconified window will also be raised and be given the focus (made the active window). Returns an empty string. .TP \fBwm focusmodel \fIwindow\fR ?\fBactive\fR|\fBpassive\fR? If \fBactive\fR or \fBpassive\fR is supplied as an optional argument to the command, then it specifies the focus model for \fIwindow\fR. In this case the command returns an empty string. If no additional argument is supplied, then the command returns the current focus model for \fIwindow\fR. .RS .PP An \fBactive\fR focus model means that \fIwindow\fR will claim the input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when the focus is currently in some other application. \fBPassive\fR means that \fIwindow\fR will never claim the focus for itself: the window manager should give the focus to \fIwindow\fR at appropriate times. However, once the focus has been given to \fIwindow\fR or one of its descendants, the application may re-assign the focus among \fIwindow\fR's descendants. The focus model defaults to \fBpassive\fR, and Tk's \fBfocus\fR command assumes a passive model of focusing. .RE .TP \fBwm forget \fIwindow\fR The \fIwindow\fR will be unmapped from the screen and will no longer be managed by \fBwm\fR. Windows created with the \fBtoplevel\fR command will be treated like \fBframe\fR windows once they are no longer managed by \fBwm\fR, however, the \fB\-menu\fR configuration will be remembered and the menus will return once the widget is managed again. .TP \fBwm frame \fIwindow\fR If \fIwindow\fR has been reparented by the window manager into a decorative frame, the command returns the platform specific window identifier for the outermost frame that contains \fIwindow\fR (the window whose parent is the root or virtual root). If \fIwindow\fR has not been reparented by the window manager then the command returns the platform specific window identifier for \fIwindow\fR. .TP \fBwm geometry \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewGeometry\fR? If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified, then the geometry of \fIwindow\fR is changed and an empty string is returned. Otherwise the current geometry for \fIwindow\fR is returned (this is the most recent geometry specified either by manual resizing or in a \fBwm geometry\fR command). \fINewGeometry\fR has the form \fB=\fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fB\(+-\fIx\fB\(+-\fIy\fR, where any of \fB=\fR, \fIwidth\fBx\fIheight\fR, or \fB\(+-\fIx\fB\(+-\fIy\fR may be omitted. \fIWidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are positive integers specifying the desired dimensions of \fIwindow\fR. If \fIwindow\fR is gridded (see \fBGRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR below) then the dimensions are specified in grid units; otherwise they are specified in pixel units. .RS .PP \fIX\fR and \fIy\fR specify the desired location of \fIwindow\fR on the screen, in pixels. If \fIx\fR is preceded by \fB+\fR, it specifies the number of pixels between the left edge of the screen and the left edge of \fIwindow\fR's border; if preceded by \fB\-\fR then \fIx\fR specifies the number of pixels between the right edge of the screen and the right edge of \fIwindow\fR's border. If \fIy\fR is preceded by \fB+\fR then it specifies the number of pixels between the top of the screen and the top of \fIwindow\fR's border; if \fIy\fR is preceded by \fB\-\fR then it specifies the number of pixels between the bottom of \fIwindow\fR's border and the bottom of the screen. .PP If \fInewGeometry\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing user-specified geometry for \fIwindow\fR is cancelled, and the window will revert to the size requested internally by its widgets. .RE .TP \fBwm grid \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbaseWidth baseHeight widthInc heightInc\fR? This command indicates that \fIwindow\fR is to be managed as a gridded window. It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units. \fIBaseWidth\fR and \fIbaseHeight\fR specify the number of grid units corresponding to the pixel dimensions requested internally by \fIwindow\fR using \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR. \fIWidthInc\fR and \fIheightInc\fR specify the number of pixels in each horizontal and vertical grid unit. These four values determine a range of acceptable sizes for \fIwindow\fR, corresponding to grid-based widths and heights that are non-negative integers. Tk will pass this information to the window manager; during manual resizing, the window manager will restrict the window's size to one of these acceptable sizes. .RS .PP Furthermore, during manual resizing the window manager will display the window's current size in terms of grid units rather than pixels. If \fIbaseWidth\fR etc. are all specified as empty strings, then \fIwindow\fR will no longer be managed as a gridded window. If \fIbaseWidth\fR etc. are specified then the return value is an empty string. .PP Otherwise the return value is a Tcl list containing four elements corresponding to the current \fIbaseWidth\fR, \fIbaseHeight\fR, \fIwidthInc\fR, and \fIheightInc\fR; if \fIwindow\fR is not currently gridded, then an empty string is returned. .PP Note: this command should not be needed very often, since the \fBTk_SetGrid\fR library procedure and the \fBsetGrid\fR option provide easier access to the same functionality. .RE .TP \fBwm group \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR? If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it gives the path name for the leader of a group of related windows. The window manager may use this information, for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's leader is iconified. \fIPathName\fR may be specified as an empty string to remove \fIwindow\fR from any group association. If \fIpathName\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string; otherwise it returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current group leader, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not part of any group. .TP \fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR? If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details). This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed in \fIwindow\fR's icon, and the command returns an empty string. If an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR, then any current icon bitmap is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns the name of the current icon bitmap associated with \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR has no icon bitmap. On the Windows operating system, an additional flag is supported: .RS .TP \fBwm iconbitmap \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? ?\fIimage\fR? If the \fB\-default\fR flag is given, the icon is applied to all toplevel windows (existing and future) to which no other specific icon has yet been applied. In addition to bitmap image types, a full path specification to any file which contains a valid Windows icon is also accepted (usually .ico or .icr files), or any file for which the shell has assigned an icon. Tcl will first test if the file contains an icon, then if it has an assigned icon, and finally, if that fails, test for a bitmap. .RE .TP \fBwm iconify \fIwindow\fR Arrange for \fIwindow\fR to be iconified. It \fIwindow\fR has not yet been mapped for the first time, this command will arrange for it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped. .TP \fBwm iconmask \fIwindow\fR ?\fIbitmap\fR? If \fIbitmap\fR is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard forms accepted by Tk (see the \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR manual entry for details). This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask in conjunction with the \fBiconbitmap\fR option: where the mask has zeroes no icon will be displayed; where it has ones, the bits from the icon bitmap will be displayed. If an empty string is specified for \fIbitmap\fR then any current icon mask is cancelled for \fIwindow\fR (this is equivalent to specifying a bitmap of all ones). If \fIbitmap\fR is specified then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns the name of the current icon mask associated with \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no mask is in effect. .TP \fBwm iconname \fIwindow\fR ?\fInewName\fR? If \fInewName\fR is specified, then it is passed to the window manager; the window manager should display \fInewName\fR inside the icon associated with \fIwindow\fR. In this case an empty string is returned as result. If \fInewName\fR is not specified then the command returns the current icon name for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this case the window manager will normally display the window's title, as specified with the \fBwm title\fR command). .VS 8.5 .TP \fBwm iconphoto \fIwindow\fR ?\fB\-default\fR? \fIimage1\fR ?\fIimage2 ...\fR? Sets the titlebar icon for \fIwindow\fR based on the named photo images. If \fB\-default\fR is specified, this is applied to all future created toplevels as well. The data in the images is taken as a snapshot at the time of invocation. If the images are later changed, this is not reflected to the titlebar icons. Multiple images are accepted to allow different images sizes (e.g., 16x16 and 32x32) to be provided. The window manager may scale provided icons to an appropriate size. .RS .PP On Windows, the images are packed into a Windows icon structure. This will override an ico specified to \fBwm iconbitmap\fR, and vice versa. .PP On X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property, which most modern window managers support. A \fBwm iconbitmap\fR may exist simultaneously. It is recommended to use not more than 2 icons, placing the larger icon first. .PP On Macintosh, this currently does nothing. .VE 8.5 .RE .TP \fBwm iconposition \fIwindow\fR ?\fIx y\fR? If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified, they are passed to the window manager as a hint about where to position the icon for \fIwindow\fR. In this case an empty string is returned. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled. If neither \fIx\fR nor \fIy\fR is specified, then the command returns a Tcl list containing two values, which are the current icon position hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned). .TP \fBwm iconwindow \fIwindow\fR ?\fIpathName\fR? If \fIpathName\fR is specified, it is the path name for a window to use as icon for \fIwindow\fR: when \fIwindow\fR is iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be mapped to serve as icon, and when \fIwindow\fR is de-iconified then \fIpathName\fR will be unmapped again. If \fIpathName\fR is specified as an empty string then any existing icon window association for \fIwindow\fR will be cancelled. If the \fIpathName\fR argument is specified then an empty string is returned. Otherwise the command returns the path name of the current icon window for \fIwindow\fR, or an empty string if there is no icon window currently specified for \fIwindow\fR. Button press events are disabled for \fIwindow\fR as long as it is an icon window; this is needed in order to allow window managers to .QW own those events. Note: not all window managers support the notion of an icon window. .TP \fBwm manage \fIwidget\fR The \fIwidget\fR specified will become a stand alone top-level window. The window will be decorated with the window managers title bar, etc. Only \fIframe\fR, \fIlabelframe\fR and \fItoplevel\fR widgets can be used with this command. Attempting to pass any other widget type will raise an error. Attempting to manage a \fItoplevel\fR widget is benign and achieves nothing. See also \fBGEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR. .TP \fBwm maxsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the maximum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR. For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in grid units; otherwise they are specified in pixel units. The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be less than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the maximum width and height currently in effect. The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen. See the sections on geometry management below for more information. .TP \fBwm minsize \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they give the minimum permissible dimensions for \fIwindow\fR. For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in grid units; otherwise they are specified in pixel units. The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be greater than or equal to \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns a Tcl list with two elements, which are the minimum width and height currently in effect. The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension. See the sections on geometry management below for more information. .TP \fBwm overrideredirect \fIwindow\fR ?\fIboolean\fR? If \fIboolean\fR is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and the override-redirect flag for \fIwindow\fR is set to that value. If \fIboolean\fR is not specified then \fB1\fR or \fB0\fR is returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag is currently set for \fIwindow\fR. Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes it to be ignored by the window manager; among other things, this means that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the window using the normal window manager mechanisms. .TP \fBwm positionfrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR? If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or \fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two. It indicates whether \fIwindow\fR's current position was requested by the program or by the user. Many window managers ignore program-requested initial positions and ask the user to manually position the window; if \fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should position the window at the given place without asking the user for assistance. If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current position source is cancelled. If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBprogram\fR to indicate the source of the window's current position, or an empty string if no source has been specified yet. Most window managers interpret .QW "no source" as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. Tk will automatically set the position source to \fBuser\fR when a \fBwm geometry\fR command is invoked, unless the source has been set explicitly to \fBprogram\fR. .TP \fBwm protocol \fIwindow\fR ?\fIname\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? This command is used to manage window manager protocols such as \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR. \fIName\fR is the name of an atom corresponding to a window manager protocol, such as \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR or \fBWM_SAVE_YOURSELF\fR or \fBWM_TAKE_FOCUS\fR. If both \fIname\fR and \fIcommand\fR are specified, then \fIcommand\fR is associated with the protocol specified by \fIname\fR. \fIName\fR will be added to \fIwindow\fR's \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property to tell the window manager that the application has a protocol handler for \fIname\fR, and \fIcommand\fR will be invoked in the future whenever the window manager sends a message to the client for that protocol. In this case the command returns an empty string. If \fIname\fR is specified but \fIcommand\fR is not, then the current command for \fIname\fR is returned, or an empty string if there is no handler defined for \fIname\fR. If \fIcommand\fR is specified as an empty string then the current handler for \fIname\fR is deleted and it is removed from the \fBWM_PROTOCOLS\fR property on \fIwindow\fR; an empty string is returned. Lastly, if neither \fIname\fR nor \fIcommand\fR is specified, the command returns a list of all the protocols for which handlers are currently defined for \fIwindow\fR. .RS .PP Tk always defines a protocol handler for \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR, even if you have not asked for one with \fBwm protocol\fR. If a \fBWM_DELETE_WINDOW\fR message arrives when you have not defined a handler, then Tk handles the message by destroying the window for which it was received. .RE .TP \fBwm resizable \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwidth height\fR? This command controls whether or not the user may interactively resize a top-level window. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the width and height of \fIwindow\fR may be modified by the user. In this case the command returns an empty string. If \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are omitted then the command returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the width and height of \fIwindow\fR are currently resizable. By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions. If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size from the most recent interactive resize or \fBwm geometry\fR command. If there has been no such operation then the window's natural size will be used. .TP \fBwm sizefrom \fIwindow\fR ?\fIwho\fR? If \fIwho\fR is specified, it must be either \fBprogram\fR or \fBuser\fR, or an abbreviation of one of these two. It indicates whether \fIwindow\fR's current size was requested by the program or by the user. Some window managers ignore program-requested sizes and ask the user to manually size the window; if \fBuser\fR is specified then the window manager should give the window its specified size without asking the user for assistance. If \fIwho\fR is specified as an empty string, then the current size source is cancelled. If \fIwho\fR is specified, then the command returns an empty string. Otherwise it returns \fBuser\fR or \fBwindow\fR to indicate the source of the window's current size, or an empty string if no source has been specified yet. Most window managers interpret .QW "no source" as equivalent to \fBprogram\fR. .TP \fBwm stackorder \fIwindow\fR ?\fBisabove\fR|\fBisbelow \fIwindow\fR? The \fBstackorder\fR command returns a list of toplevel windows in stacking order, from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all of the window's children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels that are currently mapped to the screen are returned. The \fBstackorder\fR command can also be used to determine if one toplevel is positioned above or below a second toplevel. When two window arguments separated by either \fBisabove\fR or \fBisbelow\fR are passed, a boolean result indicates whether or not the first window is currently above or below the second window in the stacking order. .TP \fBwm state \fIwindow\fR ?newstate? If \fInewstate\fR is specified, the window will be set to the new state, otherwise it returns the current state of \fIwindow\fR: either \fBnormal\fR, \fBiconic\fR, \fBwithdrawn\fR, \fBicon\fR, or (Windows and Mac OS X only) \fBzoomed\fR. The difference between \fBiconic\fR and \fBicon\fR is that \fBiconic\fR refers to a window that has been iconified (e.g., with the \fBwm iconify\fR command) while \fBicon\fR refers to a window whose only purpose is to serve as the icon for some other window (via the \fBwm iconwindow\fR command). The \fBicon\fR state cannot be set. .TP \fBwm title \fIwindow\fR ?\fIstring\fR? If \fIstring\fR is specified, then it will be passed to the window manager for use as the title for \fIwindow\fR (the window manager should display this string in \fIwindow\fR's title bar). In this case the command returns an empty string. If \fIstring\fR is not specified then the command returns the current title for the \fIwindow\fR. The title for a window defaults to its name. .TP \fBwm transient \fIwindow\fR ?\fImaster\fR? If \fImaster\fR is specified, then the window manager is informed that \fIwindow\fR is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working on behalf of \fImaster\fR (where \fImaster\fR is the path name for a top-level window). If \fImaster\fR is specified as an empty string then \fIwindow\fR is marked as not being a transient window any more. Otherwise the command returns the path name of \fIwindow\fR's current master, or an empty string if \fIwindow\fR is not currently a transient window. A transient window will mirror state changes in the master and inherit the state of the master when initially mapped. It is an error to attempt to make a window a transient of itself. .TP \fBwm withdraw \fIwindow\fR Arranges for \fIwindow\fR to be withdrawn from the screen. This causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window manager. If the window has never been mapped, then this command causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state. Not all window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are mapped in the withdrawn state. Note: it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a window and then re-map it (e.g. with \fBwm deiconify\fR) to get some window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes such as group. .SH "GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT" .PP By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its \fInatural size\fR, which is the one determined internally by its widgets and geometry managers. If the natural size of a top-level window changes, then the window's size changes to match. A top-level window can be given a size other than its natural size in two ways. First, the user can resize the window manually using the facilities of the window manager, such as resize handles. Second, the application can request a particular size for a top-level window using the \fBwm geometry\fR command. These two cases are handled identically by Tk; in either case, the requested size overrides the natural size. You can return the window to its natural by invoking \fBwm geometry\fR with an empty \fIgeometry\fR string. .PP Normally a top-level window can have any size from one pixel in each dimension up to the size of its screen. However, you can use the \fBwm minsize\fR and \fBwm maxsize\fR commands to limit the range of allowable sizes. The range set by \fBwm minsize\fR and \fBwm maxsize\fR applies to all forms of resizing, including the window's natural size as well as manual resizes and the \fBwm geometry\fR command. You can also use the command \fBwm resizable\fR to completely disable interactive resizing in one or both dimensions. .PP The \fBwm manage\fR and \fBwm forget\fR commands may be used to perform undocking and docking of windows. After a widget is managed by \fBwm manage\fR command, all other \fBwm\fR subcommands may be used with the widget. Only widgets created using the toplevel command may have an attached menu via the \fB\-menu\fR configure option. A toplevel widget may be used as a frame and managed with any of the other geometry managers after using the \fBwm forget\fR command. Any menu associated with a toplevel widget will be hidden when managed by another geometry managers. The menus will reappear once the window is managed by \fBwm\fR. All custom bindtags for widgets in a subtree that have their top-level widget changed via a \fBwm manage\fR or \fBwm forget\fR command, must be redone to adjust any top-level widget path in the bindtags. Bindtags that have not been customized do not have to be redone. .SH "GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT" .PP Gridded geometry management occurs when one of the widgets of an application supports a range of useful sizes. This occurs, for example, in a text editor where the scrollbars, menus, and other adornments are fixed in size but the edit widget can support any number of lines of text or characters per line. In this case, it is usually desirable to let the user specify the number of lines or characters-per-line, either with the \fBwm geometry\fR command or by interactively resizing the window. In the case of text, and in other interesting cases also, only discrete sizes of the window make sense, such as integral numbers of lines and characters-per-line; arbitrary pixel sizes are not useful. .PP Gridded geometry management provides support for this kind of application. Tk (and the window manager) assume that there is a grid of some sort within the application and that the application should be resized in terms of \fIgrid units\fR rather than pixels. Gridded geometry management is typically invoked by turning on the \fBsetGrid\fR option for a widget; it can also be invoked with the \fBwm grid\fR command or by calling \fBTk_SetGrid\fR. In each of these approaches the particular widget (or sometimes code in the application as a whole) specifies the relationship between integral grid sizes for the window and pixel sizes. To return to non-gridded geometry management, invoke \fBwm grid\fR with empty argument strings. .PP When gridded geometry management is enabled then all the dimensions specified in \fBwm minsize\fR, \fBwm maxsize\fR, and \fBwm geometry\fR commands are treated as grid units rather than pixel units. Interactive resizing is also carried out in even numbers of grid units rather than pixels. .SH BUGS .PP Most existing window managers appear to have bugs that affect the operation of the \fBwm\fR command. For example, some changes will not take effect if the window is already active: the window will have to be withdrawn and de-iconified in order to make the change happen. .SH EXAMPLES A fixed-size window that says that it is fixed-size too: .CS toplevel .fixed \fBwm title\fR .fixed "Fixed-size Window" \fBwm resizable\fR .fixed 0 0 .CE .PP A simple dialog-like window, centred on the screen: .CS # Create and arrange the dialog contents. toplevel .msg label .msg.l \-text "This is a very simple dialog demo." button .msg.ok \-text OK \-default active \-command {destroy .msg} pack .msg.ok \-side bottom \-fill x pack .msg.l \-expand 1 \-fill both # Now set the widget up as a centred dialog. # But first, we need the geometry managers to finish setting # up the interior of the dialog, for which we need to run the # event loop with the widget hidden completely... \fBwm withdraw\fR .msg update set x [expr {([winfo screenwidth .]\-[winfo width .msg])/2}] set y [expr {([winfo screenheight .]\-[winfo height .msg])/2}] \fBwm geometry\fR .msg +$x+$y \fBwm transient\fR .msg . \fBwm title\fR .msg "Dialog demo" \fBwm deiconify\fR .msg .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" toplevel(n), winfo(n) .SH KEYWORDS aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify, increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager 0707010004718d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585000002fd60000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_intro.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_intro.n,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:44 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::intro n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::intro \- Introduction to the Tk theme engine .BE .SH "OVERVIEW" The Tk themed widget set is based on a revised and enhanced version of TIP #48 (http://tip.tcl.tk/48) specified style engine. The main concepts are described below. The basic idea is to separate, to the extent possible, the code implementing a widget's behavior from the code implementing its appearance. Widget class bindings are primarily responsible for maintaining the widget state and invoking callbacks; all aspects of the widgets appearance is .SH "THEMES" A \fItheme\fR is a collection of elements and styles that determine the look and feel of the widget set. Themes can be used to: .IP \(bu Isolate platform differences (X11 vs. classic Windows vs. XP vs. Aqua ...) .IP \(bu Adapt to display limitations (low-color, grayscale, monochrome, tiny screens) .IP \(bu Accessibility (high contrast, large type) .IP \(bu Application suite branding .IP \(bu Blend in with the rest of the desktop (Gnome, KDE, Java) .IP \(bu And, of course: eye candy. .SH "ELEMENTS" An \fIelement\fR displays an individual part of a widget. For example, a vertical scrollbar widget contains \fBuparrow\fR, \fBdownarrow\fR, \fBtrough\fR and \fBslider\fR elements. .PP Element names use a recursive dotted notation. For example, \fBuparrow\fR identifies a generic arrow element, and \fBScrollbar.uparrow\fR and \fBCombobox.uparrow\fR identify widget-specific elements. When looking for an element, the style engine looks for the specific name first, and if an element of that name is not found it looks for generic elements by stripping off successive leading components of the element name. .PP Like widgets, elements have \fIoptions\fR which specify what to display and how to display it. For example, the \fBtext\fR element (which displays a text string) has \fB\-text\fR, \fB\-font\fR, \fB\-foreground\fR, \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-underline\fR, and \fB\-width\fR options. The value of an element option is taken from: .IP \(bu An option of the same name and type in the widget containing the element; .IP \(bu A dynamic setting specified by \fBstyle map\fR and the current state; .IP \(bu The default setting specified by \fBstyle configure\fR; or .IP \(bu The element's built-in default value for the option. .SH "LAYOUTS" A \fIlayout\fR specifies which elements make up a widget and how they are arranged. The layout engine uses a simplified version of the \fBpack\fR algorithm: starting with an initial cavity equal to the size of the widget, elements are allocated a parcel within the cavity along the side specified by the \fB\-side\fR option, and placed within the parcel according to the \fB\-sticky\fR option. For example, the layout for a horizontal scrollbar .CS ttk::style layout Horizontal.TScrollbar { Scrollbar.trough \-children { Scrollbar.leftarrow \-side left \-sticky w Scrollbar.rightarrow \-side right \-sticky e Scrollbar.thumb \-side left \-expand true \-sticky ew } } .CE By default, the layout for a widget is the same as its class name. Some widgets may override this (for example, the \fBttk::scrollbar\fR widget chooses different layouts based on the \fB\-orient\fR option). .SH "STATES" In standard Tk, many widgets have a \fB\-state\fR option which (in most cases) is either \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR. Some widgets support additional states, such as the \fBentry\fR widget which has a \fBreadonly\fR state and the various flavors of buttons which have \fBactive\fR state. .PP The themed Tk widgets generalizes this idea: every widget has a bitmap of independent state flags. Widget state flags include \fBactive\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, \fBpressed\fR, \fBfocus\fR, etc., (see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for the full list of state flags). .PP Instead of a \fB\-state\fR option, every widget now has a \fBstate\fR widget command which is used to set or query the state. A \fIstate specification\fR is a list of symbolic state names indicating which bits are set, each optionally prefixed with an exclamation point indicating that the bit is cleared instead. .PP For example, the class bindings for the \fBttk::button\fR widget are: .CS bind TButton { %W state active } bind TButton { %W state !active } bind TButton { %W state pressed } bind TButton { %W state !pressed } bind TButton { %W state pressed } bind TButton \e { %W instate {pressed} { %W state !pressed ; %W invoke } } .CE This specifies that the widget becomes \fBactive\fR when the pointer enters the widget, and inactive when it leaves. Similarly it becomes \fBpressed\fR when the mouse button is pressed, and \fB!pressed\fR on the ButtonRelease event. In addition, the button unpresses if pointer is dragged outside the widget while Button-1 is held down, and represses if it's dragged back in. Finally, when the mouse button is released, the widget's \fB\-command\fR is invoked, but only if the button is currently in the \fBpressed\fR state. (The actual bindings are a little more complicated than the above, but not by much). .PP \fINote to self: rewrite that paragraph. It's horrible.\fR .SH "STYLES" Each widget is associated with a \fIstyle\fR, which specifies values for element options. Style names use a recursive dotted notation like layouts and elements; by default, widgets use the class name to look up a style in the current theme. For example: .CS ttk::style configure TButton \e \-background #d9d9d9 \e \-foreground black \e \-relief raised \e ; .CE Many elements are displayed differently depending on the widget state. For example, buttons have a different background when they are active, a different foreground when disabled, and a different relief when pressed. The \fBstyle map\fR command specifies dynamic option settings for a particular style: .CS ttk::style map TButton \e \-background [list disabled #d9d9d9 active #ececec] \e \-foreground [list disabled #a3a3a3] \e \-relief [list {pressed !disabled} sunken] \e ; .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::style(n) 07070100047185000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f00001ed70000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tkwait.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkwait.n,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:23:00 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tkwait n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tkwait \- Wait for variable to change or window to be destroyed .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtkwait variable \fIname\fR .sp \fBtkwait visibility \fIname\fR .sp \fBtkwait window \fIname\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtkwait\fR command waits for one of several things to happen, then it returns without taking any other actions. The return value is always an empty string. If the first argument is \fBvariable\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a global variable and the command waits for that variable to be modified. If the first argument is \fBvisibility\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the \fBtkwait\fR command waits for a change in its visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify event). This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created window to appear on the screen before taking some action. If the first argument is \fBwindow\fR (or any abbreviation of it) then the second argument is the name of a window and the \fBtkwait\fR command waits for that window to be destroyed. This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction. .PP While the \fBtkwait\fR command is waiting it processes events in the normal fashion, so the application will continue to respond to user interactions. If an event handler invokes \fBtkwait\fR again, the nested call to \fBtkwait\fR must complete before the outer call can complete. .SH KEYWORDS variable, visibility, wait, window 0707010004717d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d0000209f0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: focusNext.n,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tk_focusNext n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_focusNext, tk_focusPrev, tk_focusFollowsMouse \- Utility procedures for managing the input focus. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_focusNext \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBtk_focusPrev \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBtk_focusNext\fR is a utility procedure used for keyboard traversal. It returns the .QW next window after \fIwindow\fR in focus order. The focus order is determined by the stacking order of windows and the structure of the window hierarchy. Among siblings, the focus order is the same as the stacking order, with the lowest window being first. If a window has children, the window is visited first, followed by its children (recursively), followed by its next sibling. Top-level windows other than \fIwindow\fR are skipped, so that \fBtk_focusNext\fR never returns a window in a different top-level from \fIwindow\fR. .PP After computing the next window, \fBtk_focusNext\fR examines the window's \fB\-takefocus\fR option to see whether it should be skipped. If so, \fBtk_focusNext\fR continues on to the next window in the focus order, until it eventually finds a window that will accept the focus or returns back to \fIwindow\fR. .PP \fBtk_focusPrev\fR is similar to \fBtk_focusNext\fR except that it returns the window just before \fIwindow\fR in the focus order. .PP \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR changes the focus model for the application to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus. After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window Tk will automatically give it the input focus. The \fBfocus\fR command may be used to move the focus to a window other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves into a new window the focus will jump to that window. Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the application to an explicit focus model; to do this you will have to write a script that deletes the bindings created by \fBtk_focusFollowsMouse\fR. .SH KEYWORDS focus, keyboard traversal, top-level 07070100047183000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f00001cb00000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tkerror.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkerror.n,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:23:00 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tkerror n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tkerror \- Command invoked to process background errors .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtkerror \fImessage\fR .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Note: as of Tk 4.1 the \fBtkerror\fR command has been renamed to \fBbgerror\fR because the event loop (which is what usually invokes it) is now part of Tcl. For backward compatibility the \fBbgerror\fR provided by the current Tk version still tries to call \fBtkerror\fR if there is one (or an auto loadable one), so old script defining that error handler should still work, but you should anyhow modify your scripts to use \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR because that support for the old name might vanish in the near future. If that call fails, \fBbgerror\fR posts a dialog showing the error and offering to see the stack trace to the user. If you want your own error management you should directly override \fBbgerror\fR instead of \fBtkerror\fR. Documentation for \fBbgerror\fR is available as part of Tcl's documentation. .SH KEYWORDS background error, reporting 07070100047191000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c5850000032550000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_notebook.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_notebook.n,v 1.12.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::notebook n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::notebook \- Multi-paned container widget .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBttk::notebook\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions...\fR? .br \fIpathName \fBadd\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR? \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR \fIindex\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::notebook\fR widget manages a collection of windows and displays a single one at a time. Each slave window is associated with a \fItab\fR, which the user may select to change the currently-displayed window. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-height height Height If present and greater than zero, specifies the desired height of the pane area (not including internal padding or tabs). Otherwise, the maximum height of all panes is used. .OP \-padding padding Padding Specifies the amount of extra space to add around the outside of the notebook. The padding is a list of up to four length specifications \fIleft top right bottom\fR. If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. .OP \-width width Width If present and greater than zero, specifies the desired width of the pane area (not including internal padding). Otherwise, the maximum width of all panes is used. .SH "TAB OPTIONS" The following options may be specified for individual notebook panes: .OP \-state state State Either \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR or \fBhidden\fR. If \fBdisabled\fR, then the tab is not selectable. If \fBhidden\fR, then the tab is not shown. .OP \-sticky sticky Sticky Specifies how the slave window is positioned within the pane area. Value is a string containing zero or more of the characters \fBn, s, e,\fR or \fBw\fR. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the slave window will .QW stick to, as per the \fBgrid\fR geometry manager. .OP \-padding padding Padding Specifies the amount of extra space to add between the notebook and this pane. Syntax is the same as for the widget \fB\-padding\fR option. .OP \-text text Text Specifies a string to be displayed in the tab. .OP \-image image Image Specifies an image to display in the tab. See \fIttk_widget(n)\fR for details. .OP \-compound compound Compound Specifies how to display the image relative to the text, in the case both \fB\-text\fR and \fB\-image\fR are present. See \fIlabel(n)\fR for legal values. .OP \-underline underline Underline Specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline in the text string. The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation if \fBttk::notebook::enableTraversal\fR is called. .SH "TAB IDENTIFIERS" The \fItabid\fR argument to the following commands may take any of the following forms: .IP \(bu An integer between zero and the number of tabs; .IP \(bu The name of a slave window; .IP \(bu A positional specification of the form .QW @\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR , which identifies the tab .IP \(bu The literal string .QW \fBcurrent\fR , which identifies the currently-selected tab; or: .IP \(bu The literal string .QW \fBend\fR , which returns the number of tabs (only valid for .QW "\fIpathname \fBindex\fR" ). .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .TP \fIpathname \fBadd\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR? Adds a new tab to the notebook. See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the list of available \fIoptions\fR. If \fIwindow\fR is currently managed by the notebook but hidden, it is restored to its previous position. .TP \fIpathname \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBforget\fR \fItabid\fR Removes the tab specified by \fItabid\fR, unmaps and unmanages the associated window. .TP \fIpathname \fBhide\fR \fItabid\fR Hides the tab specified by \fItabid\fR. The tab will not be displayed, but the associated window remains managed by the notebook and its configuration remembered. Hidden tabs may be restored with the \fBadd\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify\fR \fIx y\fR Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR. See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBindex\fR \fItabid\fR Returns the numeric index of the tab specified by \fItabid\fR, or the total number of tabs if \fItabid\fR is the string .QW \fBend\fR . .TP \fIpathname \fBinsert\fR \fIpos\fR \fIsubwindow\fR \fIoptions...\fR Inserts a pane at the specified position. \fIpos\fR is either the string \fBend\fR, an integer index, or the name of a managed subwindow. If \fIsubwindow\fR is already managed by the notebook, moves it to the specified position. See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBinstate\fR \fIstatespec \fR?\fIscript...\fR? See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBselect\fR ?\fItabid\fR? Selects the specified tab. The associated slave window will be displayed, and the previously-selected window (if different) is unmapped. If \fItabid\fR is omitted, returns the widget name of the currently selected pane. .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstatespec\fR? See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBtab\fR \fItabid\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue ...\fR Query or modify the options of the specific tab. If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of the tab option values. If one \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that \fIoption\fR. Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs. See \fBTAB OPTIONS\fR for the available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBtabs\fR Returns the list of windows managed by the notebook. .SH "KEYBOARD TRAVERSAL" To enable keyboard traversal for a toplevel window containing a notebook widget \fI$nb\fR, call: .CS ttk::notebook::enableTraversal $nb .CE .PP This will extend the bindings for the toplevel window containing the notebook as follows: .IP \(bu \fBControl-Tab\fR selects the tab following the currently selected one. .IP \(bu \fBShift-Control-Tab\fR selects the tab preceding the currently selected one. .IP \(bu \fBAlt-K\fR, where \fBK\fR is the mnemonic (underlined) character of any tab, will select that tab. .PP Multiple notebooks in a single toplevel may be enabled for traversal, including nested notebooks. However, notebook traversal only works properly if all panes are direct children of the notebook. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" The notebook widget generates a \fB<>\fR virtual event after a new tab is selected. .SH "EXAMPLE" .CS pack [\fBttk::notebook\fR .nb] \.nb add [frame .nb.f1] \-text "First tab" \.nb add [frame .nb.f2] \-text "Second tab" \.nb select .nb.f2 ttk::notebook::enableTraversal .nb .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), grid(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" pane, tab 07070100047192000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c5850000026750000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_panedwindow.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_panedwindow.n,v 1.15.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::panedwindow n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::panedwindow \- Multi-pane container window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBttk::panedwindow\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .br \fIpathName \fBadd\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR? \fIpathName \fBinsert\fR \fIindex\fR \fIwindow\fR ?\fIoptions...\fR? .fi .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::panedwindow\fR widget displays a number of subwindows, stacked either vertically or horizontally. The user may adjust the relative sizes of the subwindows by dragging the sash between panes. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-orient orient Orient Specifies the orientation of the window. If \fBvertical\fR, subpanes are stacked top-to-bottom; if \fBhorizontal\fR, subpanes are stacked left-to-right. .OP \-width width Width If present and greater than zero, specifies the desired width of the widget in pixels. Otherwise, the requested width is determined by the width of the managed windows. .OP \-height height Height If present and greater than zero, specifies the desired height of the widget in pixels. Otherwise, the requested height is determined by the height of the managed windows. .SH "PANE OPTIONS" The following options may be specified for each pane: .OP \-weight weight Weight An integer specifying the relative stretchability of the pane. When the paned window is resized, the extra space is added or subtracted to each pane proportionally to its \fB\-weight\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" Supports the standard \fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBstate\fR, and \fBinstate\fR commands; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details. Additional commands: .TP \fIpathname \fBadd\fR \fIsubwindow\fR \fIoptions...\fR Adds a new pane to the window. \fIsubwindow\fR must be a direct child of the paned window \fIpathname\fR. See \fBPANE OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBforget\fR \fIpane\fR Removes the specified subpane from the widget. \fIpane\fR is either an integer index or the name of a managed subwindow. .TP \fIpathname\fR \fBidentify\fR \fIx y\fR Returns the index of the sash at point \fIx,y\fR, or the empty string if \fIx,y\fR is not over a sash. .TP \fIpathname \fBinsert\fR \fIpos\fR \fIsubwindow\fR \fIoptions...\fR Inserts a pane at the specified position. \fIpos\fR is either the string \fBend\fR, an integer index, or the name of a managed subwindow. If \fIsubwindow\fR is already managed by the paned window, moves it to the specified position. See \fBPANE OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBpane\fR \fIpane \-option \fR?\fIvalue \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR Query or modify the options of the specified \fIpane\fR, where \fIpane\fR is either an integer index or the name of a managed subwindow. If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of the pane option values. If one \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that \fIoption\fR. Otherwise, sets the \fI\-option\fRs to the corresponding \fIvalue\fRs. .TP \fIpathname\fR \fBsashpos\fR \fIindex\fR ?\fInewpos\fR? If \fInewpos\fR is specified, sets the position of sash number \fIindex\fR. May adjust the positions of adjacent sashes to ensure that positions are monotonically increasing. Sash positions are further constrained to be between 0 and the total size of the widget. .\" Full story: "total size" is either the -height (resp -width), .\" or the actual window height (resp actual window width), .\" depending on which changed most recently. Returns the new position of sash number \fIindex\fR. .\" Full story: new position may be different than the requested position. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::notebook(n), panedwindow(n) 07070100047151000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00014d190000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/canvas.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1997-1999 Scriptics Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: canvas.n,v 1.34.2.1 2009/07/14 08:40:43 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH canvas n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME canvas \- Create and manipulate canvas widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBcanvas\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-insertbackground \-insertborderwidth \-insertofftime \-insertontime \-insertwidth \-relief \-selectbackground \-selectborderwidth \-selectforeground \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand \-yscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-closeenough closeEnough CloseEnough Specifies a floating-point value indicating how close the mouse cursor must be to an item before it is considered to be .QW inside the item. Defaults to 1.0. .OP \-confine confine Confine Specifies a boolean value that indicates whether or not it should be allowable to set the canvas's view outside the region defined by the \fBscrollRegion\fR argument. Defaults to true, which means that the view will be constrained within the scroll region. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired window height that the canvas widget should request from its geometry manager. The value may be specified in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below. .OP \-scrollregion scrollRegion ScrollRegion Specifies a list with four coordinates describing the left, top, right, and bottom coordinates of a rectangular region. This region is used for scrolling purposes and is considered to be the boundary of the information in the canvas. Each of the coordinates may be specified in any of the forms given in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below. .OP \-state state State Modifies the default state of the canvas where \fIstate\fR may be set to one of: \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, or \fBhidden\fR. Individual canvas objects all have their own state option which may override the default state. Many options can take separate specifications such that the appearance of the item can be different in different situations. The options that start with \fBactive\fR control the appearance when the mouse pointer is over it, while the option starting with \fBdisabled\fR controls the appearance when the state is disabled. Canvas items which are \fBdisabled\fR will not react to canvas bindings. .OP \-width width width Specifies a desired window width that the canvas widget should request from its geometry manager. The value may be specified in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section below. .OP \-xscrollincrement xScrollIncrement ScrollIncrement Specifies an increment for horizontal scrolling, in any of the usual forms permitted for screen distances. If the value of this option is greater than zero, the horizontal view in the window will be constrained so that the canvas x coordinate at the left edge of the window is always an even multiple of \fBxScrollIncrement\fR; furthermore, the units for scrolling (e.g., the change in view when the left and right arrows of a scrollbar are selected) will also be \fBxScrollIncrement\fR. If the value of this option is less than or equal to zero, then horizontal scrolling is unconstrained. .OP \-yscrollincrement yScrollIncrement ScrollIncrement Specifies an increment for vertical scrolling, in any of the usual forms permitted for screen distances. If the value of this option is greater than zero, the vertical view in the window will be constrained so that the canvas y coordinate at the top edge of the window is always an even multiple of \fByScrollIncrement\fR; furthermore, the units for scrolling (e.g., the change in view when the top and bottom arrows of a scrollbar are selected) will also be \fByScrollIncrement\fR. If the value of this option is less than or equal to zero, then vertical scrolling is unconstrained. .BE .SH INTRODUCTION .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a canvas widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the canvas such as its colors and 3-D relief. The \fBcanvas\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP Canvas widgets implement structured graphics. A canvas displays any number of \fIitems\fR, which may be things like rectangles, circles, lines, and text. Items may be manipulated (e.g. moved or re-colored) and commands may be associated with items in much the same way that the \fBbind\fR command allows commands to be bound to widgets. For example, a particular command may be associated with the event so that the command is invoked whenever button 1 is pressed with the mouse cursor over an item. This means that items in a canvas can have behaviors defined by the Tcl scripts bound to them. .SH "DISPLAY LIST" .PP The items in a canvas are ordered for purposes of display, with the first item in the display list being displayed first, followed by the next item in the list, and so on. Items later in the display list obscure those that are earlier in the display list and are sometimes referred to as being .QW "on top" of earlier items. When a new item is created it is placed at the end of the display list, on top of everything else. Widget commands may be used to re-arrange the order of the display list. .PP Window items are an exception to the above rules. The underlying window systems require them always to be drawn on top of other items. In addition, the stacking order of window items is not affected by any of the canvas widget commands; you must use the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR Tk commands instead. .SH "ITEM IDS AND TAGS" .PP Items in a canvas widget may be named in either of two ways: by id or by tag. Each item has a unique identifying number, which is assigned to that item when it is created. The id of an item never changes and id numbers are never re-used within the lifetime of a canvas widget. .PP Each item may also have any number of \fItags\fR associated with it. A tag is just a string of characters, and it may take any form except that of an integer. For example, .QW x123 is OK but .QW 123 is not. The same tag may be associated with many different items. This is commonly done to group items in various interesting ways; for example, all selected items might be given the tag .QW selected . .PP The tag \fBall\fR is implicitly associated with every item in the canvas; it may be used to invoke operations on all the items in the canvas. .PP The tag \fBcurrent\fR is managed automatically by Tk; it applies to the \fIcurrent item\fR, which is the topmost item whose drawn area covers the position of the mouse cursor (different item types interpret this in varying ways; see the individual item type documentation for details). If the mouse is not in the canvas widget or is not over an item, then no item has the \fBcurrent\fR tag. .PP When specifying items in canvas widget commands, if the specifier is an integer then it is assumed to refer to the single item with that id. If the specifier is not an integer, then it is assumed to refer to all of the items in the canvas that have a tag matching the specifier. The symbol \fItagOrId\fR is used below to indicate that an argument specifies either an id that selects a single item or a tag that selects zero or more items. .PP \fItagOrId\fR may contain a logical expressions of tags by using operators: .QW \fB&&\fR , .QW \fB||\fR , .QW \fB^\fR , .QW \fB!\fR , and parenthesized subexpressions. For example: .CS .c find withtag {(a&&!b)||(!a&&b)} .CE or equivalently: .CS .c find withtag {a^b} .CE will find only those items with either .QW a or .QW b tags, but not both. .PP Some widget commands only operate on a single item at a time; if \fItagOrId\fR is specified in a way that names multiple items, then the normal behavior is for the command to use the first (lowest) of these items in the display list that is suitable for the command. Exceptions are noted in the widget command descriptions below. .SH "COORDINATES" .PP All coordinates related to canvases are stored as floating-point numbers. Coordinates and distances are specified in screen units, which are floating-point numbers optionally followed by one of several letters. If no letter is supplied then the distance is in pixels. If the letter is \fBm\fR then the distance is in millimeters on the screen; if it is \fBc\fR then the distance is in centimeters; \fBi\fR means inches, and \fBp\fR means printers points (1/72 inch). Larger y-coordinates refer to points lower on the screen; larger x-coordinates refer to points farther to the right. Coordinates can be specified either as an even number of parameters, or as a single list parameter containing an even number of x and y coordinate values. .SS TRANSFORMATIONS .PP Normally the origin of the canvas coordinate system is at the upper-left corner of the window containing the canvas. It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR widget commands; this is typically used for scrolling. Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate system relative to the window coordinate system. .PP Individual items may be moved or scaled using widget commands described below, but they may not be rotated. .PP Note that the default origin of the canvas's visible area is coincident with the origin for the whole window as that makes bindings using the mouse position easier to work with; you only need to use the \fBcanvasx\fR and \fBcanvasy\fR widget commands if you adjust the origin of the visible area. However, this also means that any focus ring (as controlled by the \fB\-highlightthickness\fR option) and window border (as controlled by the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option) must be taken into account before you get to the visible area of the canvas. .SH "INDICES" .PP Text items support the notion of an \fIindex\fR for identifying particular positions within the item. In a similar fashion, line and polygon items support \fIindex\fR for identifying, inserting and deleting subsets of their coordinates. Indices are used for commands such as inserting or deleting a range of characters or coordinates, and setting the insertion cursor position. An index may be specified in any of a number of ways, and different types of items may support different forms for specifying indices. Text items support the following forms for an index; if you define new types of text-like items, it would be advisable to support as many of these forms as practical. Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after the last one in the text item; this is necessary for such tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item. Lines and Polygons do not support the insertion cursor and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even always, because coordinates always appear in pairs. .TP 10 \fInumber\fR A decimal number giving the position of the desired character within the text item. 0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be automatically decremented by one. A number less than 0 is treated as if it were zero, and a number greater than the length of the text item is treated as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For polygons, numbers less than 0 or greater then the length of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or subtracting the length until the result is between zero and the length, inclusive. .TP 10 \fBend\fR Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates in the item). .TP 10 \fBinsert\fR Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons. .TP 10 \fBsel.first\fR Refers to the first selected character in the item. If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal. .TP 10 \fBsel.last\fR Refers to the last selected character in the item. If the selection is not in this item then this form is illegal. .TP 10 \fB@\fIx,y\fR Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, where \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are specified in the coordinate system of the canvas. If \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR lie outside the coordinates covered by the text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the line that is closest to the given point. .SH "DASH PATTERNS" .PP Many items support the notion of a dash pattern for outlines. .PP The first possible syntax is a list of integers. Each element represents the number of pixels of a line segment. Only the odd segments are drawn using the .QW outline color. The other segments are drawn transparent. .PP The second possible syntax is a character list containing only 5 possible characters .QW "\fB.,\-_ \fR" . The space can be used to enlarge the space between other line elements, and cannot occur as the first position in the string. Some examples: .CS \-dash . \(-> \-dash {2 4} \-dash \- \(-> \-dash {6 4} \-dash \-. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4} \-dash \-.. \(-> \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4} \-dash {. } \(-> \-dash {2 8} \-dash , \(-> \-dash {4 4} .CE .PP The main difference of this syntax with the previous is that it is shape-conserving. This means that all values in the dash list will be multiplied by the line width before display. This assures that .QW . will always be displayed as a dot and .QW \- always as a dash regardless of the line width. .PP On systems which support only a limited set of dash patterns, the dash pattern will be displayed as the closest dash pattern that is available. For example, on Windows only the first 4 of the above examples are available. The last 2 examples will be displayed identically to the first one. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBcanvas\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following widget commands are possible for canvas widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBaddtag \fItag searchSpec \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? For each item that meets the constraints specified by \fIsearchSpec\fR and the \fIarg\fRs, add \fItag\fR to the list of tags associated with the item if it is not already present on that list. It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints given by \fIsearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fRs, in which case the command has no effect. This command returns an empty string as result. \fISearchSpec\fR and \fIarg\fR's may take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fBabove \fItagOrId\fR Selects the item just after (above) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used. .TP \fBall\fR Selects all the items in the canvas. .TP \fBbelow \fItagOrId\fR Selects the item just before (below) the one given by \fItagOrId\fR in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used. .TP \fBclosest \fIx y \fR?\fIhalo\fR? ?\fIstart\fR? Selects the item closest to the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the last one in the display list) is used. If \fIhalo\fR is specified, then it must be a non-negative value. Any item closer than \fIhalo\fR to the point is considered to overlap it. The \fIstart\fR argument may be used to step circularly through all the closest items. If \fIstart\fR is specified, it names an item using a tag or id (if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with the given tag). Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will select the topmost closest item that is below \fIstart\fR in the display list; if no such item exists, then the selection behaves as if the \fIstart\fR argument had not been specified. .TP \fBenclosed\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR. \fIX1\fR must be no greater then \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be no greater than \fIy2\fR. .TP \fBoverlapping\fR \fIx1\fR \fIy1\fR \fIx2\fR \fIy2\fR Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the rectangular region given by \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR. \fIX1\fR must be no greater then \fIx2\fR and \fIy1\fR must be no greater than \fIy2\fR. .TP \fBwithtag \fItagOrId\fR Selects all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fItagOrId\fR ?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR? Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box for all the items named by the \fItagOrId\fR arguments. The list has the form .QW "\fIx1 y1 x2 y2\fR" such that the drawn areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by \fIx1\fR on the left, \fIx2\fR on the right, \fIy1\fR on the top, and \fIy2\fR on the bottom. The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by a few pixels. If no items match any of the \fItagOrId\fR arguments or if the matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing to display) then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBbind \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIcommand\fR? This command associates \fIcommand\fR with all the items given by \fItagOrId\fR such that whenever the event sequence given by \fIsequence\fR occurs for one of the items the command will be invoked. This widget command is similar to the \fBbind\fR command except that it operates on items in a canvas rather than entire widgets. See the \fBbind\fR manual entry for complete details on the syntax of \fIsequence\fR and the substitutions performed on \fIcommand\fR before invoking it. If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing any existing binding for the same \fIsequence\fR and \fItagOrId\fR (if the first character of \fIcommand\fR is .QW + then \fIcommand\fR augments an existing binding rather than replacing it). In this case the return value is an empty string. If \fIcommand\fR is omitted then the command returns the \fIcommand\fR associated with \fItagOrId\fR and \fIsequence\fR (an error occurs if there is no such binding). If both \fIcommand\fR and \fIsequence\fR are omitted then the command returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been defined for \fItagOrId\fR. .RS .PP The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to the mouse and keyboard (such as \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBMotion\fR, and \fBKeyPress\fR) or virtual events. The handling of events in canvases uses the current item defined in \fBITEM IDS AND TAGS\fR above. \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events trigger for an item when it becomes the current item or ceases to be the current item; note that these events are different than \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events for windows. Mouse-related events are directed to the current item, if any. Keyboard-related events are directed to the focus item, if any (see the \fBfocus\fR widget command below for more on this). If a virtual event is used in a binding, that binding can trigger only if the virtual event is defined by an underlying mouse-related or keyboard-related event. .PP It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event. This could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the item's id and another is associated with one of the item's tags. When this occurs, all of the matching bindings are invoked. A binding associated with the \fBall\fR tag is invoked first, followed by one binding for each of the item's tags (in order), followed by a binding associated with the item's id. If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, then only the most specific binding is invoked. A \fBcontinue\fR command in a binding script terminates that script, and a \fBbreak\fR command terminates that script and skips any remaining scripts for the event, just as for the \fBbind\fR command. .PP If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the \fBbind\fR command, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for the canvas's items using the \fBbind\fR widget command. The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings for the window as a whole. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBcanvasx \fIscreenx\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR? Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreenx\fR, this command returns the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location. If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units. .TP \fIpathName \fBcanvasy \fIscreeny\fR ?\fIgridspacing\fR? Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas \fIscreeny\fR this command returns the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location. If \fIgridspacing\fR is specified, then the canvas coordinate is rounded to the nearest multiple of \fIgridspacing\fR units. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcanvas\fR command. .TP \fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIx0 y0 ...\fR? .TP \fIpathName\fR \fBcoords \fItagOrId \fR?\fIcoordList\fR? Query or modify the coordinates that define an item. If no coordinates are specified, this command returns a list whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by \fItagOrId\fR. If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current coordinates for the named item. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the first one in the display list is used. .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype x y \fR?\fIx y ...\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? .TP \fIpathName \fBcreate \fItype coordList \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? Create a new item in \fIpathName\fR of type \fItype\fR. The exact format of the arguments after \fBtype\fR depends on \fBtype\fR, but usually they consist of the coordinates for one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or more item options. See the subsections on individual item types below for more on the syntax of this command. This command returns the id for the new item. .TP \fIpathName \fBdchars \fItagOrId first \fR?\fIlast\fR? For each item given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the characters, or coordinates, in the range given by \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive. If some of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support indexing operations then they ignore dchars. Text items interpret \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR as indices to a character, line and polygon items interpret them indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair). Indices are described in \fBINDICES\fR above. If \fIlast\fR is omitted, it defaults to \fIfirst\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fR?\fItagOrId tagOrId ...\fR? Delete each of the items given by each \fItagOrId\fR, and return an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBdtag \fItagOrId \fR?\fItagToDelete\fR? For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, delete the tag given by \fItagToDelete\fR from the list of those associated with the item. If an item does not have the tag \fItagToDelete\fR then the item is unaffected by the command. If \fItagToDelete\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fItagOrId\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBfind \fIsearchCommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? This command returns a list consisting of all the items that meet the constraints specified by \fIsearchCommand\fR and \fIarg\fR's. \fISearchCommand\fR and \fIargs\fR have any of the forms accepted by the \fBaddtag\fR command. The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first. .TP \fIpathName \fBfocus \fR?\fItagOrId\fR? Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by \fItagOrId\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to several items, then the focus is set to the first such item in the display list that supports the insertion cursor. If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if none of them support the insertion cursor, then the focus is not changed. If \fItagOrId\fR is an empty string, then the focus item is reset so that no item has the focus. If \fItagOrId\fR is not specified then the command returns the id for the item that currently has the focus, or an empty string if no item has the focus. .RS .PP Once the focus has been set to an item, the item will display the insertion cursor and all keyboard events will be directed to that item. The focus item within a canvas and the focus window on the screen (set with the \fBfocus\fR command) are totally independent: a given item does not actually have the input focus unless (a) its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item within the canvas. In most cases it is advisable to follow the \fBfocus\fR widget command with the \fBfocus\fR command to set the focus window to the canvas (if it was not there already). .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBgettags\fR \fItagOrId\fR Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the item given by \fItagOrId\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the tags are returned from the first such item in the display list. If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items, or if the item contains no tags, then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fItagOrId index\fR Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by \fItagOrId\fR to just before the character whose position is given by \fIindex\fR. If some or all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR do not support an insertion cursor then this command has no effect on them. See \fBINDICES\fR above for a description of the legal forms for \fIindex\fR. Note: the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the widget command \fBfocus\fR, below), but the cursor position may be set even when the item does not have the focus. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fItagOrId index\fR This command returns a decimal string giving the numerical index within \fItagOrId\fR corresponding to \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of the desired position as described in \fBINDICES\fR above. Text items interpret \fIindex\fR as an index to a character, line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair). The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to multiple items, then the index is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing operations (in display list order). .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fItagOrId beforeThis string\fR For each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR, if the item supports text or coordinate, insertion then \fIstring\fR is inserted into the item's text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is \fIbeforeThis\fR. Text items interpret \fIbeforeThis\fR as an index to a character, line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair). For lines and polygons the \fIstring\fR must be a valid coordinate sequence. See \fBINDICES\fR above for information about the forms allowed for \fIbeforeThis\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemcget\fR \fItagOrId\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option for the item given by \fItagOrId\fR whose name is \fIoption\fR. This command is similar to the \fBcget\fR widget command except that it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item was created. If \fItagOrId\fR is a tag that refers to more than one item, the first (lowest) such item is used. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fItagOrId\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? This command is similar to the \fBconfigure\fR widget command except that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by \fItagOrId\fR instead of modifying options for the overall canvas widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for the first item given by \fItagOrId\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR; in this case the command returns an empty string. The \fIoption\fRs and \fIvalue\fRs are the same as those permissible in the \fBcreate\fR widget command when the item(s) were created; see the sections describing individual item types below for details on the legal options. .TP \fIpathName \fBlower \fItagOrId \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR? Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position in the display list just before the item given by \fIbelowThis\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed. \fIBelowThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used as the destination location for the moved items. Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands, not the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR widget commands for canvases. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBmove \fItagOrId xAmount yAmount\fR Move each of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in the canvas coordinate space by adding \fIxAmount\fR to the x-coordinate of each point associated with the item and \fIyAmount\fR to the y-coordinate of each point associated with the item. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBpostscript \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas. If the \fB\-file\fR option is specified then the Postscript is written to a file and an empty string is returned; otherwise the Postscript is returned as the result of the command. If the interpreter that owns the canvas is marked as safe, the operation will fail because safe interpreters are not allowed to write files. If the \fB\-channel\fR option is specified, the argument denotes the name of a channel already opened for writing. The Postscript is written to that channel, and the channel is left open for further writing at the end of the operation. The Postscript is created in Encapsulated Postscript form using version 3.0 of the Document Structuring Conventions. Note: by default Postscript is only generated for information that appears in the canvas's window on the screen. If the canvas is freshly created it may still have its initial size of 1x1 pixel so nothing will appear in the Postscript. To get around this problem either invoke the \fBupdate\fR command to wait for the canvas window to reach its final size, or else use the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR options to specify the area of the canvas to print. The \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR argument pairs provide additional information to control the generation of Postscript. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-colormap \fIvarName\fR \fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript. Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of Postscript code to set a particular color value (e.g. .QW "\fB1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor\fR" ). When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks to see if there is an element of \fIvarName\fR with the same name as the color. If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript command to set the color. If this option has not been specified, or if there is no entry in \fIvarName\fR for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green, and blue intensities from the X color. .TP \fB\-colormode \fImode\fR Specifies how to output color information. \fIMode\fR must be either \fBcolor\fR (for full color output), \fBgray\fR (convert all colors to their gray-scale equivalents) or \fBmono\fR (convert all colors to black or white). .TP \fB\-file \fIfileName\fR Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript. If this option is not specified then the Postscript is returned as the result of the command instead of being written to a file. .TP \fB\-fontmap \fIvarName\fR \fIVarName\fR must be the name of an array variable that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript. Each element of \fIvarName\fR must consist of a Tcl list with two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font. When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk checks to see if \fIvarName\fR contains an element with the same name as the font. If there is such an element, then the font information contained in that element is used in the Postscript. Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use. Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not omit any dashes up through the point size. For example, \fB\-*\-Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal\-\-*\-120\-*\fR will work but \fB*Courier\-Bold\-R\-Normal*120*\fR will not; Tk needs the dashes to parse the font name). .TP \fB\-height \fIsize\fR Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print. Defaults to the height of the canvas window. .TP \fB\-pageanchor \fIanchor\fR Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over the positioning point on the page (which is given by the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pagey\fR options). For example, \fB\-pageanchor n\fR means that the top center of the area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window) should be over the positioning point. Defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-pageheight \fIsize\fR Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so that the printed area is \fIsize\fR high on the Postscript page. \fISize\fR consists of a floating-point number followed by \fBc\fR for centimeters, \fBi\fR for inches, \fBm\fR for millimeters, or \fBp\fR or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch). Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen. If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling is not implemented). .TP \fB\-pagewidth \fIsize\fR Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so that the printed area is \fIsize\fR wide on the Postscript page. \fISize\fR has the same form as for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen. If both \fB\-pageheight\fR and \fB\-pagewidth\fR are specified then the scale factor from \fB\-pagewidth\fR is used (non-uniform scaling is not implemented). .TP \fB\-pagex \fIposition\fR \fIPosition\fR gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagey\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page. Defaults to the center of the page. .TP \fB\-pagey \fIposition\fR \fIPosition\fR gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for \fB\-pageheight\fR. Used in conjunction with the \fB\-pagex\fR and \fB\-pageanchor\fR options to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page. Defaults to the center of the page. .TP \fB\-rotate \fIboolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90 degrees. In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along the short dimension of the page .PQ portrait orientation ; in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the page .PQ landscape orientation . Defaults to non-rotated. .TP \fB\-width \fIsize\fR Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print. Defaults to the width of the canvas window. .TP \fB\-x \fIposition\fR Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window coordinates. Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window. .TP \fB\-y \fIposition\fR Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window coordinates. Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBraise \fItagOrId \fR?\fIaboveThis\fR? Move all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR to a new position in the display list just after the item given by \fIaboveThis\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item then all are moved but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed. \fIAboveThis\fR is a tag or id; if it refers to more than one item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used as the destination location for the moved items. Note: this command has no effect on window items. Window items always obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is determined by the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR commands, not the \fBraise\fR and \fBlower\fR widget commands for canvases. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscale \fItagOrId xOrigin yOrigin xScale yScale\fR Rescale all of the items given by \fItagOrId\fR in canvas coordinate space. \fIXOrigin\fR and \fIyOrigin\fR identify the origin for the scaling operation and \fIxScale\fR and \fIyScale\fR identify the scale factors for x- and y-coordinates, respectively (a scale factor of 1.0 implies no change to that coordinate). For each of the points defining each item, the x-coordinate is adjusted to change the distance from \fIxOrigin\fR by a factor of \fIxScale\fR. Similarly, each y-coordinate is adjusted to change the distance from \fIyOrigin\fR by a factor of \fIyScale\fR. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR This command is used to implement scanning on canvases. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR and the canvas's current view; used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget and \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the coordinates of the mouse. It returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx y ?gain?\fR. This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments (which are typically mouse coordinates) and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by \fIgain\fR times the difference in coordinates, where \fIgain\fR defaults to 10. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the canvas at high speed through its window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBselect \fIoption\fR ?\fItagOrId arg\fR? Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on \fIoption\fR. The command may take any of the forms described below. In all of the descriptions below, \fItagOrId\fR must refer to an item that supports indexing and selection; if it refers to multiple items then the first of these that supports indexing and the selection is used. \fIIndex\fR gives a textual description of a position within \fItagOrId\fR, as described in \fBINDICES\fR above. .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselect adjust \fItagOrId index\fR Locate the end of the selection in \fItagOrId\fR nearest to the character given by \fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR (i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR). The other end of the selection is made the anchor point for future \fBselect to\fR commands. If the selection is not currently in \fItagOrId\fR then this command behaves the same as the \fBselect to\fR widget command. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect clear\fR Clear the selection if it is in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect from \fItagOrId index\fR Set the selection anchor point for the widget to be just before the character given by \fIindex\fR in the item given by \fItagOrId\fR. This command does not change the selection; it just sets the fixed end of the selection for future \fBselect to\fR commands. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect item\fR Returns the id of the selected item, if the selection is in an item in this canvas. If the selection is not in this canvas then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect to \fItagOrId index\fR Set the selection to consist of those characters of \fItagOrId\fR between the selection anchor point and \fIindex\fR. The new selection will include the character given by \fIindex\fR; it will include the character given by the anchor point only if \fIindex\fR is greater than or equal to the anchor point. The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect adjust\fR or \fBselect from\fR command for this widget. If the selection anchor point for the widget is not currently in \fItagOrId\fR, then it is set to the same character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtype\fI tagOrId\fR Returns the type of the item given by \fItagOrId\fR, such as \fBrectangle\fR or \fBtext\fR. If \fItagOrId\fR refers to more than one item, then the type of the first item in the display list is returned. If \fItagOrId\fR does not refer to any items at all then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fR?\fIargs\fR? This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the canvas's area (as defined by the \fB\-scrollregion\fR option) is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the canvas is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right in units of the \fBxScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise. If \fIwhat is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width. If \fInumber\fR is negative then information farther to the left becomes visible; if it is positive then information farther to the right becomes visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fI?args\fR? This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the information displayed in the canvas's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fByview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the vertical span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .6 and the second element is 1.0, the lowest 40% of the canvas's area (as defined by the \fB\-scrollregion\fR option) is visible in the window. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the canvas's area is off-screen to the top. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down in units of the \fByScrollIncrement\fR option, if it is greater than zero, or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height. If \fInumber\fR is negative then higher information becomes visible; if it is positive then lower information becomes visible. .RE .SH "OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES" .PP The sections below describe the various types of items supported by canvas widgets. Each item type is characterized by two things: first, the form of the \fBcreate\fR command used to create instances of the type; and second, a set of configuration options for items of that type, which may be used in the \fBcreate\fR and \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands. Most items do not support indexing or selection or the commands related to them, such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR. Where items do support these facilities, it is noted explicitly in the descriptions below. At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support. For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate the coordinates of the item. .SS "COMMON ITEM OPTIONS" .PP Many items share a common set of options. These options are explained here, and then referred to be each widget type for brevity. .PP .TP \fB\-dash \fIpattern\fR .TP \fB\-activedash \fIpattern\fR .TP \fB\-disableddash \fIpattern\fR This option specifies dash patterns for the normal, active state, and disabled state of an item. \fIpattern\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetDash\fR. If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline. See \fBDASH PATTERNS\fR for more information. .TP \fB\-dashoffset \fIoffset\fR The starting \fIoffset\fR in pixels into the pattern provided by the \fB\-dash\fR option. \fB\-dashoffset\fR is ignored if there is no \fB\-dash\fR pattern. The \fIoffset\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. .TP \fB\-fill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activefill \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledfill \fIcolor\fR Specifies the color to be used to fill item's area. in its normal, active, and disabled states, \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If \fIcolor\fR is an empty string (the default), then the item will not be filled. For the line item, it specifies the color of the line drawn. For the text item, it specifies the foreground color of the text. .TP \fB\-outline \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activeoutline \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-disabledoutline \fIcolor\fR This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. This option defaults to \fBblack\fR. If \fIcolor\fR is specified as an empty string then no outline is drawn for the item. .TP \fB\-offset \fIoffset\fR Specifies the offset of stipples. The offset value can be of the form \fBx,y\fR or \fBside\fR, where side can be \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. In the first case the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window. For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas origin, but putting \fB#\fR in front of the coordinate pair indicates using the toplevel origin instead. For canvas objects, the \fB\-offset\fR option is used for stippling as well. For the line and polygon canvas items you can also specify an index as argument, which connects the stipple origin to one of the coordinate points of the line/polygon. .TP \fB\-outlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activeoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledoutlinestipple \fIbitmap\fR This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the outline of the item in its normal, active and disabled states. Indicates that the outline for the item should be drawn with a stipple pattern; \fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If the \fB\-outline\fR option has not been specified then this option has no effect. If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn in a solid fashion. \fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not use X11 as their drawing API.\fR .TP \fB\-outlineoffset \fIoffset\fR . Specifies the offset of the stipple pattern used for outlines. The offset value can be of the form .QW \fIx\fB,\fIy\fR or the description of a side (one of \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR). This option only has an effect when the outline is drawn as a stipple pattern, and is only supported under X11. .\" TODO: What does this actually do? What do the acceptable forms mean?! .TP \fB\-stipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activestipple \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledstipple \fIbitmap\fR This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIbitmap\fR specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If the \fB\-fill\fR option has not been specified then this option has no effect. If \fIbitmap\fR is an empty string (the default), then filling is done in a solid fashion. For the text item, it affects the actual text. \fINote that stipples are not well supported on platforms that do not use X11 as their drawing API.\fR .TP \fB\-state \fIstate\fR This allows an item to override the canvas widget's global \fIstate\fR option. It takes the same values: \fInormal\fR, \fIdisabled\fR or \fIhidden\fR. .TP \fB\-tags \fItagList\fR Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item. \fITagList\fR consists of a list of tag names, which replace any existing tags for the item. \fITagList\fR may be an empty list. .TP \fB\-width \fIoutlineWidth\fR .TP \fB\-activewidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR .TP \fB\-disabledwidth \fIoutlineWidth\fR Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around the item's region, in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIoutlineWidth\fR may be in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If the \fB\-outline\fR option has been specified as an empty string then this option has no effect. This option defaults to 1.0. For arcs, wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region. .SH "ARC ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBarc\fR appear on the display as arc-shaped regions. An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified by the \fB\-start\fR and \fB\-extent\fR options) and displayed in one of several ways (specified by the \fB\-style\fR option). Arcs are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate arc \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. An arc item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty. .PP The following standard options are supported by arcs: .CS \-dash \-activedash \-disableddash \-dashoffset \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-offset \-outline \-activeoutline \-disabledoutline \-outlineoffset \-outlinestipple \-activeoutlinestipple \-disabledoutlinestipple \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags \-width \-activewidth \-disabledwidth .CE The following extra options are supported for arcs: .TP \fB\-extent \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc. The arc's range extends for \fIdegrees\fR degrees counter-clockwise from the starting angle given by the \fB\-start\fR option. \fIDegrees\fR may be negative. If it is greater than 360 or less than \-360, then \fIdegrees\fR modulo 360 is used as the extent. .TP \fB\-start \fIdegrees\fR Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the arc. \fIDegrees\fR is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise from the 3-o'clock position; it may be either positive or negative. .TP \fB\-style \fItype\fR Specifies how to draw the arc. If \fItype\fR is \fBpieslice\fR (the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center of the oval and each end of the perimeter section. If \fItype\fR is \fBchord\fR then the arc's region is defined by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment connecting the two end points of the perimeter section. If \fItype\fR is \fBarc\fR then the arc's region consists of a section of the perimeter alone. In this last case the \fB\-fill\fR option is ignored. .SH "BITMAP ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBbitmap\fR appear on the display as images with two colors, foreground and background. Bitmaps are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate bitmap \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate bitmap \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two elements) specify the coordinates of a point used to position the bitmap on the display (see the \fB\-anchor\fR option below for more information on how bitmaps are displayed). After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. A bitmap item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part of its bounding box. .PP The following standard options are supported by bitmaps: .CS \-state \-tags .CE The following extra options are supported for bitmaps: .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR \fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the bitmap relative to the positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBcenter\fR then the bitmap is centered on the point; if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the bitmap will be drawn so that its top center point is at the positioning point. This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activebackground \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledbackground \fIbitmap\fR Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's .QW 0 valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0; this produces a transparent effect. .TP \fB\-bitmap \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-activebitmap \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledbitmap \fIbitmap\fR Specifies the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIBitmap\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR .TP \fB\-activeforeground \fIbitmap\fR .TP \fB\-disabledforeground \fIbitmap\fR Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's .QW 1 valued pixels in its normal, active and disabled states. \fIColor\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR and defaults to \fBblack\fR. .SH "IMAGE ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBimage\fR are used to display images on a canvas. Images are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate image \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate image \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates of a point used to position the image on the display (see the \fB\-anchor\fR option below for more information). After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. An image item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part of its bounding box. .PP The following standard options are supported by images: .CS \-state \-tags .CE The following extra options are supported for images: .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR \fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the image relative to the positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBcenter\fR then the image is centered on the point; if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the image will be drawn so that its top center point is at the positioning point. This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-image \fIname\fR .TP \fB\-activeimage \fIname\fR .TP \fB\-disabledimage \fIname\fR Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal, active and disabled states. This image must have been created previously with the \fBimage create\fR command. .SH "LINE ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBline\fR appear on the display as one or more connected line segments or curves. Line items support coordinate indexing operations using the canvas widget commands: \fBdchars, index, insert.\fR Lines are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate line \fIx1 y1... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate line \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates for a series of two or more points that describe a series of connected line segments. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. A line item is the current item whenever the mouse pointer is over any segment of the line, whether drawn or not and whether or not the line is smoothed. .PP The following standard options are supported by lines: .CS \-dash \-activedash \-disableddash \-dashoffset \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags \-width \-activewidth \-disabledwidth .CE The following extra options are supported for lines: .TP \fB\-arrow \fIwhere\fR Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both ends of the line. \fIWhere\fR must have one of the values \fBnone\fR (for no arrowheads), \fBfirst\fR (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line), \fBlast\fR (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or \fBboth\fR (for arrowheads at both ends). This option defaults to \fBnone\fR. .TP \fB\-arrowshape \fIshape\fR This option indicates how to draw arrowheads. The \fIshape\fR argument must be a list with three elements, each specifying a distance in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. The first element of the list gives the distance along the line from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip. The second element gives the distance along the line from the trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the trailing points. If this option is not specified then Tk picks a .QW reasonable shape. .TP \fB\-capstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints of the line. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR (\fBbutt\fR, \fBprojecting\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBbutt\fR. Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored. .TP \fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices of the line. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR (\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR. If the line only contains two points then this option is irrelevant. .TP \fB\-smooth \fIsmoothMethod\fR \fIsmoothMethod\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR or a line smoothing method. .VS 8.5 Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing. If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the line should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the line should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be generated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is a control point and not a knot point, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes a knot point. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR. .SH "OVAL ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBoval\fR appear as circular or oval regions on the display. Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or both. Ovals are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate oval \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate oval \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a rectangular region enclosing the oval. The oval will include the top and left edges of the rectangle not the lower or right edges. If the region is square then the resulting oval is circular; otherwise it is elongated in shape. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. An oval item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty. .PP The following standard options are supported by ovals: .CS \-dash \-activedash \-disableddash \-dashoffset \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-offset \-outline \-activeoutline \-disabledoutline \-outlineoffset \-outlinestipple \-activeoutlinestipple \-disabledoutlinestipple \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags \-width \-activewidth \-disabledwidth .CE .SH "POLYGON ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBpolygon\fR appear as polygonal or curved filled regions on the display. Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the canvas widget commands: \fBdchars, index, insert.\fR Polygons are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIx1 y1 ... xn yn \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate polygon \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR through \fIyn\fR or \fIcoordList\fR specify the coordinates for three or more points that define a polygon. The first point should not be repeated as the last to close the shape; Tk will automatically close the periphery between the first and last points. After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. A polygon item is the current item whenever the mouse pointer is over any part of the polygon, whether drawn or not and whether or not the outline is smoothed. .PP The following standard options are supported by polygons: .CS \-dash \-activedash \-disableddash \-dashoffset \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-offset \-outline \-activeoutline \-disabledoutline \-outlinestipple \-activeoutlinestipple \-disabledoutlinestipple \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags \-width \-activewidth \-disabledwidth .CE The following extra options are supported for polygons: .TP \fB\-joinstyle \fIstyle\fR Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices of the outline. \fIStyle\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR (\fBbevel\fR, \fBmiter\fR, or \fBround\fR). If this option is not specified then it defaults to \fBround\fR. .TP \fB\-smooth \fIboolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR must have one of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR .VS 8.5 or a line smoothing method. Only \fBtrue\fR and \fBraw\fR are supported in the core (with \fBbezier\fR being an alias for \fBtrue\fR), but more can be added at runtime. If a boolean false value or empty string is given, no smoothing is applied. A boolean truth value assumes \fBtrue\fR smoothing. If the smoothing method is \fBtrue\fR, this indicates that the polygon should be drawn as a curve, rendered as a set of quadratic splines: one spline is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second and third, and so on. Straight-line segments can be generated within a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment. If the smoothing method is \fBraw\fR, this indicates that the polygon should also be drawn as a curve but where the list of coordinates is such that the first coordinate pair (and every third coordinate pair thereafter) is a knot point on a cubic Bezier curve, and the other coordinates are control points on the cubic Bezier curve. Straight line segments can be venerated within a curve by making control points equal to their neighbouring knot points. If the last point is not the second point of a pair of control points, the point is repeated (one or two times) so that it also becomes the second point of a pair of control points (the associated knot point will be the first control point). .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-splinesteps \fInumber\fR Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves: each spline will be approximated with \fInumber\fR line segments. This option is ignored unless the \fB\-smooth\fR option is true or \fBraw\fR. .PP Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals and arcs in that interior points are considered to be .QW inside a polygon (e.g. for purposes of the \fBfind closest\fR and \fBfind overlapping\fR widget commands) even if it is not filled. For most other item types, an interior point is considered to be inside the item only if the item is filled or if it has neither a fill nor an outline. If you would like an unfilled polygon whose interior points are not considered to be inside the polygon, use a line item instead. .SH "RECTANGLE ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBrectangle\fR appear as rectangular regions on the display. Each rectangle may have an outline, a fill, or both. Rectangles are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate rectangle \fIx1 y1 x2 y2 \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate rectangle \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have four elements) give the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle (the rectangle will include its upper and left edges but not its lower or right edges). After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. A rectangle item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part that is painted or (when fully transparent) that would be painted if both the \fB\-fill\fR and \fB\-outline\fR options were non-empty. .PP The following standard options are supported by rectangles: .CS \-dash \-activedash \-disableddash \-dashoffset \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-offset \-outline \-activeoutline \-disabledoutline \-outlineoffset \-outlinestipple \-activeoutlinestipple \-disabledoutlinestipple \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags \-width \-activewidth \-disabledwidth .CE .SH "TEXT ITEMS" .PP A text item displays a string of characters on the screen in one or more lines. Text items support indexing and selection, along with the following text-related canvas widget commands: \fBdchars\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBicursor\fR, \fBindex\fR, \fBinsert\fR, \fBselect\fR. Text items are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate text \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate text \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two elements) specify the coordinates of a point used to position the text on the display (see the options below for more information on how text is displayed). After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. A text item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part of its bounding box. .PP The following standard options are supported by text items: .CS \-fill \-activefill \-disabledfill \-stipple \-activestipple \-disabledstipple \-state \-tags .CE The following extra options are supported for text items: .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR \fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the text relative to the positioning point for the text; it may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBcenter\fR then the text is centered on the point; if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the text will be drawn such that the top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the text will be at the positioning point. This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR Specifies the font to use for the text item. \fIFontName\fR may be any string acceptable to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. If this option is not specified, it defaults to a system-dependent font. .TP \fB\-justify \fIhow\fR Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region. \fIHow\fR must be one of the values \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple lines. If the option is omitted, it defaults to \fBleft\fR. .TP \fB\-text \fIstring\fR \fIString\fR specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item. Newline characters cause line breaks. The characters in the item may also be changed with the \fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR widget commands. This option defaults to an empty string. .VS 8.5 .TP \fB\-underline \fI\fR Specifies the integer index of a character within the text to be underlined. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed, 1 to the next character, and so on. \-1 means that no underline should be drawn (if the whole text item is to be underlined, the appropriate font should be used instead). .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-width \fIlineLength\fR Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into lines only at newline characters. However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would be longer than \fIlineLength\fR is broken just before a space character to make the line shorter than \fIlineLength\fR; the space character is treated as if it were a newline character. .SH "WINDOW ITEMS" .PP Items of type \fBwindow\fR cause a particular window to be displayed at a given position on the canvas. Window items are created with widget commands of the following form: .CS \fIpathName \fBcreate window \fIx y \fR?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? \fIpathName \fBcreate window \fIcoordList\fR ?\fIoption value option value ...\fR? .CE The arguments \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR or \fIcoordList\fR (which must have two elements) specify the coordinates of a point used to position the window on the display (see the \fB\-anchor\fR option below for more information on how bitmaps are displayed). After the coordinates there may be any number of \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options for the item. These same \fIoption\fR\-\fIvalue\fR pairs may be used in \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands to change the item's configuration. Theoretically, a window item becomes the current item when the mouse pointer is over any part of its bounding box, but in practice this typically does not happen because the mouse pointer ceases to be over the canvas at that point. .PP The following standard options are supported by window items: .CS \-state \-tags .CE The following extra options are supported for window items: .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchorPos\fR . \fIAnchorPos\fR tells how to position the window relative to the positioning point for the item; it may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. For example, if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBcenter\fR then the window is centered on the point; if \fIanchorPos\fR is \fBn\fR then the window will be drawn so that its top center point is at the positioning point. This option defaults to \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-height \fIpixels\fR . Specifies the height to assign to the item's window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero, then the window is given whatever height it requests internally. .TP \fB\-width \fIpixels\fR . Specifies the width to assign to the item's window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the forms described in the \fBCOORDINATES\fR section above. If this option is not specified, or if it is specified as zero, then the window is given whatever width it requests internally. .TP \fB\-window \fIpathName\fR . Specifies the window to associate with this item. The window specified by \fIpathName\fR must either be a child of the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget. \fIPathName\fR may not refer to a top-level window. .PP Note: due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top of window items. A window item always obscures any graphics that overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list. Also note that window items, unlike other canvas items, are not clipped for display by their containing canvas's border, and are instead clipped by the parent widget of the window specified by the \fB\-window\fR option; when the parent widget is the canvas, this means that the window item can overlap the canvas's border. .SH "APPLICATION-DEFINED ITEM TYPES" .PP It is possible for individual applications to define new item types for canvas widgets using C code. See the documentation for \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR. .SH BINDINGS .PP In the current implementation, new canvases are not given any default behavior: you will have to execute explicit Tcl commands to give the canvas its behavior. .SH CREDITS .PP Tk's canvas widget is a blatant ripoff of ideas from Joel Bartlett's \fIezd\fR program. \fIEzd\fR provides structured graphics in a Scheme environment and preceded canvases by a year or two. Its simple mechanisms for placing and animating graphical objects inspired the functions of canvases. .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), font(n), image(n), scrollbar(n) .SH KEYWORDS canvas, widget 07070100047180000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e00001d1a0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tk_optionMenu.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: optionMenu.n,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tk_optionMenu n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_optionMenu \- Create an option menubutton and its menu .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_optionMenu \fIpathName varName value \fR?\fIvalue value ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure creates an option menubutton whose name is \fIpathName\fR, plus an associated menu. Together they allow the user to select one of the values given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments. The current value will be stored in the global variable whose name is given by \fIvarName\fR and it will also be displayed as the label in the option menubutton. The user can click on the menubutton to display a menu containing all of the \fIvalue\fRs and thereby select a new value. Once a new value is selected, it will be stored in the variable and appear in the option menubutton. The current value can also be changed by setting the variable. .PP The return value from \fBtk_optionMenu\fR is the name of the menu associated with \fIpathName\fR, so that the caller can change its configuration options or manipulate it in other ways. .SH EXAMPLE .CS tk_optionMenu .foo myVar Foo Bar Boo Spong Wibble pack .foo .CE .SH KEYWORDS option menu 07070100047163000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d000072430000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/listbox.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: listbox.n,v 1.18.2.1 2009/11/02 00:42:32 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH listbox n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME listbox \- Create and manipulate listbox widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlistbox\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-disabledforeground \-exportselection \-font \-foreground \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-relief \-selectbackground \-selectborderwidth \-selectforeground \-setgrid \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand \-yscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-activestyle activeStyle ActiveStyle Specifies the style in which to draw the active element. This must be one of \fBdotbox\fR (show a focus ring around the active element), \fBnone\fR (no special indication of active element) or \fBunderline\fR (underline the active element). The default is \fBunderline\fR on Windows, and \fBdotbox\fR elsewhere. .OP \-height height Height Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines. If zero or less, then the desired height for the window is made just large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox. .OP \-listvariable listVariable Variable Specifies the name of a variable. The value of the variable is a list to be displayed inside the widget; if the variable value changes then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value. Attempts to assign a variable with an invalid list value to \fB\-listvariable\fR will cause an error. Attempts to unset a variable in use as a \fB\-listvariable\fR will fail but will not generate an error. .OP \-selectmode selectMode SelectMode Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection. The value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings expect it to be either \fBsingle\fR, \fBbrowse\fR, \fBmultiple\fR, or \fBextended\fR; the default value is \fBbrowse\fR. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of two states for the listbox: \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR. If the listbox is disabled then items may not be inserted or deleted, items are drawn in the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR color, and selection cannot be modified and is not shown (though selection information is retained). .OP \-width width Width Specifies the desired width for the window in characters. If the font does not have a uniform width then the width of the character .QW 0 is used in translating from character units to screen units. If zero or less, then the desired width for the window is made just large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a listbox widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the listbox such as its colors, font, text, and relief. The \fBlistbox\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A listbox is a widget that displays a list of strings, one per line. When first created, a new listbox has no elements. Elements may be added or deleted using widget commands described below. In addition, one or more elements may be selected as described below. If a listbox is exporting its selection (see \fBexportSelection\fR option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the selection. Listbox selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR; the value of the selection will be the text of the selected elements, with newlines separating the elements. .PP It is not necessary for all the elements to be displayed in the listbox window at once; commands described below may be used to change the view in the window. Listboxes allow scrolling in both directions using the standard \fBxScrollCommand\fR and \fByScrollCommand\fR options. They also support scanning, as described below. .SH "INDICES" .PP Many of the widget commands for listboxes take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first element in the listbox. .TP 12 \fBactive\fR Indicates the element that has the location cursor. This element will be displayed as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the listbox has the keyboard focus, and it is specified with the \fBactivate\fR widget command. .TP 12 \fBanchor\fR Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the \fBselection anchor\fR widget command. .TP 12 \fBend\fR Indicates the end of the listbox. For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox, but for a few commands such as \fBindex\fR and \fBinsert\fR it refers to the element just after the last one. .TP 12 \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window specified by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR (in pixel coordinates). If no element covers that point, then the closest element to that point is used. .LP In the widget command descriptions below, arguments named \fIindex\fR, \fIfirst\fR, and \fIlast\fR always contain text indices in one of the above forms. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlistbox\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for listbox widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBactivate\fR \fIindex\fR Sets the active element to the one indicated by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is outside the range of elements in the listbox then the closest element is activated. The active element is drawn as specified by \fB\-activestyle\fR when the widget has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the index \fBactive\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox\fR \fIindex\fR Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the text in the element given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text (specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels. If no part of the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible on the screen, or if \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element, then the result is an empty string; if the element is partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element, including any parts that are not visible. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBcurselection\fR Returns a list containing the numerical indices of all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected. If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty string is returned. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Deletes one or more elements of the listbox. \fIFirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR, i.e. a single element is deleted. .TP \fIpathName \fBget \fIfirst\fR ?\fIlast\fR? If \fIlast\fR is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox element indicated by \fIfirst\fR, or an empty string if \fIfirst\fR refers to a non-existent element. If \fIlast\fR is specified, the command returns a list whose elements are all of the listbox elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive. Both \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR may have any of the standard forms for indices. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex \fIindex\fR Returns the integer index value that corresponds to \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is \fBend\fR the return value is a count of the number of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element). .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR? Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the element given by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR is specified as \fBend\fR then the new elements are added to the end of the list. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemcget \fIindex option\fR Returns the current value of the item configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlistbox itemconfigure\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBitemconfigure \fIindex\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoption value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for the item (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. The following options are currently supported for items: .RS .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the item. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-selectbackground \fIcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR specifies the background color to use when displaying the item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-selectforeground \fIcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBnearest \fIy\fR Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx y\fR Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR and the current view in the listbox window; used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget. It returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx y\fR. This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments and the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR arguments to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the list at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsee \fIindex\fR Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by \fIindex\fR is visible. If the element is already visible then the command has no effect; if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge; otherwise the listbox scrolls to center the element. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselection anchor \fIindex\fR Sets the selection anchor to the element given by \fIindex\fR. If \fIindex\fR refers to a non-existent element, then the closest element is used. The selection anchor is the end of the selection that is fixed while dragging out a selection with the mouse. The index \fBanchor\fR may be used to refer to the anchor element. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection clear \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? If any of the elements between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR (inclusive) are selected, they are deselected. The selection state is not changed for elements outside this range. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection includes \fIindex\fR Returns 1 if the element indicated by \fIindex\fR is currently selected, 0 if it is not. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection set \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Selects all of the elements in the range between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR, inclusive, without affecting the selection state of elements outside that range. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsize\fR Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements in the listbox. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the information in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the listbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character position given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window. Character positions are defined by the width of the character \fB0\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that \fIfraction\fR of the total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left. \fIfraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR character units (the width of the \fB0\fR character) on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fI?args\fR? This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fByview\fR Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions between 0 and 1. The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means it is halfway through the listbox, for example). The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-yscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fByview\fR \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the top of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fByview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by \fIfraction\fR appears at the top of the window. \fIFraction\fR is a fraction between 0 and 1; 0 indicates the first element in the listbox, 0.33 indicates the element one-third the way through the listbox, and so on. .TP \fIpathName \fByview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts up or down by \fInumber\fR lines; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then earlier elements become visible; if it is positive then later elements become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them Motif-like behavior. Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined by its \fBselectMode\fR option, which selects one of four ways of dealing with the selection. .PP If the selection mode is \fBsingle\fR or \fBbrowse\fR, at most one element can be selected in the listbox at once. In both modes, clicking button 1 on an element selects it and deselects any other selected item. In \fBbrowse\fR mode it is also possible to drag the selection with button 1. .VS 8.5 On button 1, the listbox will also take focus if it has a \fBnormal\fR state and \fB\-takefocus\fR is true. .VE 8.5 .PP If the selection mode is \fBmultiple\fR or \fBextended\fR, any number of elements may be selected at once, including discontiguous ranges. In \fBmultiple\fR mode, clicking button 1 on an element toggles its selection state without affecting any other elements. In \fBextended\fR mode, pressing button 1 on an element selects it, deselects everything else, and sets the anchor to the element under the mouse; dragging the mouse with button 1 down extends the selection to include all the elements between the anchor and the element under the mouse, inclusive. .PP Most people will probably want to use \fBbrowse\fR mode for single selections and \fBextended\fR mode for multiple selections; the other modes appear to be useful only in special situations. .PP Any time the selection changes in the listbox, the virtual event \fB<>\fR will be generated. It is easiest to bind to this event to be made aware of any changes to listbox selection. .PP In addition to the above behavior, the following additional behavior is defined by the default bindings: .IP [1] In \fBextended\fR mode, the selected range can be adjusted by pressing button 1 with the Shift key down: this modifies the selection to consist of the elements between the anchor and the element under the mouse, inclusive. The un-anchored end of this new selection can also be dragged with the button down. .IP [2] In \fBextended\fR mode, pressing button 1 with the Control key down starts a toggle operation: the anchor is set to the element under the mouse, and its selection state is reversed. The selection state of other elements is not changed. If the mouse is dragged with button 1 down, then the selection state of all elements between the anchor and the element under the mouse is set to match that of the anchor element; the selection state of all other elements remains what it was before the toggle operation began. .IP [3] If the mouse leaves the listbox window with button 1 down, the window scrolls away from the mouse, making information visible that used to be off-screen on the side of the mouse. The scrolling continues until the mouse re-enters the window, the button is released, or the end of the listbox is reached. .IP [4] Mouse button 2 may be used for scanning. If it is pressed and dragged over the listbox, the contents of the listbox drag at high speed in the direction the mouse moves. .IP [5] If the Up or Down key is pressed, the location cursor (active element) moves up or down one element. If the selection mode is \fBbrowse\fR or \fBextended\fR then the new active element is also selected and all other elements are deselected. In \fBextended\fR mode the new active element becomes the selection anchor. .IP [6] In \fBextended\fR mode, Shift-Up and Shift-Down move the location cursor (active element) up or down one element and also extend the selection to that element in a fashion similar to dragging with mouse button 1. .IP [7] The Left and Right keys scroll the listbox view left and right by the width of the character \fB0\fR. Control-Left and Control-Right scroll the listbox view left and right by the width of the window. Control-Prior and Control-Next also scroll left and right by the width of the window. .IP [8] The Prior and Next keys scroll the listbox view up and down by one page (the height of the window). .IP [9] The Home and End keys scroll the listbox horizontally to the left and right edges, respectively. .IP [10] Control-Home sets the location cursor to the first element in the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else in the listbox. .IP [11] Control-End sets the location cursor to the last element in the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else in the listbox. .IP [12] In \fBextended\fR mode, Control-Shift-Home extends the selection to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End extends the selection to the last element. .IP [13] In \fBmultiple\fR mode, Control-Shift-Home moves the location cursor to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End moves the location cursor to the last element. .IP [14] The space and Select keys make a selection at the location cursor (active element) just as if mouse button 1 had been pressed over this element. .IP [15] In \fBextended\fR mode, Control-Shift-space and Shift-Select extend the selection to the active element just as if button 1 had been pressed with the Shift key down. .IP [16] In \fBextended\fR mode, the Escape key cancels the most recent selection and restores all the elements in the selected range to their previous selection state. .IP [17] Control-slash selects everything in the widget, except in \fBsingle\fR and \fBbrowse\fR modes, in which case it selects the active element and deselects everything else. .IP [18] Control-backslash deselects everything in the widget, except in \fBbrowse\fR mode where it has no effect. .IP [19] The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection. .PP The behavior of listboxes can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk_listbox(n) .SH KEYWORDS listbox, widget 07070100047187000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f0000214a0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_button.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_button.n,v 1.11.2.2 2009/04/30 13:52:55 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::button n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::button \- Widget that issues a command when pressed .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::button\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::button\fR widget displays a textual label and/or image, and evaluates a command when pressed. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command A script to evaluate when the widget is invoked. .OP \-default default Default May be set to one of \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In a dialog box, one button may be designated the .QW default button (meaning, roughly, .QW "the one that gets invoked when the user presses " ). \fBactive\fR indicates that this is currently the default button; \fBnormal\fR means that it may become the default button, and \fBdisabled\fR means that it is not defaultable. The default is \fBnormal\fR. .RS .PP Depending on the theme, the default button may be displayed with an extra highlight ring, or with a different border color. .RE .OP \-width width Width If greater than zero, specifies how much space, in character widths, to allocate for the text label. If less than zero, specifies a minimum width. If zero or unspecified, the natural width of the text label is used. Note that some themes may specify a non-zero \fB\-width\fR in the style. .\" Not documented -- may go away .\" .OP \-padding padding Padding .\" .OP \-foreground foreground Foreground .\" .OP \-font font Font .\" .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor .\" .OP \-padding padding Padding .\" .OP \-relief relief Relief .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" In addition to the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR commands, buttons support the following additional widget commands: .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR Invokes the command associated with the button. .SH "COMPATIBILITY OPTIONS" .OP \-state state State May be set to \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR to control the \fBdisabled\fR state bit. This is a .QW write-only option: setting it changes the widget state, but the \fBstate\fR widget command does not affect the state option. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), button(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, button, default, command '\" Local Variables: '\" mode: nroff '\" fill-column: 78 '\" End: 07070100047160000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d0000c80e0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/keysyms.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: keysyms.n,v 1.4 2004/08/20 14:15:29 dkf Exp $ '\" '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH keysyms n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME keysyms \- keysyms recognized by Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Tk recognizes many keysyms when specifying key bindings (e.g. \fBbind . \fR). The following list enumerates the keysyms that will be recognized by Tk. Note that not all keysyms will be valid on all platforms. For example, on Unix systems, the presence of a particular keysym is dependant on the configuration of the keyboard modifier map. This list shows keysyms along with their decimal and hexadecimal values. .PP .CS space 32 0x0020 exclam 33 0x0021 quotedbl 34 0x0022 numbersign 35 0x0023 dollar 36 0x0024 percent 37 0x0025 ampersand 38 0x0026 quoteright 39 0x0027 parenleft 40 0x0028 parenright 41 0x0029 asterisk 42 0x002a plus 43 0x002b comma 44 0x002c minus 45 0x002d period 46 0x002e slash 47 0x002f 0 48 0x0030 1 49 0x0031 2 50 0x0032 3 51 0x0033 4 52 0x0034 5 53 0x0035 6 54 0x0036 7 55 0x0037 8 56 0x0038 9 57 0x0039 colon 58 0x003a semicolon 59 0x003b less 60 0x003c equal 61 0x003d greater 62 0x003e question 63 0x003f at 64 0x0040 A 65 0x0041 B 66 0x0042 C 67 0x0043 D 68 0x0044 E 69 0x0045 F 70 0x0046 G 71 0x0047 H 72 0x0048 I 73 0x0049 J 74 0x004a K 75 0x004b L 76 0x004c M 77 0x004d N 78 0x004e O 79 0x004f P 80 0x0050 Q 81 0x0051 R 82 0x0052 S 83 0x0053 T 84 0x0054 U 85 0x0055 V 86 0x0056 W 87 0x0057 X 88 0x0058 Y 89 0x0059 Z 90 0x005a bracketleft 91 0x005b backslash 92 0x005c bracketright 93 0x005d asciicircum 94 0x005e underscore 95 0x005f quoteleft 96 0x0060 a 97 0x0061 b 98 0x0062 c 99 0x0063 d 100 0x0064 e 101 0x0065 f 102 0x0066 g 103 0x0067 h 104 0x0068 i 105 0x0069 j 106 0x006a k 107 0x006b l 108 0x006c m 109 0x006d n 110 0x006e o 111 0x006f p 112 0x0070 q 113 0x0071 r 114 0x0072 s 115 0x0073 t 116 0x0074 u 117 0x0075 v 118 0x0076 w 119 0x0077 x 120 0x0078 y 121 0x0079 z 122 0x007a braceleft 123 0x007b bar 124 0x007c braceright 125 0x007d asciitilde 126 0x007e nobreakspace 160 0x00a0 exclamdown 161 0x00a1 cent 162 0x00a2 sterling 163 0x00a3 currency 164 0x00a4 yen 165 0x00a5 brokenbar 166 0x00a6 section 167 0x00a7 diaeresis 168 0x00a8 copyright 169 0x00a9 ordfeminine 170 0x00aa guillemotleft 171 0x00ab notsign 172 0x00ac hyphen 173 0x00ad registered 174 0x00ae macron 175 0x00af degree 176 0x00b0 plusminus 177 0x00b1 twosuperior 178 0x00b2 threesuperior 179 0x00b3 acute 180 0x00b4 mu 181 0x00b5 paragraph 182 0x00b6 periodcentered 183 0x00b7 cedilla 184 0x00b8 onesuperior 185 0x00b9 masculine 186 0x00ba guillemotright 187 0x00bb onequarter 188 0x00bc onehalf 189 0x00bd threequarters 190 0x00be questiondown 191 0x00bf Agrave 192 0x00c0 Aacute 193 0x00c1 Acircumflex 194 0x00c2 Atilde 195 0x00c3 Adiaeresis 196 0x00c4 Aring 197 0x00c5 AE 198 0x00c6 Ccedilla 199 0x00c7 Egrave 200 0x00c8 Eacute 201 0x00c9 Ecircumflex 202 0x00ca Ediaeresis 203 0x00cb Igrave 204 0x00cc Iacute 205 0x00cd Icircumflex 206 0x00ce Idiaeresis 207 0x00cf Eth 208 0x00d0 Ntilde 209 0x00d1 Ograve 210 0x00d2 Oacute 211 0x00d3 Ocircumflex 212 0x00d4 Otilde 213 0x00d5 Odiaeresis 214 0x00d6 multiply 215 0x00d7 Ooblique 216 0x00d8 Ugrave 217 0x00d9 Uacute 218 0x00da Ucircumflex 219 0x00db Udiaeresis 220 0x00dc Yacute 221 0x00dd Thorn 222 0x00de ssharp 223 0x00df agrave 224 0x00e0 aacute 225 0x00e1 acircumflex 226 0x00e2 atilde 227 0x00e3 adiaeresis 228 0x00e4 aring 229 0x00e5 ae 230 0x00e6 ccedilla 231 0x00e7 egrave 232 0x00e8 eacute 233 0x00e9 ecircumflex 234 0x00ea ediaeresis 235 0x00eb igrave 236 0x00ec iacute 237 0x00ed icircumflex 238 0x00ee idiaeresis 239 0x00ef eth 240 0x00f0 ntilde 241 0x00f1 ograve 242 0x00f2 oacute 243 0x00f3 ocircumflex 244 0x00f4 otilde 245 0x00f5 odiaeresis 246 0x00f6 division 247 0x00f7 oslash 248 0x00f8 ugrave 249 0x00f9 uacute 250 0x00fa ucircumflex 251 0x00fb udiaeresis 252 0x00fc yacute 253 0x00fd thorn 254 0x00fe ydiaeresis 255 0x00ff Aogonek 417 0x01a1 breve 418 0x01a2 Lstroke 419 0x01a3 Lcaron 421 0x01a5 Sacute 422 0x01a6 Scaron 425 0x01a9 Scedilla 426 0x01aa Tcaron 427 0x01ab Zacute 428 0x01ac .CE .CS Zcaron 430 0x01ae Zabovedot 431 0x01af aogonek 433 0x01b1 ogonek 434 0x01b2 lstroke 435 0x01b3 lcaron 437 0x01b5 sacute 438 0x01b6 caron 439 0x01b7 scaron 441 0x01b9 scedilla 442 0x01ba tcaron 443 0x01bb zacute 444 0x01bc doubleacute 445 0x01bd zcaron 446 0x01be zabovedot 447 0x01bf Racute 448 0x01c0 Abreve 451 0x01c3 Cacute 454 0x01c6 Ccaron 456 0x01c8 Eogonek 458 0x01ca Ecaron 460 0x01cc Dcaron 463 0x01cf Nacute 465 0x01d1 Ncaron 466 0x01d2 Odoubleacute 469 0x01d5 Rcaron 472 0x01d8 Uring 473 0x01d9 Udoubleacute 475 0x01db Tcedilla 478 0x01de racute 480 0x01e0 abreve 483 0x01e3 cacute 486 0x01e6 ccaron 488 0x01e8 eogonek 490 0x01ea ecaron 492 0x01ec dcaron 495 0x01ef nacute 497 0x01f1 ncaron 498 0x01f2 odoubleacute 501 0x01f5 rcaron 504 0x01f8 uring 505 0x01f9 udoubleacute 507 0x01fb tcedilla 510 0x01fe abovedot 511 0x01ff Hstroke 673 0x02a1 Hcircumflex 678 0x02a6 Iabovedot 681 0x02a9 Gbreve 683 0x02ab Jcircumflex 684 0x02ac hstroke 689 0x02b1 hcircumflex 694 0x02b6 idotless 697 0x02b9 gbreve 699 0x02bb jcircumflex 700 0x02bc Cabovedot 709 0x02c5 Ccircumflex 710 0x02c6 Gabovedot 725 0x02d5 Gcircumflex 728 0x02d8 Ubreve 733 0x02dd Scircumflex 734 0x02de cabovedot 741 0x02e5 ccircumflex 742 0x02e6 gabovedot 757 0x02f5 gcircumflex 760 0x02f8 ubreve 765 0x02fd scircumflex 766 0x02fe kappa 930 0x03a2 Rcedilla 931 0x03a3 Itilde 933 0x03a5 Lcedilla 934 0x03a6 Emacron 938 0x03aa Gcedilla 939 0x03ab Tslash 940 0x03ac rcedilla 947 0x03b3 itilde 949 0x03b5 lcedilla 950 0x03b6 emacron 954 0x03ba gacute 955 0x03bb tslash 956 0x03bc ENG 957 0x03bd eng 959 0x03bf Amacron 960 0x03c0 Iogonek 967 0x03c7 Eabovedot 972 0x03cc Imacron 975 0x03cf Ncedilla 977 0x03d1 Omacron 978 0x03d2 Kcedilla 979 0x03d3 Uogonek 985 0x03d9 Utilde 989 0x03dd Umacron 990 0x03de amacron 992 0x03e0 iogonek 999 0x03e7 eabovedot 1004 0x03ec imacron 1007 0x03ef ncedilla 1009 0x03f1 omacron 1010 0x03f2 kcedilla 1011 0x03f3 uogonek 1017 0x03f9 utilde 1021 0x03fd umacron 1022 0x03fe overline 1150 0x047e kana_fullstop 1185 0x04a1 kana_openingbracket 1186 0x04a2 kana_closingbracket 1187 0x04a3 kana_comma 1188 0x04a4 kana_middledot 1189 0x04a5 kana_WO 1190 0x04a6 kana_a 1191 0x04a7 kana_i 1192 0x04a8 kana_u 1193 0x04a9 kana_e 1194 0x04aa kana_o 1195 0x04ab kana_ya 1196 0x04ac kana_yu 1197 0x04ad kana_yo 1198 0x04ae kana_tu 1199 0x04af prolongedsound 1200 0x04b0 kana_A 1201 0x04b1 kana_I 1202 0x04b2 kana_U 1203 0x04b3 kana_E 1204 0x04b4 kana_O 1205 0x04b5 kana_KA 1206 0x04b6 kana_KI 1207 0x04b7 kana_KU 1208 0x04b8 kana_KE 1209 0x04b9 kana_KO 1210 0x04ba kana_SA 1211 0x04bb kana_SHI 1212 0x04bc kana_SU 1213 0x04bd kana_SE 1214 0x04be kana_SO 1215 0x04bf kana_TA 1216 0x04c0 kana_TI 1217 0x04c1 kana_TU 1218 0x04c2 kana_TE 1219 0x04c3 kana_TO 1220 0x04c4 kana_NA 1221 0x04c5 kana_NI 1222 0x04c6 kana_NU 1223 0x04c7 kana_NE 1224 0x04c8 kana_NO 1225 0x04c9 kana_HA 1226 0x04ca kana_HI 1227 0x04cb kana_HU 1228 0x04cc kana_HE 1229 0x04cd kana_HO 1230 0x04ce kana_MA 1231 0x04cf kana_MI 1232 0x04d0 kana_MU 1233 0x04d1 kana_ME 1234 0x04d2 kana_MO 1235 0x04d3 kana_YA 1236 0x04d4 kana_YU 1237 0x04d5 kana_YO 1238 0x04d6 kana_RA 1239 0x04d7 kana_RI 1240 0x04d8 kana_RU 1241 0x04d9 kana_RE 1242 0x04da kana_RO 1243 0x04db kana_WA 1244 0x04dc kana_N 1245 0x04dd voicedsound 1246 0x04de semivoicedsound 1247 0x04df Arabic_comma 1452 0x05ac Arabic_semicolon 1467 0x05bb Arabic_question_mark 1471 0x05bf Arabic_hamza 1473 0x05c1 Arabic_maddaonalef 1474 0x05c2 Arabic_hamzaonalef 1475 0x05c3 Arabic_hamzaonwaw 1476 0x05c4 Arabic_hamzaunderalef 1477 0x05c5 Arabic_hamzaonyeh 1478 0x05c6 Arabic_alef 1479 0x05c7 Arabic_beh 1480 0x05c8 Arabic_tehmarbuta 1481 0x05c9 Arabic_teh 1482 0x05ca Arabic_theh 1483 0x05cb Arabic_jeem 1484 0x05cc Arabic_hah 1485 0x05cd Arabic_khah 1486 0x05ce Arabic_dal 1487 0x05cf Arabic_thal 1488 0x05d0 Arabic_ra 1489 0x05d1 Arabic_zain 1490 0x05d2 Arabic_seen 1491 0x05d3 Arabic_sheen 1492 0x05d4 Arabic_sad 1493 0x05d5 Arabic_dad 1494 0x05d6 Arabic_tah 1495 0x05d7 Arabic_zah 1496 0x05d8 Arabic_ain 1497 0x05d9 Arabic_ghain 1498 0x05da Arabic_tatweel 1504 0x05e0 Arabic_feh 1505 0x05e1 Arabic_qaf 1506 0x05e2 Arabic_kaf 1507 0x05e3 Arabic_lam 1508 0x05e4 Arabic_meem 1509 0x05e5 .CE .CS Arabic_noon 1510 0x05e6 Arabic_heh 1511 0x05e7 Arabic_waw 1512 0x05e8 Arabic_alefmaksura 1513 0x05e9 Arabic_yeh 1514 0x05ea Arabic_fathatan 1515 0x05eb Arabic_dammatan 1516 0x05ec Arabic_kasratan 1517 0x05ed Arabic_fatha 1518 0x05ee Arabic_damma 1519 0x05ef Arabic_kasra 1520 0x05f0 Arabic_shadda 1521 0x05f1 Arabic_sukun 1522 0x05f2 Serbian_dje 1697 0x06a1 Macedonia_gje 1698 0x06a2 Cyrillic_io 1699 0x06a3 Ukranian_je 1700 0x06a4 Macedonia_dse 1701 0x06a5 Ukranian_i 1702 0x06a6 Ukranian_yi 1703 0x06a7 Serbian_je 1704 0x06a8 Serbian_lje 1705 0x06a9 Serbian_nje 1706 0x06aa Serbian_tshe 1707 0x06ab Macedonia_kje 1708 0x06ac Byelorussian_shortu 1710 0x06ae Serbian_dze 1711 0x06af numerosign 1712 0x06b0 Serbian_DJE 1713 0x06b1 Macedonia_GJE 1714 0x06b2 Cyrillic_IO 1715 0x06b3 Ukranian_JE 1716 0x06b4 Macedonia_DSE 1717 0x06b5 Ukranian_I 1718 0x06b6 Ukranian_YI 1719 0x06b7 Serbian_JE 1720 0x06b8 Serbian_LJE 1721 0x06b9 Serbian_NJE 1722 0x06ba Serbian_TSHE 1723 0x06bb Macedonia_KJE 1724 0x06bc Byelorussian_SHORTU 1726 0x06be Serbian_DZE 1727 0x06bf Cyrillic_yu 1728 0x06c0 Cyrillic_a 1729 0x06c1 Cyrillic_be 1730 0x06c2 Cyrillic_tse 1731 0x06c3 Cyrillic_de 1732 0x06c4 Cyrillic_ie 1733 0x06c5 Cyrillic_ef 1734 0x06c6 Cyrillic_ghe 1735 0x06c7 Cyrillic_ha 1736 0x06c8 Cyrillic_i 1737 0x06c9 Cyrillic_shorti 1738 0x06ca Cyrillic_ka 1739 0x06cb Cyrillic_el 1740 0x06cc Cyrillic_em 1741 0x06cd Cyrillic_en 1742 0x06ce Cyrillic_o 1743 0x06cf Cyrillic_pe 1744 0x06d0 Cyrillic_ya 1745 0x06d1 Cyrillic_er 1746 0x06d2 Cyrillic_es 1747 0x06d3 Cyrillic_te 1748 0x06d4 Cyrillic_u 1749 0x06d5 Cyrillic_zhe 1750 0x06d6 Cyrillic_ve 1751 0x06d7 Cyrillic_softsign 1752 0x06d8 Cyrillic_yeru 1753 0x06d9 Cyrillic_ze 1754 0x06da Cyrillic_sha 1755 0x06db Cyrillic_e 1756 0x06dc Cyrillic_shcha 1757 0x06dd Cyrillic_che 1758 0x06de Cyrillic_hardsign 1759 0x06df Cyrillic_YU 1760 0x06e0 Cyrillic_A 1761 0x06e1 Cyrillic_BE 1762 0x06e2 Cyrillic_TSE 1763 0x06e3 Cyrillic_DE 1764 0x06e4 Cyrillic_IE 1765 0x06e5 Cyrillic_EF 1766 0x06e6 Cyrillic_GHE 1767 0x06e7 Cyrillic_HA 1768 0x06e8 Cyrillic_I 1769 0x06e9 Cyrillic_SHORTI 1770 0x06ea Cyrillic_KA 1771 0x06eb Cyrillic_EL 1772 0x06ec Cyrillic_EM 1773 0x06ed Cyrillic_EN 1774 0x06ee Cyrillic_O 1775 0x06ef Cyrillic_PE 1776 0x06f0 Cyrillic_YA 1777 0x06f1 Cyrillic_ER 1778 0x06f2 Cyrillic_ES 1779 0x06f3 Cyrillic_TE 1780 0x06f4 Cyrillic_U 1781 0x06f5 Cyrillic_ZHE 1782 0x06f6 Cyrillic_VE 1783 0x06f7 Cyrillic_SOFTSIGN 1784 0x06f8 Cyrillic_YERU 1785 0x06f9 Cyrillic_ZE 1786 0x06fa Cyrillic_SHA 1787 0x06fb Cyrillic_E 1788 0x06fc Cyrillic_SHCHA 1789 0x06fd Cyrillic_CHE 1790 0x06fe Cyrillic_HARDSIGN 1791 0x06ff Greek_ALPHAaccent 1953 0x07a1 Greek_EPSILONaccent 1954 0x07a2 Greek_ETAaccent 1955 0x07a3 Greek_IOTAaccent 1956 0x07a4 Greek_IOTAdiaeresis 1957 0x07a5 Greek_IOTAaccentdiaeresis 1958 0x07a6 Greek_OMICRONaccent 1959 0x07a7 Greek_UPSILONaccent 1960 0x07a8 Greek_UPSILONdieresis 1961 0x07a9 Greek_UPSILONaccentdieresis 1962 0x07aa Greek_OMEGAaccent 1963 0x07ab Greek_alphaaccent 1969 0x07b1 Greek_epsilonaccent 1970 0x07b2 Greek_etaaccent 1971 0x07b3 Greek_iotaaccent 1972 0x07b4 Greek_iotadieresis 1973 0x07b5 Greek_iotaaccentdieresis 1974 0x07b6 Greek_omicronaccent 1975 0x07b7 Greek_upsilonaccent 1976 0x07b8 Greek_upsilondieresis 1977 0x07b9 Greek_upsilonaccentdieresis 1978 0x07ba Greek_omegaaccent 1979 0x07bb Greek_ALPHA 1985 0x07c1 Greek_BETA 1986 0x07c2 Greek_GAMMA 1987 0x07c3 Greek_DELTA 1988 0x07c4 Greek_EPSILON 1989 0x07c5 Greek_ZETA 1990 0x07c6 Greek_ETA 1991 0x07c7 Greek_THETA 1992 0x07c8 Greek_IOTA 1993 0x07c9 Greek_KAPPA 1994 0x07ca Greek_LAMBDA 1995 0x07cb Greek_MU 1996 0x07cc Greek_NU 1997 0x07cd Greek_XI 1998 0x07ce Greek_OMICRON 1999 0x07cf Greek_PI 2000 0x07d0 Greek_RHO 2001 0x07d1 Greek_SIGMA 2002 0x07d2 Greek_TAU 2004 0x07d4 Greek_UPSILON 2005 0x07d5 Greek_PHI 2006 0x07d6 Greek_CHI 2007 0x07d7 Greek_PSI 2008 0x07d8 Greek_OMEGA 2009 0x07d9 Greek_alpha 2017 0x07e1 Greek_beta 2018 0x07e2 Greek_gamma 2019 0x07e3 Greek_delta 2020 0x07e4 Greek_epsilon 2021 0x07e5 Greek_zeta 2022 0x07e6 Greek_eta 2023 0x07e7 Greek_theta 2024 0x07e8 Greek_iota 2025 0x07e9 Greek_kappa 2026 0x07ea Greek_lambda 2027 0x07eb Greek_mu 2028 0x07ec Greek_nu 2029 0x07ed Greek_xi 2030 0x07ee Greek_omicron 2031 0x07ef Greek_pi 2032 0x07f0 Greek_rho 2033 0x07f1 Greek_sigma 2034 0x07f2 Greek_finalsmallsigma 2035 0x07f3 Greek_tau 2036 0x07f4 Greek_upsilon 2037 0x07f5 Greek_phi 2038 0x07f6 Greek_chi 2039 0x07f7 Greek_psi 2040 0x07f8 Greek_omega 2041 0x07f9 leftradical 2209 0x08a1 topleftradical 2210 0x08a2 horizconnector 2211 0x08a3 topintegral 2212 0x08a4 botintegral 2213 0x08a5 vertconnector 2214 0x08a6 topleftsqbracket 2215 0x08a7 botleftsqbracket 2216 0x08a8 toprightsqbracket 2217 0x08a9 botrightsqbracket 2218 0x08aa topleftparens 2219 0x08ab botleftparens 2220 0x08ac toprightparens 2221 0x08ad botrightparens 2222 0x08ae leftmiddlecurlybrace 2223 0x08af rightmiddlecurlybrace 2224 0x08b0 topleftsummation 2225 0x08b1 botleftsummation 2226 0x08b2 topvertsummationconnector 2227 0x08b3 botvertsummationconnector 2228 0x08b4 toprightsummation 2229 0x08b5 botrightsummation 2230 0x08b6 rightmiddlesummation 2231 0x08b7 .CE .CS lessthanequal 2236 0x08bc notequal 2237 0x08bd greaterthanequal 2238 0x08be integral 2239 0x08bf therefore 2240 0x08c0 variation 2241 0x08c1 infinity 2242 0x08c2 nabla 2245 0x08c5 approximate 2248 0x08c8 similarequal 2249 0x08c9 ifonlyif 2253 0x08cd implies 2254 0x08ce identical 2255 0x08cf radical 2262 0x08d6 includedin 2266 0x08da includes 2267 0x08db intersection 2268 0x08dc union 2269 0x08dd logicaland 2270 0x08de logicalor 2271 0x08df partialderivative 2287 0x08ef function 2294 0x08f6 leftarrow 2299 0x08fb uparrow 2300 0x08fc rightarrow 2301 0x08fd downarrow 2302 0x08fe blank 2527 0x09df soliddiamond 2528 0x09e0 checkerboard 2529 0x09e1 ht 2530 0x09e2 ff 2531 0x09e3 cr 2532 0x09e4 lf 2533 0x09e5 nl 2536 0x09e8 vt 2537 0x09e9 lowrightcorner 2538 0x09ea uprightcorner 2539 0x09eb upleftcorner 2540 0x09ec lowleftcorner 2541 0x09ed crossinglines 2542 0x09ee horizlinescan1 2543 0x09ef horizlinescan3 2544 0x09f0 horizlinescan5 2545 0x09f1 horizlinescan7 2546 0x09f2 horizlinescan9 2547 0x09f3 leftt 2548 0x09f4 rightt 2549 0x09f5 bott 2550 0x09f6 topt 2551 0x09f7 vertbar 2552 0x09f8 emspace 2721 0x0aa1 enspace 2722 0x0aa2 em3space 2723 0x0aa3 em4space 2724 0x0aa4 digitspace 2725 0x0aa5 punctspace 2726 0x0aa6 thinspace 2727 0x0aa7 hairspace 2728 0x0aa8 emdash 2729 0x0aa9 endash 2730 0x0aaa signifblank 2732 0x0aac ellipsis 2734 0x0aae doubbaselinedot 2735 0x0aaf onethird 2736 0x0ab0 twothirds 2737 0x0ab1 onefifth 2738 0x0ab2 twofifths 2739 0x0ab3 threefifths 2740 0x0ab4 fourfifths 2741 0x0ab5 onesixth 2742 0x0ab6 fivesixths 2743 0x0ab7 careof 2744 0x0ab8 figdash 2747 0x0abb leftanglebracket 2748 0x0abc decimalpoint 2749 0x0abd rightanglebracket 2750 0x0abe marker 2751 0x0abf oneeighth 2755 0x0ac3 threeeighths 2756 0x0ac4 fiveeighths 2757 0x0ac5 seveneighths 2758 0x0ac6 trademark 2761 0x0ac9 signaturemark 2762 0x0aca trademarkincircle 2763 0x0acb leftopentriangle 2764 0x0acc rightopentriangle 2765 0x0acd emopencircle 2766 0x0ace emopenrectangle 2767 0x0acf leftsinglequotemark 2768 0x0ad0 rightsinglequotemark 2769 0x0ad1 leftdoublequotemark 2770 0x0ad2 rightdoublequotemark 2771 0x0ad3 prescription 2772 0x0ad4 minutes 2774 0x0ad6 seconds 2775 0x0ad7 latincross 2777 0x0ad9 hexagram 2778 0x0ada filledrectbullet 2779 0x0adb filledlefttribullet 2780 0x0adc filledrighttribullet 2781 0x0add emfilledcircle 2782 0x0ade emfilledrect 2783 0x0adf enopencircbullet 2784 0x0ae0 enopensquarebullet 2785 0x0ae1 openrectbullet 2786 0x0ae2 opentribulletup 2787 0x0ae3 opentribulletdown 2788 0x0ae4 openstar 2789 0x0ae5 enfilledcircbullet 2790 0x0ae6 enfilledsqbullet 2791 0x0ae7 filledtribulletup 2792 0x0ae8 filledtribulletdown 2793 0x0ae9 leftpointer 2794 0x0aea rightpointer 2795 0x0aeb club 2796 0x0aec diamond 2797 0x0aed heart 2798 0x0aee maltesecross 2800 0x0af0 dagger 2801 0x0af1 doubledagger 2802 0x0af2 checkmark 2803 0x0af3 ballotcross 2804 0x0af4 musicalsharp 2805 0x0af5 musicalflat 2806 0x0af6 malesymbol 2807 0x0af7 femalesymbol 2808 0x0af8 telephone 2809 0x0af9 telephonerecorder 2810 0x0afa phonographcopyright 2811 0x0afb caret 2812 0x0afc singlelowquotemark 2813 0x0afd doublelowquotemark 2814 0x0afe cursor 2815 0x0aff leftcaret 2979 0x0ba3 rightcaret 2982 0x0ba6 downcaret 2984 0x0ba8 upcaret 2985 0x0ba9 overbar 3008 0x0bc0 downtack 3010 0x0bc2 upshoe 3011 0x0bc3 downstile 3012 0x0bc4 underbar 3014 0x0bc6 jot 3018 0x0bca quad 3020 0x0bcc uptack 3022 0x0bce circle 3023 0x0bcf upstile 3027 0x0bd3 downshoe 3030 0x0bd6 rightshoe 3032 0x0bd8 leftshoe 3034 0x0bda lefttack 3036 0x0bdc righttack 3068 0x0bfc hebrew_aleph 3296 0x0ce0 hebrew_beth 3297 0x0ce1 hebrew_gimmel 3298 0x0ce2 hebrew_daleth 3299 0x0ce3 hebrew_he 3300 0x0ce4 hebrew_waw 3301 0x0ce5 hebrew_zayin 3302 0x0ce6 hebrew_het 3303 0x0ce7 hebrew_teth 3304 0x0ce8 hebrew_yod 3305 0x0ce9 hebrew_finalkaph 3306 0x0cea hebrew_kaph 3307 0x0ceb hebrew_lamed 3308 0x0cec hebrew_finalmem 3309 0x0ced hebrew_mem 3310 0x0cee hebrew_finalnun 3311 0x0cef hebrew_nun 3312 0x0cf0 hebrew_samekh 3313 0x0cf1 hebrew_ayin 3314 0x0cf2 hebrew_finalpe 3315 0x0cf3 hebrew_pe 3316 0x0cf4 hebrew_finalzadi 3317 0x0cf5 hebrew_zadi 3318 0x0cf6 hebrew_kuf 3319 0x0cf7 hebrew_resh 3320 0x0cf8 hebrew_shin 3321 0x0cf9 hebrew_taf 3322 0x0cfa BackSpace 65288 0xff08 Tab 65289 0xff09 Linefeed 65290 0xff0a Clear 65291 0xff0b Return 65293 0xff0d Pause 65299 0xff13 Scroll_Lock 65300 0xff14 Sys_Req 65301 0xff15 Escape 65307 0xff1b Multi_key 65312 0xff20 Kanji 65313 0xff21 Home 65360 0xff50 Left 65361 0xff51 Up 65362 0xff52 Right 65363 0xff53 Down 65364 0xff54 Prior 65365 0xff55 Next 65366 0xff56 End 65367 0xff57 Begin 65368 0xff58 Win_L 65371 0xff5b Win_R 65372 0xff5c .CE .CS App 65373 0xff5d Select 65376 0xff60 Print 65377 0xff61 Execute 65378 0xff62 Insert 65379 0xff63 Undo 65381 0xff65 Redo 65382 0xff66 Menu 65383 0xff67 Find 65384 0xff68 Cancel 65385 0xff69 Help 65386 0xff6a Break 65387 0xff6b Hebrew_switch 65406 0xff7e Num_Lock 65407 0xff7f KP_Space 65408 0xff80 KP_Tab 65417 0xff89 KP_Enter 65421 0xff8d KP_F1 65425 0xff91 KP_F2 65426 0xff92 KP_F3 65427 0xff93 KP_F4 65428 0xff94 KP_Multiply 65450 0xffaa KP_Add 65451 0xffab KP_Separator 65452 0xffac KP_Subtract 65453 0xffad KP_Decimal 65454 0xffae KP_Divide 65455 0xffaf KP_0 65456 0xffb0 KP_1 65457 0xffb1 KP_2 65458 0xffb2 KP_3 65459 0xffb3 KP_4 65460 0xffb4 KP_5 65461 0xffb5 KP_6 65462 0xffb6 KP_7 65463 0xffb7 KP_8 65464 0xffb8 KP_9 65465 0xffb9 KP_Equal 65469 0xffbd F1 65470 0xffbe F2 65471 0xffbf F3 65472 0xffc0 F4 65473 0xffc1 F5 65474 0xffc2 F6 65475 0xffc3 F7 65476 0xffc4 F8 65477 0xffc5 F9 65478 0xffc6 F10 65479 0xffc7 L1 65480 0xffc8 L2 65481 0xffc9 L3 65482 0xffca L4 65483 0xffcb L5 65484 0xffcc L6 65485 0xffcd L7 65486 0xffce L8 65487 0xffcf L9 65488 0xffd0 L10 65489 0xffd1 R1 65490 0xffd2 R2 65491 0xffd3 R3 65492 0xffd4 R4 65493 0xffd5 R5 65494 0xffd6 R6 65495 0xffd7 R7 65496 0xffd8 R8 65497 0xffd9 R9 65498 0xffda R10 65499 0xffdb R11 65500 0xffdc R12 65501 0xffdd F33 65502 0xffde R14 65503 0xffdf R15 65504 0xffe0 Shift_L 65505 0xffe1 Shift_R 65506 0xffe2 Control_L 65507 0xffe3 Control_R 65508 0xffe4 Caps_Lock 65509 0xffe5 Shift_Lock 65510 0xffe6 Meta_L 65511 0xffe7 Meta_R 65512 0xffe8 Alt_L 65513 0xffe9 Alt_R 65514 0xffea Super_L 65515 0xffeb Super_R 65516 0xffec Hyper_L 65517 0xffed Hyper_R 65518 0xffee Delete 65535 0xffff .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind .SH KEYWORDS keysym, bind, binding 07070100047150000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c000038950000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/button.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: button.n,v 1.15.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:00 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH button n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME button \- Create and manipulate button widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBbutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-font \-relief \-activeforeground \-foreground \-repeatdelay \-anchor \-highlightbackground \-repeatinterval \-background \-highlightcolor \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightthickness \-text \-borderwidth \-image \-textvariable \-compound \-justify \-underline \-cursor \-padx \-wraplength \-disabledforeground \-pady .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button. This command is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button window. .OP \-default default Default Specifies one of three states for the default ring: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In active state, the button is drawn with the platform specific appearance for a default button. In normal state, the button is drawn with the platform specific appearance for a non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default button appearance. The normal and active states will result in buttons of the same size. In disabled state, the button is drawn with the non-default button appearance without leaving space for the default appearance. The disabled state may result in a smaller button than the active state. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the button. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in lines of text. If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .OP \-overrelief overRelief OverRelief Specifies an alternative relief for the button, to be used when the mouse cursor is over the widget. This option can be used to make toolbar buttons, by configuring \fB\-relief flat \-overrelief raised\fR. If the value of this option is the empty string, then no alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the button. The empty string is the default value. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of three states for the button: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In normal state the button is displayed using the \fBforeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options. The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the button. In active state the button is displayed using the \fBactiveForeground\fR and \fBactiveBackground\fR options. Disabled state means that the button should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate the widget and will ignore mouse button presses. In this state the \fBdisabledForeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options determine how the button is displayed. .OP \-width width Width Specifies a desired width for the button. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR). For a text button (no image or with \fB\-compound none\fR) then the width specifies how much space in characters to allocate for the text label. If the width is negative then this specifies a minimum width. If this option is not specified, the button's desired width is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a button widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the button such as its colors, font, text, and initial relief. The \fBbutton\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A button is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image. If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines or if wrapping occurs because of the \fBwrapLength\fR option) and one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the \fBunderline\fR option. It can display itself in either of three different ways, according to the \fBstate\fR option; it can be made to appear raised, sunken, or flat; and it can be made to flash. When a user invokes the button (by pressing mouse button 1 with the cursor over the button), then the Tcl command specified in the \fB\-command\fR option is invoked. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBbutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for button widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBbutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBflash\fR Flash the button. This is accomplished by redisplaying the button several times, alternating between active and normal colors. At the end of the flash the button is left in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked. This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR Invoke the Tcl command associated with the button, if there is one. The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an empty string if there is no command associated with the button. This command is ignored if the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them default behavior: .IP [1] A button activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the button. Under Windows, this binding is only active when mouse button 1 has been pressed over the button. .IP [2] A button's relief is changed to sunken whenever mouse button 1 is pressed over the button, and the relief is restored to its original value when button 1 is later released. .IP [3] If mouse button 1 is pressed over a button and later released over the button, the button is invoked. However, if the mouse is not over the button when button 1 is released, then no invocation occurs. .IP [4] When a button has the input focus, the space key causes the button to be invoked. .PP If the button's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the button is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of buttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH EXAMPLES This is the classic Tk .QW "Hello, World!" demonstration: .PP .CS \fBbutton\fR .b \-text "Hello, World!" \-command exit pack .b .CE .PP This example demonstrates how to handle button accelerators: .PP .CS \fBbutton\fR .b1 \-text Hello \-underline 0 \fBbutton\fR .b2 \-text World \-underline 0 bind . {.b1 flash; .b1 invoke} bind . {.b2 flash; .b2 invoke} pack .b1 .b2 .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::button(n) .SH KEYWORDS button, widget 0707010004714e000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c000026aa0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002300000000root/usr/local/man/mann/bindtags.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bindtags.n,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH bindtags n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bindtags \- Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation .SH SYNOPSIS \fBbindtags \fIwindow \fR?\fItagList\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP When a binding is created with the \fBbind\fR command, it is associated either with a particular window such as \fB.a.b.c\fR, a class name such as \fBButton\fR, the keyword \fBall\fR, or any other string. All of these forms are called \fIbinding tags\fR. Each window contains a list of binding tags that determine how events are processed for the window. When an event occurs in a window, it is applied to each of the window's tags in order: for each tag, the most specific binding that matches the given tag and event is executed. See the \fBbind\fR command for more information on the matching process. .PP By default, each window has four binding tags consisting of the name of the window, the window's class name, the name of the window's nearest toplevel ancestor, and \fBall\fR, in that order. Toplevel windows have only three tags by default, since the toplevel name is the same as that of the window. The \fBbindtags\fR command allows the binding tags for a window to be read and modified. .PP If \fBbindtags\fR is invoked with only one argument, then the current set of binding tags for \fIwindow\fR is returned as a list. If the \fItagList\fR argument is specified to \fBbindtags\fR, then it must be a proper list; the tags for \fIwindow\fR are changed to the elements of the list. The elements of \fItagList\fR may be arbitrary strings; however, any tag starting with a dot is treated as the name of a window; if no window by that name exists at the time an event is processed, then the tag is ignored for that event. The order of the elements in \fItagList\fR determines the order in which binding scripts are executed in response to events. For example, the command .CS \fBbindtags .b {all . Button .b}\fR .CE reverses the order in which binding scripts will be evaluated for a button named \fB.b\fR so that \fBall\fR bindings are invoked first, following by bindings for \fB.b\fR's toplevel .PQ . "" , followed by class bindings, followed by bindings for \fB.b\fR. If \fItagList\fR is an empty list then the binding tags for \fIwindow\fR are returned to the default state described above. .PP The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to introduce arbitrary additional binding tags for a window, or to remove standard tags. For example, the command .CS \fBbindtags .b {.b TrickyButton . all}\fR .CE replaces the \fBButton\fR tag for \fB.b\fR with \fBTrickyButton\fR. This means that the default widget bindings for buttons, which are associated with the \fBButton\fR tag, will no longer apply to \fB.b\fR, but any bindings associated with \fBTrickyButton\fR (perhaps some new button behavior) will apply. .SH EXAMPLE If you have a set of nested \fBframe\fR widgets and you want events sent to a \fBbutton\fR widget to also be delivered to all the widgets up to the current \fBtoplevel\fR (in contrast to Tk's default behavior, where events are not delivered to those intermediate windows) to make it easier to have accelerators that are only active for part of a window, you could use a helper procedure like this to help set things up: .CS proc setupBindtagsForTreeDelivery {widget} { set tags [list $widget [winfo class $widget]] set w $widget set t [winfo toplevel $w] while {$w ne $t} { set w [winfo parent $w] lappend tags $w } lappend tags all \fBbindtags\fR $widget $tags } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n) .SH KEYWORDS binding, event, tag 0707010004715d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d00002d750000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/grab.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: grab.n,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH grab n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grab \- Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR .sp \fBgrab \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg \fR...? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command implements simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk. Tk's grabs are different than the grabs described in the Xlib documentation. When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer events to the grab window and its descendants in Tk's window hierarchy. Whenever the pointer is within the grab window's subtree, the pointer will behave exactly the same as if there had been no grab at all and all events will be reported in the normal fashion. When the pointer is outside \fIwindow\fR's tree, button presses and releases and mouse motion events are reported to \fIwindow\fR, and window entry and window exit events are ignored. The grab subtree .QW owns the pointer: windows outside the grab subtree will be visible on the screen but they will be insensitive until the grab is released. The tree of windows underneath the grab window can include top-level windows, in which case all of those top-level windows and their descendants will continue to receive mouse events during the grab. .PP Two forms of grabs are possible: local and global. A local grab affects only the grabbing application: events will be reported to other applications as if the grab had never occurred. Grabs are local by default. A global grab locks out all applications on the screen, so that only the given subtree of the grabbing application will be sensitive to pointer events (mouse button presses, mouse button releases, pointer motions, window entries, and window exits). During global grabs the window manager will not receive pointer events either. .PP During local grabs, keyboard events (key presses and key releases) are delivered as usual: the window manager controls which application receives keyboard events, and if they are sent to any window in the grabbing application then they are redirected to the focus window. During a global grab Tk grabs the keyboard so that all keyboard events are always sent to the grabbing application. The \fBfocus\fR command is still used to determine which window in the application receives the keyboard events. The keyboard grab is released when the grab is released. .PP Grabs apply to particular displays. If an application has windows on multiple displays then it can establish a separate grab on each display. The grab on a particular display affects only the windows on that display. It is possible for different applications on a single display to have simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global grab on a given display at once. .PP The \fBgrab\fR command can take any of the following forms: .TP \fBgrab \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR Same as \fBgrab set\fR, described below. .TP \fBgrab current \fR?\fIwindow\fR? If \fIwindow\fR is specified, returns the name of the current grab window in this application for \fIwindow\fR's display, or an empty string if there is no such window. If \fIwindow\fR is omitted, the command returns a list whose elements are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays, or an empty string if the application has no grabs. .TP \fBgrab release \fIwindow\fR Releases the grab on \fIwindow\fR if there is one, otherwise does nothing. Returns an empty string. .TP \fBgrab set \fR?\fB\-global\fR? \fIwindow\fR Sets a grab on \fIwindow\fR. If \fB\-global\fR is specified then the grab is global, otherwise it is local. If a grab was already in effect for this application on \fIwindow\fR's display then it is automatically released. If there is already a grab on \fIwindow\fR and it has the same global/local form as the requested grab, then the command does nothing. Returns an empty string. .TP \fBgrab status \fIwindow\fR Returns \fBnone\fR if no grab is currently set on \fIwindow\fR, \fBlocal\fR if a local grab is set on \fIwindow\fR, and \fBglobal\fR if a global grab is set. .SH WARNING It is very easy to use global grabs to render a display completely unusable (e.g. by setting a grab on a widget which does not respond to events and not providing any mechanism for releasing the grab). Take \fIextreme\fR care when using them! .SH BUGS .PP It took an incredibly complex and gross implementation to produce the simple grab effect described above. Given the current implementation, it is not safe for applications to use the Xlib grab facilities at all except through the Tk grab procedures. If applications try to manipulate X's grab mechanisms directly, things will probably break. .PP If a single process is managing several different Tk applications, only one of those applications can have a local grab for a given display at any given time. If the applications are in different processes, this restriction does not exist. .SH EXAMPLE Set a grab so that only one button may be clicked out of a group. The other buttons are unresponsive to the mouse until the middle button is clicked. .CS pack [button .b1 \-text "Click me! #1" \-command {destroy .b1}] pack [button .b2 \-text "Click me! #2" \-command {destroy .b2}] pack [button .b3 \-text "Click me! #3" \-command {destroy .b3}] \fBgrab\fR .b2 .CE .SH KEYWORDS grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window 07070100047194000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585000001fee0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_radiobutton.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_radiobutton.n,v 1.11.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::radiobutton n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::radiobutton \- Mutually exclusive option widget .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::radiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION \fBttk::radiobutton\fR widgets are used in groups to show or change a set of mutually-exclusive options. Radiobuttons are linked to a Tcl variable, and have an associated value; when a radiobutton is clicked, it sets the variable to its associated value. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-compound \-cursor \-image \-state \-style \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable \-underline \-width .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command A Tcl script to evaluate whenever the widget is invoked. .OP \-value Value Value The value to store in the associated \fI\-variable\fR when the widget is selected. .OP \-variable variable Variable The name of a global variable whose value is linked to the widget. Default value is \fB::selectedButton\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" In addition to the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR commands, radiobuttons support the following additional widget commands: .TP \fIpathname\fB invoke\fR Sets the \fB\-variable\fR to the \fB\-value\fR, selects the widget, and evaluates the associated \fB\-command\fR. Returns the result of the \fB\-command\fR, or the empty string if no \fB\-command\fR is specified. .\" Missing: select, deselect. Useful? .\" Missing: flash. This is definitely not useful. .SH "WIDGET STATES" The widget does not respond to user input if the \fBdisabled\fR state is set. The widget sets the \fBselected\fR state whenever the linked \fB\-variable\fR is set to the widget's \fB\-value\fR, and clears it otherwise. The widget sets the \fBalternate\fR state whenever the linked \fB\-variable\fR is unset. (The \fBalternate\fR state may be used to indicate a .QW tri-state or .QW indeterminate selection.) .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::checkbutton(n), radiobutton(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, button, option 07070100047153000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00002c9b0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/mann/clipboard.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: clipboard.n,v 1.16 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH clipboard n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME clipboard \- Manipulate Tk clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS \fBclipboard \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command provides a Tcl interface to the Tk clipboard, which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism (via the \fB\-selection CLIPBOARD\fR option). In order to copy data into the clipboard, \fBclipboard clear\fR must be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to \fBclipboard append\fR. To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all appends should be completed before returning to the event loop. .PP The first argument to \fBclipboard\fR determines the format of the rest of the arguments and the behavior of the command. The following forms are currently supported: .PP .TP \fBclipboard clear\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? Claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display and removes any previous contents. \fIWindow\fR defaults to .QW . . Returns an empty string. .TP \fBclipboard append\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-format\fR \fIformat\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIdata\fR Appends \fIdata\fR to the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display in the form given by \fItype\fR with the representation given by \fIformat\fR and claims ownership of the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display. .RS .PP \fIType\fR specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned (the desired .QW target for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME; see the Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details. \fIType\fR defaults to STRING. .PP The \fIformat\fR argument specifies the representation that should be used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to STRING. If \fIformat\fR is STRING, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters. If \fIformat\fR is ATOM, then the \fIdata\fR is divided into fields separated by white space; each field is converted to its atom value, and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of the atom name. For any other \fIformat\fR, \fIdata\fR is divided into fields separated by white space and each field is converted to a 32-bit integer; an array of integers is transmitted to the selection requester. Note that strings passed to \fBclipboard append\fR are concatenated before conversion, so the caller must take care to ensure appropriate spacing across string boundaries. All items appended to the clipboard with the same \fItype\fR must have the same \fIformat\fR. .PP The \fIformat\fR argument is needed only for compatibility with clipboard requesters that do not use Tk. If the Tk toolkit is being used to retrieve the CLIPBOARD selection then the value is converted back to a string at the requesting end, so \fIformat\fR is irrelevant. .PP A \fB\-\|\-\fR argument may be specified to mark the end of options: the next argument will always be used as \fIdata\fR. This feature may be convenient if, for example, \fIdata\fR starts with a \fB\-\fR. .RE .TP \fBclipboard get\fR ?\fB\-displayof\fR \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-type\fR \fItype\fR? Retrieve data from the clipboard on \fIwindow\fR's display. \fIWindow\fR defaults to .QW . . \fIType\fR specifies the form in which the data is to be returned and should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME. \fIType\fR defaults to STRING. This command is equivalent to .QW "\fBselection get \-selection CLIPBOARD\fR" . .SH EXAMPLES Get the current contents of the clipboard. .CS if {[catch {\fBclipboard get\fR} contents]} { # There were no clipboard contents at all } .CE .PP Set the clipboard to contain a fixed string. .CS \fBclipboard clear\fR \fBclipboard append\fR "some fixed string" .CE .PP You can put custom data into the clipboard by using a custom \fB\-type\fR option. This is not necessarily portable, but can be very useful. The method of passing Tcl scripts this way is effective, but should be mixed with safe interpreters in production code. .CS # This is a very simple canvas serializer; # it produces a script that recreates the item(s) when executed proc getItemConfig {canvas tag} { set script {} foreach item [$canvas find withtag $tag] { append script {$canvas create } [$canvas type $item] append script { } [$canvas coords $item] { } foreach config [$canvas itemconf $item] { lassign $config name \- \- \- value append script [list $name $value] { } } append script \en } return [string trim $script] } # Set up a binding on a canvas to cut and paste an item set c [canvas .c] pack $c $c create text 150 30 \-text "cut and paste me" bind $c <> { \fBclipboard clear\fR \fBclipboard append \-type\fR TkCanvasItem \e [getItemConfig %W current] # Delete because this is cut, not copy. %W delete current } bind $c <> { catch { set canvas %W eval [\fBclipboard get \-type\fR TkCanvasItem] } } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" interp(n), selection(n) .SH KEYWORDS clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type 07070100047158000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d000072970000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002000000000root/usr/local/man/mann/entry.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: entry.n,v 1.22 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH entry n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME entry \- Create and manipulate entry widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBentry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-highlightthickness \-selectbackground \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectborderwidth \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectforeground \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-takefocus \-font \-insertontime \-textvariable \-foreground \-insertwidth \-xscrollcommand \-highlightbackground \-justify \-highlightcolor \-relief .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-disabledbackground disabledBackground DisabledBackground Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled. If this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used. .OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled. If this option is the empty string, the normal foreground color is used. .OP "\-invalidcommand or \-invcmd" invalidCommand InvalidCommand Specifies a script to eval when \fBvalidateCommand\fR returns 0. Setting it to {} disables this feature (the default). The best use of this option is to set it to \fIbell\fR. See \fBValidation\fR below for more information. .OP \-readonlybackground readonlyBackground ReadonlyBackground Specifies the background color to use when the entry is readonly. If this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used. .OP \-show show Show If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character in the value of this option, such as .QW * . This is useful, for example, if the entry is to be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of three states for the entry: \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, or \fBreadonly\fR. If the entry is readonly, then the value may not be changed using widget commands and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget; the contents of the widget may still be selected. If the entry is disabled, the value may not be changed, no insertion cursor will be displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the entry may be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the \fB\-disabledforeground\fR and \fB\-disabledbackground\fR options. .OP \-validate validate Validate Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR. It defaults to \fBnone\fR. When you want validation, you must explicitly state which mode you wish to use. See \fBValidation\fR below for more. .OP "\-validatecommand or \-vcmd" validateCommand ValidateCommand Specifies a script to eval when you want to validate the input into the entry widget. Setting it to {} disables this feature (the default). This command must return a valid Tcl boolean value. If it returns 0 (or the valid Tcl boolean equivalent) then it means you reject the new edition and it will not occur and the \fBinvalidCommand\fR will be evaluated if it is set. If it returns 1, then the new edition occurs. See \fBValidation\fR below for more information. .OP \-width width Width Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size characters of the widget's font. If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a size just large enough to hold its current text. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into an entry widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the entry such as its colors, font, and relief. The \fBentry\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP An entry is a widget that displays a one-line text string and allows that string to be edited using widget commands described below, which are typically bound to keystrokes and mouse actions. When first created, an entry's string is empty. A portion of the entry may be selected as described below. If an entry is exporting its selection (see the \fBexportSelection\fR option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the selection; entry selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR. Entries also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the input focus. When an entry has the input focus it displays an \fIinsertion cursor\fR to indicate where new characters will be inserted. .PP Entries are capable of displaying strings that are too long to fit entirely within the widget's window. In this case, only a portion of the string will be displayed; commands described below may be used to change the view in the window. Entries use the standard \fBxScrollCommand\fR mechanism for interacting with scrollbars (see the description of the \fBxScrollCommand\fR option for details). They also support scanning, as described below. .SH VALIDATION .PP Validation works by setting the \fBvalidateCommand\fR option to a script which will be evaluated according to the \fBvalidate\fR option as follows: .PP .IP \fBnone\fR 10 Default. This means no validation will occur. .IP \fBfocus\fR 10 \fBvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry receives or loses focus. .IP \fBfocusin\fR 10 \fBvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry receives focus. .IP \fBfocusout\fR 10 \fBvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry loses focus. .IP \fBkey\fR 10 \fBvalidateCommand\fR will be called when the entry is edited. .IP \fBall\fR 10 \fBvalidateCommand\fR will be called for all above conditions. .PP It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fBvalidateCommand\fR and \fBinvalidCommand\fR, just as you would in a \fBbind\fR script. The following substitutions are recognized: .PP .IP \fB%d\fR 5 Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR, 0 for \fBdelete\fR, or \-1 for focus, forced or textvariable validation. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 Index of char string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1. .IP \fB%P\fR 5 The value of the entry if the edit is allowed. If you are configuring the entry widget to have a new textvariable, this will be the value of that textvariable. .IP \fB%s\fR 5 The current value of entry prior to editing. .IP \fB%S\fR 5 The text string being inserted/deleted, if any, {} otherwise. .IP \fB%v\fR 5 The type of validation currently set. .IP \fB%V\fR 5 The type of validation that triggered the callback (key, focusin, focusout, forced). .IP \fB%W\fR 5 The name of the entry widget. .PP In general, the \fBtextVariable\fR and \fBvalidateCommand\fR can be dangerous to mix. Any problems have been overcome so that using the \fBvalidateCommand\fR will not interfere with the traditional behavior of the entry widget. Using the \fBtextVariable\fR for read-only purposes will never cause problems. The danger comes when you try set the \fBtextVariable\fR to something that the \fBvalidateCommand\fR would not accept, which causes \fBvalidate\fR to become \fInone\fR (the \fBinvalidCommand\fR will not be triggered). The same happens when an error occurs evaluating the \fBvalidateCommand\fR. .PP Primarily, an error will occur when the \fBvalidateCommand\fR or \fBinvalidCommand\fR encounters an error in its script while evaluating or \fBvalidateCommand\fR does not return a valid Tcl boolean value. The \fBvalidate\fR option will also set itself to \fBnone\fR when you edit the entry widget from within either the \fBvalidateCommand\fR or the \fBinvalidCommand\fR. Such editions will override the one that was being validated. If you wish to edit the entry widget (for example set it to {}) during validation and still have the \fBvalidate\fR option set, you should include the command .CS after idle {%W config \-validate %v} .CE in the \fBvalidateCommand\fR or \fBinvalidCommand\fR (whichever one you were editing the entry widget from). It is also recommended to not set an associated \fBtextVariable\fR during validation, as that can cause the entry widget to become out of sync with the \fBtextVariable\fR. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBentry\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName subcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fISubcommand\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. .SS INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for entries take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's string, in any of the following ways: .TP 12 \fInumber\fR Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first character in the string. .TP 12 \fBanchor\fR Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the \fBselect from\fR and \fBselect adjust\fR widget commands. .TP 12 \fBend\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string. This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length of the entry's string. .TP 12 \fBinsert\fR Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the insertion cursor. .TP 12 \fBsel.first\fR Indicates the first character in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .TP 12 \fBsel.last\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .TP 12 \fB@\fInumber\fR In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the entry's window; the character spanning that x-coordinate is used. For example, .QW \fB@0\fR indicates the left-most character in the window. .LP Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. .QW \fBe\fR or .QW \fBsel.f\fR . In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the nearest legal value. .SS SUBCOMMANDS .PP The following commands are possible for entry widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the character given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character (in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the character, in pixels. The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBentry\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Delete one or more elements of the entry. \fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and \fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last one to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1, i.e. a single character is deleted. This command returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR Returns the entry's string. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR Insert the characters of \fIstring\fR just before the character indicated by \fIindex\fR. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan\fR \fIoption args\fR This command is used to implement scanning on entries. It has two forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBscan mark \fIx\fR Records \fIx\fR and the current view in the entry window; used in conjunction with later \fBscan dragto\fR commands. Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget. It returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBscan dragto \fIx\fR This command computes the difference between its \fIx\fR argument and the \fIx\fR argument to the last \fBscan mark\fR command for the widget. It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the difference in x-coordinates. This command is typically associated with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of dragging the entry at high speed through the window. The return value is an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselection adjust \fIindex\fR Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by \fIindex\fR, and adjust that end of the selection to be at \fIindex\fR (i.e. including but not going beyond \fIindex\fR). The other end of the selection is made the anchor point for future \fBselect to\fR commands. If the selection is not currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to include the characters between \fIindex\fR and the most recent selection anchor point, inclusive. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection from \fIindex\fR Set the selection anchor point to just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Does not change the selection. Returns an empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection present\fR Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry, 0 if nothing is selected. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR Sets the selection to include the characters starting with the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just before \fIend\fR. If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection to \fIindex\fR If \fIindex\fR is before the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from \fIindex\fR up to but not including the anchor point. If \fIindex\fR is the same as the anchor point, do nothing. If \fIindex\fR is after the anchor point, set the selection to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including \fIindex\fR. The anchor point is determined by the most recent \fBselect from\fR or \fBselect adjust\fR command in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then a new selection is created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget. Returns an empty string. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR This command is used to force an evaluation of the \fBvalidateCommand\fR independent of the conditions specified by the \fBvalidate\fR option. This is done by temporarily setting the \fBvalidate\fR option to \fBall\fR. It returns 0 or 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them the following default behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or .QW _ characters, or any single character other than these. .IP [1] Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget. Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse. .IP [2] Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse and positions the insertion cursor at the end of the word. Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting of whole words. .IP [3] Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the entry and positions the insertion cursor at the end of the line. .IP [4] The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 1 while the Shift key is down; this will adjust the end of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button 1 was pressed. If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection will be adjusted in units of whole words. .IP [5] Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the insertion cursor in the entry without affecting the selection. .IP [6] If any normal printing characters are typed in an entry, they are inserted at the point of the insertion cursor. .IP [7] The view in the entry can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2. If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection is copied into the entry at the position of the mouse cursor. .IP [8] If the mouse is dragged out of the entry on the left or right sides while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side where the mouse left the window). .IP [9] The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the left or right; they also clear any selection in the entry and set the selection anchor. If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character. Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor by words and also extend the selection. Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively. Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right, respectively. .IP [10] The Home key, or Control-a, will move the insertion cursor to the beginning of the entry and clear any selection in the entry. Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the entry and also extends the selection to that point. .IP [11] The End key, or Control-e, will move the insertion cursor to the end of the entry and clear any selection in the entry. Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection to that point. .IP [12] The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position of the insertion cursor. They do not affect the current selection. Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously. .IP [13] Control-/ selects all the text in the entry. .IP [14] Control-\e clears any selection in the entry. .IP [15] The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection. .IP [16] The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes the selection. If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect. .IP [17] The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the insertion cursor. .IP [18] The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the entry. If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [19] The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one in the entry. If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of the insertion cursor. .IP [20] Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [21] Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [22] Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion cursor. .IP [23] Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of the insertion cursor. .PP If the entry is disabled using the \fB\-state\fR option, then the entry's view can still be adjusted and text in the entry can still be selected, but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will take place except if the entry is linked to a variable using the \fB\-textvariable\fR option, in which case any changes to the variable are reflected by the entry whatever the value of its \fB\-state\fR option. .PP The behavior of entries can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::entry(n) .SH KEYWORDS entry, widget 07070100047155000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00002d7a0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/console.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2001 Donal K. Fellows '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: console.n,v 1.11 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH console n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME console \- Control the console on systems without a real console .SH SYNOPSIS \fBconsole\fR \fIsubcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The console window is a replacement for a real console to allow input and output on the standard I/O channels on platforms that do not have a real console. It is implemented as a separate interpreter with the Tk toolkit loaded, and control over this interpreter is given through the \fBconsole\fR command. The behaviour of the console window is defined mainly through the contents of the \fIconsole.tcl\fR file in the Tk library. Except for TkAqua, this command is not available when Tk is loaded into a tclsh interpreter with .QW "\fBpackage require Tk\fR" , as a conventional terminal is expected to be present in that case. In TkAqua, this command is ony available when stdin is \fB/dev/null\fR (as is the case e.g. when the application embedding Tk is started from the Mac OS X Finder). .PP .TP \fBconsole eval \fIscript\fR Evaluate the \fIscript\fR argument as a Tcl script in the console interpreter. The normal interpreter is accessed through the \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole hide\fR Hide the console window from view. Precisely equivalent to withdrawing the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole show\fR Display the console window. Precisely equivalent to deiconifying the \fB.\fR window in the console interpreter. .TP \fBconsole title \fR?\fIstring\fR? Query or modify the title of the console window. If \fIstring\fR is not specified, queries the title of the console window, and sets the title of the console window to \fIstring\fR otherwise. Precisely equivalent to using the \fBwm title\fR command in the console interpreter. .SH "ACCESS TO THE MAIN INTERPRETER" .PP The \fBconsoleinterp\fR command in the console interpreter allows scripts to be evaluated in the main interpreter. It supports two subcommands: \fBeval\fR and \fBrecord\fR. .PP .TP \fBconsoleinterp eval \fIscript\fR Evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main interpreter. .TP \fBconsoleinterp record \fIscript\fR Records and evaluates \fIscript\fR as a Tcl script at the global level in the main interpreter as if \fIscript\fR had been typed in at the console. .SH "ADDITIONAL TRAP CALLS" .PP There are several additional commands in the console interpreter that are called in response to activity in the main interpreter. \fIThese are documented here for completeness only; they form part of the internal implementation of the console and are likely to change or be modified without warning.\fR .PP Output to the console from the main interpreter via the stdout and stderr channels is handled by invoking the \fBtk::ConsoleOutput\fR command in the console interpreter with two arguments. The first argument is the name of the channel being written to, and the second argument is the string being written to the channel (after encoding and end-of-line translation processing has been performed.) .PP When the \fB.\fR window of the main interpreter is destroyed, the \fBtk::ConsoleExit\fR command in the console interpreter is called (assuming the console interpreter has not already been deleted itself, that is.) .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP The default script creates a console window (implemented using a text widget) that has the following behaviour: .IP [1] Pressing the tab key inserts a TAB character (as defined by the Tcl \et escape.) .IP [2] Pressing the return key causes the current line (if complete by the rules of \fBinfo complete\fR) to be passed to the main interpreter for evaluation. .IP [3] Pressing the delete key deletes the selected text (if any text is selected) or the character to the right of the cursor (if not at the end of the line.) .IP [4] Pressing the backspace key deletes the selected text (if any text is selected) or the character to the left of the cursor (of not at the start of the line.) .IP [5] Pressing either Control+A or the home key causes the cursor to go to the start of the line (but after the prompt, if a prompt is present on the line.) .IP [6] Pressing either Control+E or the end key causes the cursor to go to the end of the line. .IP [7] Pressing either Control+P or the up key causes the previous entry in the command history to be selected. .IP [8] Pressing either Control+N or the down key causes the next entry in the command history to be selected. .IP [9] Pressing either Control+B or the left key causes the cursor to move one character backward as long as the cursor is not at the prompt. .IP [10] Pressing either Control+F or the right key causes the cursor to move one character forward. .IP [11] Pressing F9 rebuilds the console window by destroying all its children and reloading the Tcl script that defined the console's behaviour. .PP Most other behaviour is the same as a conventional text widget except for the way that the \fI<>\fR event is handled identically to the \fI<>\fR event. .SH EXAMPLE Not all platforms have the \fBconsole\fR command, so debugging code often has the following code fragment in it so output produced by \fBputs\fR can be seen while during development: .CS catch {\fBconsole show\fR} .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" destroy(n), fconfigure(n), history(n), interp(n), puts(n), text(n), wm(n) .SH KEYWORDS console, interpreter, window, interactive, output channels 07070100047168000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e00002fc10000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/message.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: message.n,v 1.9 2008/01/30 12:00:39 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH message n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME message \- Create and manipulate message widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBmessage\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-anchor \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-font \-foreground \-highlightbackground \-highlightcolor \-highlightthickness \-padx \-pady \-relief \-takefocus \-text \-textvariable .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-aspect aspect Aspect Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired aspect ratio for the text. The aspect ratio is specified as 100*width/height. 100 means the text should be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on. Used to choose line length for text if \fBwidth\fR option is not specified. Defaults to 150. .OP \-justify justify Justify Specifies how to justify lines of text. Must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR. Defaults to \fBleft\fR. This option works together with the \fBanchor\fR, \fBaspect\fR, \fBpadX\fR, \fBpadY\fR, and \fBwidth\fR options to provide a variety of arrangements of the text within the window. The \fBaspect\fR and \fBwidth\fR options determine the amount of screen space needed to display the text. The \fBanchor\fR, \fBpadX\fR, and \fBpadY\fR options determine where this rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the \fBjustify\fR option determines how each line is displayed within that rectangular region. For example, suppose \fBanchor\fR is \fBe\fR and \fBjustify\fR is \fBleft\fR, and that the message window is much larger than needed for the text. The text will be displayed so that the left edges of all the lines line up and the right edge of the longest line is \fBpadX\fR from the right side of the window; the entire text block will be centered in the vertical span of the window. .OP \-width width Width Specifies the length of lines in the window. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If this option has a value greater than zero then the \fBaspect\fR option is ignored and the \fBwidth\fR option determines the line length. If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then the \fBaspect\fR option determines the line length. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a message widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the message such as its colors, font, text, and initial relief. The \fBmessage\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A message is a widget that displays a textual string. A message widget has three special features. First, it breaks up its string into lines in order to produce a given aspect ratio for the window. The line breaks are chosen at word boundaries wherever possible (if not even a single word would fit on a line, then the word will be split across lines). Newline characters in the string will force line breaks; they can be used, for example, to leave blank lines in the display. .PP The second feature of a message widget is justification. The text may be displayed left-justified (each line starts at the left side of the window), centered on a line-by-line basis, or right-justified (each line ends at the right side of the window). .PP The third feature of a message widget is that it handles control characters and non-printing characters specially. Tab characters are replaced with enough blank space to line up on the next 8-character boundary. Newlines cause line breaks. Other control characters (ASCII code less than 0x20) and characters not defined in the font are displayed as a four-character sequence \fB\ex\fIhh\fR where \fIhh\fR is the two-digit hexadecimal number corresponding to the character. In the unusual case where the font does not contain all of the characters in .QW 0123456789abcdef\ex then control characters and undefined characters are not displayed at all. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmessage\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for message widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmessage\fR command. .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP When a new message is created, it has no default event bindings: messages are intended for output purposes only. .SH BUGS .PP Tabs do not work very well with text that is centered or right-justified. The most common result is that the line is justified wrong. .SH "SEE ALSO" label(n) .SH KEYWORDS message, widget 07070100047184000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f000023bb0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tkvars.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: tkvars.n,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tkvars n 4.1 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tkvars \- Variables used or set by Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The following Tcl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times in its execution: .TP 15 \fBtk_library\fR This variable holds the file name for a directory containing a library of Tcl scripts related to Tk. These scripts include an initialization file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up, plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors for widgets. The initial value of \fBtcl_library\fR is set when Tk is added to an interpreter; this is done by searching several different directories until one is found that contains an appropriate Tk startup script. If the \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then the directory it names is checked first. If \fBTK_LIBRARY\fR is not set or does not refer to an appropriate directory, then Tk checks several other directories based on a compiled-in default location, the location of the Tcl library directory, the location of the binary containing the application, and the current working directory. The variable can be modified by an application to switch to a different library. .TP \fBtk_patchLevel\fR Contains a decimal integer giving the current patch level for Tk. The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk. .TP \fBtk::Priv\fR This variable is an array containing several pieces of information that are private to Tk. The elements of \fBtk::Priv\fR are used by Tk library procedures and default bindings. They should not be accessed by any code outside Tk. .TP \fBtk_strictMotif\fR This variable is set to zero by default. If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards. For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them. .TP \fBtk_textRedraw\fR .TP \fBtk_textRelayout\fR These variables are set by text widgets when they have debugging turned on. The values written to these variables can be used to test or debug text widget operations. These variables are mostly used by Tk's test suite. .TP 15 \fBtk_version\fR Tk sets this variable in the interpreter for each application. The variable holds the current version number of the Tk library in the form \fImajor\fR.\fIminor\fR. \fIMajor\fR and \fIminor\fR are integers. The major version number increases in any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible (i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to work with the new release). The minor version number increases with each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the major version number changes. .SH KEYWORDS variables, version, text 0707010004718f000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c5850000022a50000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_labelframe.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2005 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_labelframe.n,v 1.9.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::labelframe n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::labelframe \- Container widget with optional label .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::labelframe\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget is a container used to group other widgets together. It has an optional label, which may be a plain text string or another widget. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .\" XXX: Currently included, but may go away: .\" XXX: .OP -borderwidth borderWidth BorderWidth .\" XXX: The desired width of the widget border. Default is theme-dependent. .\" XXX: .OP -relief relief Relief .\" XXX: One of the standard Tk border styles: .\" XXX: \fBflat\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBridge\fR, .\" XXX: \fBsolid\fR, or \fBsunken\fR. .\" XXX: Default is theme-dependent. .OP \-labelanchor labelAnchor LabelAnchor Specifies where to place the label. Allowed values are (clockwise from the top upper left corner): \fBnw\fR, \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBen\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBes\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR,\fBsw\fR, \fBws\fR, \fBw\fR and \fBwn\fR. The default value is theme-dependent. .\" Alternate explanation: The first character must be one of n, s, e, or w .\" and specifies which side the label should be placed on; .\" the remaining characters specify how the label is aligned on that side. .\" NOTE: Now allows other values as well; leave this undocumented for now .OP \-text text Text Specifies the text of the label. .OP \-underline underline Underline If set, specifies the integer index (0-based) of a character to underline in the text string. The underlined character is used for mnemonic activation. Mnemonic activation for a \fBttk::labelframe\fR sets the keyboard focus to the first child of the \fBttk::labelframe\fR widget. .OP \-padding padding Padding Additional padding to include inside the border. .OP \-labelwidget labelWidget LabelWidget The name of a widget to use for the label. If set, overrides the \fB\-text\fR option. The \fB\-labelwidget\fR must be a child of the \fBlabelframe\fR widget or one of the \fBlabelframe\fR's ancestors, and must belong to the same top-level widget as the \fBlabelframe\fR. .OP \-width width Width If specified, the widget's requested width in pixels. .OP \-height height Height If specified, the widget's requested height in pixels. (See \fIttk::frame(n)\fR for further notes on \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR). .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" Supports the standard widget commands \fBconfigure\fR, \fBcget\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), ttk::frame(n), labelframe(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, frame, container, label, groupbox 0707010004716a000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e00005e8d0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/options.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: options.n,v 1.15.2.1 2008/07/26 16:19:04 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH options n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME options \- Standard options supported by widgets .BE .SH DESCRIPTION This manual entry describes the common configuration options supported by widgets in the Tk toolkit. Every widget does not necessarily support every option (see the manual entries for individual widgets for a list of the standard options supported by that widget), but if a widget does support an option with one of the names listed below, then the option has exactly the effect described below. .PP In the descriptions below, .QW "Command-Line Name" refers to the switch used in class commands and \fBconfigure\fR widget commands to set this value. For example, if an option's command-line switch is \fB\-foreground\fR and there exists a widget \fB.a.b.c\fR, then the command .CS \&\fB.a.b.c\0\0configure\0\0\-foreground black\fR .CE may be used to specify the value \fBblack\fR for the option in the widget \fB.a.b.c\fR. Command-line switches may be abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous. .QW "Database Name" refers to the option's name in the option database (e.g. in .Xdefaults files). .QW "Database Class" refers to the option's class value in the option database. .OP \-activebackground activeBackground Foreground Specifies background color to use when drawing active elements. An element (a widget or portion of a widget) is active if the mouse cursor is positioned over the element and pressing a mouse button will cause some action to occur. If strict Motif compliance has been requested by setting the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable, this option will normally be ignored; the normal background color will be used instead. For some elements on Windows and Macintosh systems, the active color will only be used while mouse button 1 is pressed over the element. .OP \-activeborderwidth activeBorderWidth BorderWidth Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border drawn around active elements. See above for definition of active elements. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons). .OP \-activeforeground activeForeground Background Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements. See above for definition of active elements. .OP \-anchor anchor Anchor Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap) is to be displayed in the widget. Must be one of the values \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, \fBnw\fR means display the information such that its top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget. .OP "\-background or \-bg" background Background Specifies the normal background color to use when displaying the widget. .OP \-bitmap bitmap Bitmap Specifies a bitmap to display in the widget, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. The exact way in which the bitmap is displayed may be affected by other options such as \fBanchor\fR or \fBjustify\fR. Typically, if this option is specified then it overrides other options that specify a textual value to display in the widget but this is controlled by the \fBcompound\fR option; the \fBbitmap\fR option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable a text display. In widgets that support both \fBbitmap\fR and \fBimage\fR options, \fBimage\fR will usually override \fBbitmap\fR. .OP "\-borderwidth or \-bd" borderWidth BorderWidth Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border to draw around the outside of the widget (if such a border is being drawn; the \fBrelief\fR option typically determines this). The value may also be used when drawing 3-D effects in the interior of the widget. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-cursor cursor Cursor Specifies the mouse cursor to be used for the widget. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. In addition, if an empty string is specified, it indicates that the widget should defer to its parent for cursor specification. .OP \-compound compound Compound Specifies if the widget should display text and bitmaps/images at the same time, and if so, where the bitmap/image should be placed relative to the text. Must be one of the values \fBnone\fR, \fBbottom\fR, \fBtop\fR, \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. For example, the (default) value \fBnone\fR specifies that the bitmap or image should (if defined) be displayed instead of the text, the value \fBleft\fR specifies that the bitmap or image should be displayed to the left of the text, and the value \fBcenter\fR specifies that the bitmap or image should be displayed on top of the text. .OP \-disabledforeground disabledForeground DisabledForeground Specifies foreground color to use when drawing a disabled element. If the option is specified as an empty string (which is typically the case on monochrome displays), disabled elements are drawn with the normal foreground color but they are dimmed by drawing them with a stippled fill pattern. .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection Specifies whether or not a selection in the widget should also be the X selection. The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR, such as \fBtrue\fR, \fBfalse\fR, \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, \fByes\fR, or \fBno\fR. If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval requests when it has a selection. The default is usually for widgets to export selections. .OP \-font font Font Specifies the font to use when drawing text inside the widget. The value may have any of the forms described in the \fBfont\fR manual page under \fBFONT DESCRIPTION\fR. .OP "\-foreground or \-fg" foreground Foreground Specifies the normal foreground color to use when displaying the widget. .OP \-highlightbackground highlightBackground HighlightBackground Specifies the color to display in the traversal highlight region when the widget does not have the input focus. .OP \-highlightcolor highlightColor HighlightColor Specifies the color to use for the traversal highlight rectangle that is drawn around the widget when it has the input focus. .OP \-highlightthickness highlightThickness HighlightThickness Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the highlight rectangle to draw around the outside of the widget when it has the input focus. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If the value is zero, no focus highlight is drawn around the widget. .OP \-image image Image Specifies an image to display in the widget, which must have been created with the \fBimage create\fR command. Typically, if the \fBimage\fR option is specified then it overrides other options that specify a bitmap or textual value to display in the widget, though this is controlled by the \fBcompound\fR option; the \fBimage\fR option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable a bitmap or text display. .OP \-insertbackground insertBackground Foreground Specifies the color to use as background in the area covered by the insertion cursor. This color will normally override either the normal background for the widget (or the selection background if the insertion cursor happens to fall in the selection). .OP \-insertborderwidth insertBorderWidth BorderWidth Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border to draw around the insertion cursor. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-insertofftime insertOffTime OffTime Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain .QW off in each blink cycle. If this option is zero then the cursor does not blink: it is on all the time. .OP \-insertontime insertOnTime OnTime Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain .QW on in each blink cycle. .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth Specifies a value indicating the total width of the insertion cursor. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If a border has been specified for the insertion cursor (using the \fBinsertBorderWidth\fR option), the border will be drawn inside the width specified by the \fBinsertWidth\fR option. .OP \-jump jump Jump For widgets with a slider that can be dragged to adjust a value, such as scrollbars, this option determines when notifications are made about changes in the value. The option's value must be a boolean of the form accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR. If the value is false, updates are made continuously as the slider is dragged. If the value is true, updates are delayed until the mouse button is released to end the drag; at that point a single notification is made (the value .QW jumps rather than changing smoothly). .OP \-justify justify Justify When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a widget, this option determines how the lines line up with each other. Must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR. \fBLeft\fR means that the lines' left edges all line up, \fBcenter\fR means that the lines' centers are aligned, and \fBright\fR means that the lines' right edges line up. .OP \-orient orient Orient For widgets that can lay themselves out with either a horizontal or vertical orientation, such as scrollbars, this option specifies which orientation should be used. Must be either \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR or an abbreviation of one of these. .OP \-padx padX Pad Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to request for the widget in the X-direction. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will add this amount to the width it would normally need (as determined by the width of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space to the left and/or right of what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. .OP \-pady padY Pad Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to request for the widget in the Y-direction. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will add this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by the height of the things displayed in the widget); if the geometry manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra internal space above and/or below what it displays inside. Most widgets only use this option for padding text: if they are displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding options. .OP \-relief relief Relief Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget. Acceptable values are \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBflat\fR, \fBridge\fR, \fBsolid\fR, and \fBgroove\fR. The value indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative to its exterior; for example, \fBraised\fR means the interior of the widget should appear to protrude from the screen, relative to the exterior of the widget. .OP \-repeatdelay repeatDelay RepeatDelay Specifies the number of milliseconds a button or key must be held down before it begins to auto-repeat. Used, for example, on the up- and down-arrows in scrollbars. .OP \-repeatinterval repeatInterval RepeatInterval Used in conjunction with \fBrepeatDelay\fR: once auto-repeat begins, this option determines the number of milliseconds between auto-repeats. .OP \-selectbackground selectBackground Foreground Specifies the background color to use when displaying selected items. .OP \-selectborderwidth selectBorderWidth BorderWidth Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border to draw around selected items. The value may have any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-selectforeground selectForeground Background Specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected items. .OP \-setgrid setGrid SetGrid Specifies a boolean value that determines whether this widget controls the resizing grid for its top-level window. This option is typically used in text widgets, where the information in the widget has a natural size (the size of a character) and it makes sense for the window's dimensions to be integral numbers of these units. These natural window sizes form a grid. If the \fBsetGrid\fR option is set to true then the widget will communicate with the window manager so that when the user interactively resizes the top-level window that contains the widget, the dimensions of the window will be displayed to the user in grid units and the window size will be constrained to integral numbers of grid units. See the section \fBGRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT\fR in the \fBwm\fR manual entry for more details. .OP \-takefocus takeFocus TakeFocus Determines whether the window accepts the focus during keyboard traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab). Before setting the focus to a window, the traversal scripts consult the value of the \fBtakeFocus\fR option. A value of \fB0\fR means that the window should be skipped entirely during keyboard traversal. \fB1\fR means that the window should receive the input focus as long as it is viewable (it and all of its ancestors are mapped). An empty value for the option means that the traversal scripts make the decision about whether or not to focus on the window: the current algorithm is to skip the window if it is disabled, if it has no key bindings, or if it is not viewable. If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space), and evaluate the resulting string as a Tcl script. The script must return \fB0\fR, \fB1\fR, or an empty string: a \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR value specifies whether the window will receive the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision described above. Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by the Tcl scripts that implement traversal: the widget implementations ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you redefine the keyboard traversal scripts. .OP \-text text Text Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget. The way in which the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as \fBanchor\fR or \fBjustify\fR. .OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable Specifies the name of a variable. The value of the variable is a text string to be displayed inside the widget; if the variable value changes then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value. The way in which the string is displayed in the widget depends on the particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as \fBanchor\fR or \fBjustify\fR. .OP \-troughcolor troughColor Background Specifies the color to use for the rectangular trough areas in widgets such as scrollbars and scales. This option is ignored for scrollbars on Windows (native widget does not recognize this option). .OP \-underline underline Underline Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the widget. This option is used by the default bindings to implement keyboard traversal for menu buttons and menu entries. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the widget, 1 to the next character, and so on. .OP \-wraplength wrapLength WrapLength For widgets that can perform word-wrapping, this option specifies the maximum line length. Lines that would exceed this length are wrapped onto the next line, so that no line is longer than the specified length. The value may be specified in any of the standard forms for screen distances. If this value is less than or equal to 0 then no wrapping is done: lines will break only at newline characters in the text. .OP \-xscrollcommand xScrollCommand ScrollCommand Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with horizontal scrollbars. When the view in the widget's window changes (or whenever anything else occurs that could change the display in a scrollbar, such as a change in the total size of the widget's contents), the widget will generate a Tcl command by concatenating the scroll command and two numbers. Each of the numbers is a fraction between 0 and 1, which indicates a position in the document. 0 indicates the beginning of the document, 1 indicates the end, .333 indicates a position one third the way through the document, and so on. The first fraction indicates the first information in the document that is visible in the window, and the second fraction indicates the information just after the last portion that is visible. The command is then passed to the Tcl interpreter for execution. Typically the \fBxScrollCommand\fR option consists of the path name of a scrollbar widget followed by .QW set , e.g. .QW ".x.scrollbar set" : this will cause the scrollbar to be updated whenever the view in the window changes. If this option is not specified, then no command will be executed. .OP \-yscrollcommand yScrollCommand ScrollCommand Specifies the prefix for a command used to communicate with vertical scrollbars. This option is treated in the same way as the \fBxScrollCommand\fR option, except that it is used for vertical scrollbars and is provided by widgets that support vertical scrolling. See the description of \fBxScrollCommand\fR for details on how this option is used. .SH "SEE ALSO" colors, cursors, font .SH KEYWORDS class, name, standard option, switch 07070100047167000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e000039830000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/man/mann/menubutton.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: menubutton.n,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH menubutton n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME menubutton \- Create and manipulate menubutton widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBmenubutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-cursor \-image \-underline \-compound \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-direction direction Height Specifies where the menu is going to be popup up. \fBabove\fR tries to pop the menu above the menubutton. \fBbelow\fR tries to pop the menu below the menubutton. \fBleft\fR tries to pop the menu to the left of the menubutton. \fBright\fR tries to pop the menu to the right of the menu button. \fBflush\fR pops the menu directly over the menubutton. In the case of \fBabove\fR or \fBbelow\fR, the direction will be reversed if the menu would show offscreen. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the menubutton. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in lines of text. If this option is not specified, the menubutton's desired height is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn The value must be a proper boolean value. If it is true then a small indicator rectangle will be displayed on the right side of the menubutton and the default menu bindings will treat this as an option menubutton. If false then no indicator will be displayed. .OP \-menu menu MenuName Specifies the path name of the menu associated with this menubutton. The menu must be a child of the menubutton. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of three states for the menubutton: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In normal state the menubutton is displayed using the \fBforeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options. The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the menubutton. In active state the menubutton is displayed using the \fBactiveForeground\fR and \fBactiveBackground\fR options. Disabled state means that the menubutton should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate the widget and will ignore mouse button presses. In this state the \fBdisabledForeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options determine how the button is displayed. .OP \-width width Width Specifies a desired width for the menubutton. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in characters. If this option is not specified, the menubutton's desired width is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .BE .SH INTRODUCTION .PP The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a menubutton widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the menubutton such as its colors, font, text, and initial relief. The \fBmenubutton\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A menubutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap, or image and is associated with a menu widget. If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines or if wrapping occurs because of the \fBwrapLength\fR option) and one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the \fBunderline\fR option. In normal usage, pressing mouse button 1 over the menubutton causes the associated menu to be posted just underneath the menubutton. If the mouse is moved over the menu before releasing the mouse button, the button release causes the underlying menu entry to be invoked. When the button is released, the menu is unposted. .PP Menubuttons are typically organized into groups called menu bars that allow scanning: if the mouse button is pressed over one menubutton (causing it to post its menu) and the mouse is moved over another menubutton in the same menu bar without releasing the mouse button, then the menu of the first menubutton is unposted and the menu of the new menubutton is posted instead. .PP There are several interactions between menubuttons and menus; see the \fBmenu\fR manual entry for information on various menu configurations, such as pulldown menus and option menus. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBmenubutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for menubutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBmenubutton\fR command. .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for menubuttons that give them the following default behavior: .IP [1] A menubutton activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves it. .IP [2] Pressing mouse button 1 over a menubutton posts the menubutton: its relief changes to raised and its associated menu is posted under the menubutton. If the mouse is dragged down into the menu with the button still down, and if the mouse button is then released over an entry in the menu, the menubutton is unposted and the menu entry is invoked. .IP [3] If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then released over that menubutton, the menubutton stays posted: you can still move the mouse over the menu and click button 1 on an entry to invoke it. Once a menu entry has been invoked, the menubutton unposts itself. .IP [4] If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then dragged over some other menubutton, the original menubutton unposts itself and the new menubutton posts. .IP [5] If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and released outside any menubutton or menu, the menubutton unposts without invoking any menu entry. .IP [6] When a menubutton is posted, its associated menu claims the input focus to allow keyboard traversal of the menu and its submenus. See the \fBmenu\fR manual entry for details on these bindings. .IP [7] If the \fBunderline\fR option has been specified for a menubutton then keyboard traversal may be used to post the menubutton: Alt+\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is the underlined character (or its lower-case or upper-case equivalent), may be typed in any window under the menubutton's toplevel to post the menubutton. .IP [8] The F10 key may be typed in any window to post the first menubutton under its toplevel window that is not disabled. .IP [9] If a menubutton has the input focus, the space and return keys post the menubutton. .PP If the menubutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the menubutton is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of menubuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::menubutton(n), menu(n) .SH KEYWORDS menubutton, widget 07070100047165000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e00001c090000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002000000000root/usr/local/man/mann/lower.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: lower.n,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:57 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH lower n 3.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME lower \- Change a window's position in the stacking order .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlower \fIwindow \fR?\fIbelowThis\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP If the \fIbelowThis\fR argument is omitted then the command lowers \fIwindow\fR so that it is below all of its siblings in the stacking order (it will be obscured by any siblings that overlap it and will not obscure any siblings). If \fIbelowThis\fR is specified then it must be the path name of a window that is either a sibling of \fIwindow\fR or the descendant of a sibling of \fIwindow\fR. In this case the \fBlower\fR command will insert \fIwindow\fR into the stacking order just below \fIbelowThis\fR (or the ancestor of \fIbelowThis\fR that is a sibling of \fIwindow\fR); this could end up either raising or lowering \fIwindow\fR. .SH "SEE ALSO" raise .SH KEYWORDS lower, obscure, stacking order 0707010004718a000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585000005f0a0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_entry.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Scriptics Corporation. '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" SOURCE: entry.n, r1.12 '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_entry.n,v 1.11 2008/01/29 15:38:00 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::entry n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::entry \- Editable text field widget .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::entry\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP An \fBttk::entry\fR widget displays a one-line text string and allows that string to be edited by the user. The value of the string may be linked to a Tcl variable with the \fB\-textvariable\fR option. Entry widgets support horizontal scrolling with the standard \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option and \fBxview\fR widget command. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-style \-takefocus \-xscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-exportselection exportSelection ExportSelection A boolean value specifying whether or not a selection in the widget should be linked to the X selection. If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval requests when it has a selection. .\" MAYBE: .OP \-font font Font .\" MAYBE: .OP \-foreground foreground Foreground .\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertbackground insertBackground Foreground .\" MAYBE: .OP \-insertwidth insertWidth InsertWidth .OP \-invalidcommand invalidCommand InvalidCommand A script template to evaluate whenever the \fBvalidateCommand\fR returns 0. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below for more information. .OP \-justify justify Justify Specifies how the text is aligned within the entry widget. One of \fBleft\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBright\fR. .\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectbackground selectBackground Foreground .\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectborderwidth selectBorderWidth BorderWidth .\" MAYBE: .OP \-selectforeground selectForeground Background .OP \-show show Show If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry are not displayed in the window. Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as the first character in the value of this option, such as .QW * or a bullet. This is useful, for example, if the entry is to be used to enter a password. If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents of the entry. .OP \-state state State Compatibility option; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR for details. Specifies one of three states for the entry, \fBnormal\fR, \fBdisabled\fR, or \fBreadonly\fR. See \fBWIDGET STATES\fR, below. .OP \-textvariable textVariable Variable Specifies the name of a variable whose value is linked to the entry widget's contents. Whenever the variable changes value, the widget's contents are updated, and vice versa. .OP \-validate validate Validate Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: \fBnone\fR, \fBfocus\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, \fBkey\fR, or \fBall\fR. Default is \fBnone\fR, meaning that validation is disabled. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below. .OP \-validatecommand validateCommand ValidateCommand A script template to evaluate whenever validation is triggered. If set to the empty string (the default), validation is disabled. The script must return a boolean value. See \fBVALIDATION\fR below. .OP \-width width Width Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window, in average-size characters of the widget's font. .\" Not in ttk: If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a .\" Not in ttk: size just large enough to hold its current text. .SH NOTES A portion of the entry may be selected as described below. If an entry is exporting its selection (see the \fBexportSelection\fR option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the selection; entry selections are available as type \fBSTRING\fR. Entries also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the input focus. When an entry has the input focus it displays an \fIinsert cursor\fR to indicate where new characters will be inserted. .PP Entries are capable of displaying strings that are too long to fit entirely within the widget's window. In this case, only a portion of the string will be displayed; commands described below may be used to change the view in the window. Entries use the standard \fBxScrollCommand\fR mechanism for interacting with scrollbars (see the description of the \fBxScrollCommand\fR option for details). .SH "INDICES" Many of the \fBentry\fR widget commands take one or more indices as arguments. An index specifies a particular character in the entry's string, in any of the following ways: .IP \fInumber\fR Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds to the first character in the string. .IP \fB@\fInumber\fR In this form, \fInumber\fR is treated as an x-coordinate in the entry's window; the character spanning that x-coordinate is used. For example, .QW \fB@0\fR indicates the left-most character in the window. .IP \fBend\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string. This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length of the entry's string. .IP \fBinsert\fR Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the insert cursor. .IP \fBsel.first\fR Indicates the first character in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .IP \fBsel.last\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection. It is an error to use this form if the selection is not in the entry window. .LP Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. .QW \fBe\fR or .QW \fBsel.f\fR . In general, out-of-range indices are automatically rounded to the nearest legal value. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The following commands are possible for entry widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBbbox \fIindex\fR Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the character given by \fIindex\fR. The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character (in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give the width and height of the character, in pixels. The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR. See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Modify or query widget options. See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBdelete \fIfirst \fR?\fIlast\fR? Delete one or more elements of the entry. \fIFirst\fR is the index of the first character to delete, and \fIlast\fR is the index of the character just after the last one to delete. If \fIlast\fR is not specified it defaults to \fIfirst\fR+1, i.e. a single character is deleted. This command returns the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBget\fR Returns the entry's string. .TP \fIpathName \fBicursor \fIindex\fR Arrange for the insert cursor to be displayed just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Returns the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR Returns the name of the element at position \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, or the empty string if the coordinates are outside the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBindex\fI index\fR Returns the numerical index corresponding to \fIindex\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinsert \fIindex string\fR Insert \fIstring\fR just before the character indicated by \fIindex\fR. Returns the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR? Test the widget state. See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection \fIoption arg\fR This command is used to adjust the selection within an entry. It has several forms, depending on \fIoption\fR: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBselection clear\fR Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget. If the selection is not in this widget then the command has no effect. Returns the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection present\fR Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry, 0 if nothing is selected. .TP \fIpathName \fBselection range \fIstart\fR \fIend\fR Sets the selection to include the characters starting with the one indexed by \fIstart\fR and ending with the one just before \fIend\fR. If \fIend\fR refers to the same character as \fIstart\fR or an earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state. See \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBvalidate\fR Force revalidation, independent of the conditions specified by the \fB\-validate\fR option. Returns 0 if validation fails, 1 if it succeeds. Sets or clears the \fBinvalid\fR state accordingly. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the text in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR Returns a list containing two elements. Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span that is visible in the window. For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right. These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the \fB\-xscrollcommand\fR option. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview\fR \fIindex\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by \fIindex\fR is displayed at the left edge of the window. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview moveto\fI fraction\fR Adjusts the view in the window so that the character \fIfraction\fR of the way through the text appears at the left edge of the window. \fIFraction\fR must be a fraction between 0 and 1. .TP \fIpathName \fBxview scroll \fInumber what\fR This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to \fInumber\fR and \fIwhat\fR. \fINumber\fR must be an integer. \fIWhat\fR must be either \fBunits\fR or \fBpages\fR. '\" or an abbreviation of one of these, but we don't document that. If \fIwhat\fR is \fBunits\fR, the view adjusts left or right by \fInumber\fR average-width characters on the display; if it is \fBpages\fR then the view adjusts by \fInumber\fR screenfuls. If \fInumber\fR is negative then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive then characters farther to the right become visible. .RE .SH VALIDATION The \fB\-validate\fR, \fB\-validatecommand\fR, and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR options are used to enable entry widget validation. .SS "VALIDATION MODES" There are two main validation modes: \fIprevalidation\fR, in which the \fB\-validatecommand\fR is evaluated prior to each edit and the return value is used to determine whether to accept or reject the change; and \fIrevalidation\fR, in which the \fB\-validatecommand\fR is evaluated to determine whether the current value is valid. .PP The \fB\-validate\fR option determines when validation occurs; it may be set to any of the following values: .IP \fBnone\fR Default. This means validation will only occur when specifically requested by the \fBvalidate\fR widget command. .IP \fBkey\fR The entry will be prevalidated prior to each edit (specifically, whenever the \fBinsert\fR or \fBdelete\fR widget commands are called). If prevalidation fails, the edit is rejected. .IP \fBfocus\fR The entry is revalidated when the entry receives or loses focus. .IP \fBfocusin\fR The entry is revalidated when the entry receives focus. .IP \fBfocusout\fR The entry is revalidated when the entry loses focus. .IP \fBall\fR Validation is performed for all above conditions. .PP The \fB\-invalidcommand\fR is evaluated whenever the \fB\-validatecommand\fR returns a false value. .PP The \fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fB\-invalidcommand\fR may modify the entry widget's value via the widget \fBinsert\fR or \fBdelete\fR commands, or by setting the linked \fB\-textvariable\fR. If either does so during prevalidation, then the edit is rejected regardless of the value returned by the \fB\-validatecommand\fR. .PP If \fB\-validatecommand\fR is empty (the default), validation always succeeds. .SS "VALIDATION SCRIPT SUBSTITUTIONS" It is possible to perform percent substitutions on the \fB\-validatecommand\fR and \fBinvalidCommand\fR, just as in a \fBbind\fR script. The following substitutions are recognized: .IP \fB%d\fR Type of action: 1 for \fBinsert\fR prevalidation, 0 for \fBdelete\fR prevalidation, or \-1 for revalidation. .IP \fB%i\fR Index of character string to be inserted/deleted, if any, otherwise \-1. .IP \fB%P\fR In prevalidation, the new value of the entry if the edit is accepted. In revalidation, the current value of the entry. .IP \fB%s\fR The current value of entry prior to editing. .IP \fB%S\fR The text string being inserted/deleted, if any, {} otherwise. .IP \fB%v\fR The current value of the \fB\-validate\fR option. .IP \fB%V\fR The validation condition that triggered the callback (\fBkey\fR, \fBfocusin\fR, \fBfocusout\fR, or \fBforced\fR). .IP \fB%W\fR The name of the entry widget. .SS "DIFFERENCES FROM TK ENTRY WIDGET VALIDATION" .IP \(bu The standard Tk entry widget automatically disables validation (by setting \fB\-validate\fR to \fBnone\fR) if the \fB\-validatecommand\fR or \fB\-invalidcommand\fR modifies the entry's value. The Tk themed entry widget only disables validation if one of the validation scripts raises an error, or if \fB\-validatecommand\fR does not return a valid boolean value. (Thus, it is not necessary to reenable validation after modifying the entry value in a validation script). .IP \(bu The standard entry widget invokes validation whenever the linked \fB\-textvariable\fR is modified; the Tk themed entry widget does not. .SH "DEFAULT BINDINGS" The entry widget's default bindings enable the following behavior. In the descriptions below, .QW word refers to a contiguous group of letters, digits, or .QW _ characters, or any single character other than these. .IP \(bu Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insert cursor just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget. Dragging with mouse button 1 down strokes out a selection between the insert cursor and the character under the mouse. .IP \(bu Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse and positions the insert cursor at the end of the word. Dragging after a double click strokes out a selection consisting of whole words. .IP \(bu Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the entry and positions the insert cursor at the end of the line. .IP \(bu The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 1 while the Shift key is down. If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection will be adjusted in units of whole words. .IP \(bu Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the insert cursor in the entry without affecting the selection. .IP \(bu If any normal printing characters are typed in an entry, they are inserted at the point of the insert cursor. .IP \(bu The view in the entry can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2. If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection is copied into the entry at the position of the mouse cursor. .IP \(bu If the mouse is dragged out of the entry on the left or right sides while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side where the mouse left the window). .IP \(bu The Left and Right keys move the insert cursor one character to the left or right; they also clear any selection in the entry. If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character. Control-Left and Control-Right move the insert cursor by words, and Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insert cursor by words and also extend the selection. Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively. .IP \(bu The Home key and Control-a move the insert cursor to the beginning of the entry and clear any selection in the entry. Shift-Home moves the insert cursor to the beginning of the entry and extends the selection to that point. .IP \(bu The End key and Control-e move the insert cursor to the end of the entry and clear any selection in the entry. Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection to that point. .IP \(bu Control-/ selects all the text in the entry. .IP \(bu Control-\e clears any selection in the entry. .IP \(bu The standard Tk <>, <>, <>, and <> virtual events operate on the selection in the expected manner. .IP \(bu The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the entry. If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of the insert cursor. .IP \(bu The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one in the entry. If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of the insert cursor. .IP \(bu Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insert cursor. .IP \(bu Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion cursor. .SH "WIDGET STATES" In the \fBdisabled\fR state, the entry cannot be edited and the text cannot be selected. In the \fBreadonly\fR state, no insert cursor is displayed and the entry cannot be edited (specifically: the \fBinsert\fR and \fBdelete\fR commands have no effect). The \fBdisabled\fR state is the same as \fBreadonly\fR, and in addition text cannot be selected. .PP Note that changes to the linked \fB\-textvariable\fR will still be reflected in the entry, even if it is disabled or readonly. .PP Typically, the text is .QW grayed-out in the \fBdisabled\fR state, and a different background is used in the \fBreadonly\fR state. .PP The entry widget sets the \fBinvalid\fR state if revalidation fails, and clears it whenever validation succeeds. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), entry(n) .SH KEYWORDS entry, widget, text field 0707010004715e000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d000063440000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/grid.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: grid.n,v 1.20.2.1 2009/07/11 07:30:24 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH grid n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME grid \- Geometry manager that arranges widgets in a grid .SH SYNOPSIS \fBgrid \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBgrid\fR command is used to communicate with the grid geometry manager that arranges widgets in rows and columns inside of another window, called the geometry master (or master window). The \fBgrid\fR command can have any of several forms, depending on the \fIoption\fR argument: .TP \fBgrid \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? If the first argument to \fBgrid\fR is suitable as the first slave argument to \fBgrid configure\fR, either a window name (any value starting with \fB.\fR) or one of the characters \fBx\fR or \fB^\fR (see the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section below), then the command is processed in the same way as \fBgrid configure\fR. .VS 8.5 .TP \fBgrid anchor \fImaster\fR ?\fIanchor\fR? The anchor value controls how to place the grid within the master when no row/column has any weight. See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details. The default \fIanchor\fR is \fInw\fR. .VE 8.5 .TP \fBgrid bbox \fImaster\fR ?\fIcolumn row\fR? ?\fIcolumn2 row2\fR? With no arguments, the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned. The return value consists of 4 integers. The first two are the pixel offset from the master window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid, also in pixels. If a single \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR is specified on the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the top left cell is numbered from zero. If both \fIcolumn\fR and \fIrow\fR arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns indicated is returned. .TP \fBgrid columnconfigure \fImaster index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? Query or set the column properties of the \fIindex\fR column of the geometry master, \fImaster\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as a list of column indices to which the configuration options will operate on. .VS 8.5 Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR the options apply to all columns currently occupied be slave windows. For a window name, that window must be a slave of this master and the options apply to all columns currently occupied be the slave. .VE 8.5 The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units, that will be permitted for this column. The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value) sets the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among columns. A weight of zero (0) indicates the column will not deviate from its requested size. A column whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a column of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout. The \fB\-uniform\fR option, when a non-empty value is supplied, places the column in a \fIuniform group\fR with other columns that have the same value for \fB\-uniform\fR. The space for columns belonging to a uniform group is allocated so that their sizes are always in strict proportion to their \fB\-weight\fR values. See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details. The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of .QW "\-option value" pairs. .TP \fBgrid configure \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? The arguments consist of the names of one or more slave windows followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the slaves. The characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR and \fB^\fR, can be specified instead of a window name to alter the default location of a \fIslave\fR, as described in the \fBRELATIVE PLACEMENT\fR section, below. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-column \fIn\fR Insert the slave so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth column in the grid. Column numbers start with 0. If this option is not supplied, then the slave is arranged just to the right of previous slave specified on this call to \fBgrid\fR, or column .QW 0 if it is the first slave. For each \fBx\fR that immediately precedes the \fIslave\fR, the column position is incremented by one. Thus the \fBx\fR represents a blank column for this row in the grid. .TP \fB\-columnspan \fIn\fR Insert the slave so that it occupies \fIn\fR columns in the grid. The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a \fB\-\fR, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately following \fB\-\fR. .TP \fB\-in \fIother\fR Insert the slave(s) in the master window given by \fIother\fR. The default is the first slave's parent window. .TP \fB\-ipadx \fIamount\fR The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal internal padding to leave on each side of the slave(s). This is space is added inside the slave(s) border. The \fIamount\fR must be a valid screen distance, such as \fB2\fR or \fB.5c\fR. It defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-ipady \fIamount\fR The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical internal padding to leave on the top and bottom of the slave(s). This space is added inside the slave(s) border. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. .TP \fB\-padx \fIamount\fR The \fIamount\fR specifies how much horizontal external padding to leave on each side of the slave(s), in screen units. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for left and right separately. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. This space is added outside the slave(s) border. .TP \fB\-pady \fIamount\fR The \fIamount\fR specifies how much vertical external padding to leave on the top and bottom of the slave(s), in screen units. \fIAmount\fR may be a list of two values to specify padding for top and bottom separately. The \fIamount\fR defaults to 0. This space is added outside the slave(s) border. .TP \fB\-row \fIn\fR Insert the slave so that it occupies the \fIn\fRth row in the grid. Row numbers start with 0. If this option is not supplied, then the slave is arranged on the same row as the previous slave specified on this call to \fBgrid\fR, or the first unoccupied row if this is the first slave. .TP \fB\-rowspan \fIn\fR Insert the slave so that it occupies \fIn\fR rows in the grid. The default is one row. If the next \fBgrid\fR command contains \fB^\fR characters instead of \fIslaves\fR that line up with the columns of this \fIslave\fR, then the \fBrowspan\fR of this \fIslave\fR is extended by one. .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR If a slave's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the slave within its cell. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. The string can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the slave will .QW stick to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are specified, the slave will be stretched to fill the entire height (or width) of its cavity. The \fBsticky\fR option subsumes the combination of \fB\-anchor\fR and \fB\-fill\fR that is used by \fBpack\fR. The default is .QW "" , which causes the slave to be centered in its cavity, at its requested size. .LP If any of the slaves are already managed by the geometry manager then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather than receiving default values. .RE .TP \fBgrid forget \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its master and unmaps their windows. The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial default settings are used. .TP \fBgrid info \fIslave\fR Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of the slave given by \fIslave\fR in the same option-value form that might be specified to \fBgrid configure\fR. The first two elements of the list are .QW "\fB\-in \fImaster\fR" where \fImaster\fR is the slave's master. .TP \fBgrid location \fImaster x y\fR Given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR values in screen units relative to the master window, the column and row number at that \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR location is returned. For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, \fB\-1\fR is returned. .TP \fBgrid propagate \fImaster\fR ?\fIboolean\fR? If \fIboolean\fR has a true boolean value such as \fB1\fR or \fBon\fR then propagation is enabled for \fImaster\fR, which must be a window name (see \fBGEOMETRY PROPAGATION\fR below). If \fIboolean\fR has a false boolean value then propagation is disabled for \fImaster\fR. In either of these cases an empty string is returned. If \fIboolean\fR is omitted then the command returns \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled for \fImaster\fR. Propagation is enabled by default. .TP \fBgrid rowconfigure \fImaster index \fR?\fI\-option value...\fR? Query or set the row properties of the \fIindex\fR row of the geometry master, \fImaster\fR. The valid options are \fB\-minsize\fR, \fB\-weight\fR, \fB\-uniform\fR and \fB\-pad\fR. If one or more options are provided, then \fIindex\fR may be given as a list of row indices to which the configuration options will operate on. .VS 8.5 Indices may be integers, window names or the keyword \fIall\fR. For \fIall\fR the options apply to all rows currently occupied be slave windows. For a window name, that window must be a slave of this master and the options apply to all rows currently occupied be the slave. .VE 8.5 The \fB\-minsize\fR option sets the minimum size, in screen units, that will be permitted for this row. The \fB\-weight\fR option (an integer value) sets the relative weight for apportioning any extra spaces among rows. A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested size. A row whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a row of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout. The \fB\-uniform\fR option, when a non-empty value is supplied, places the row in a \fIuniform group\fR with other rows that have the same value for \fB\-uniform\fR. The space for rows belonging to a uniform group is allocated so that their sizes are always in strict proportion to their \fB\-weight\fR values. See \fBTHE GRID ALGORITHM\fR below for further details. The \fB\-pad\fR option specifies the number of screen units that will be added to the largest window contained completely in that row when the grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window. If only an option is specified, with no value, the current value of that option is returned. If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings are returned in a list of .QW "-option value" pairs. .TP \fBgrid remove \fIslave \fR?\fIslave ...\fR? Removes each of the \fIslave\fRs from grid for its master and unmaps their windows. The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager. However, the configuration options for that window are remembered, so that if the slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous values are retained. .TP \fBgrid size \fImaster\fR Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for \fImaster\fR. The size is determined either by the \fIslave\fR occupying the largest row or column, or the largest column or row with a \fBminsize\fR, \fBweight\fR, or \fBpad\fR that is non-zero. .TP \fBgrid slaves \fImaster\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR? If no options are supplied, a list of all of the slaves in \fImaster\fR are returned, most recently manages first. \fIOption\fR can be either \fB\-row\fR or \fB\-column\fR which causes only the slaves in the row (or column) specified by \fIvalue\fR to be returned. .SH "RELATIVE PLACEMENT" .PP The \fBgrid\fR command contains a limited set of capabilities that permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column information for each slave. This permits slaves to be rearranged, added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and column information. When no column or row information is specified for a \fIslave\fR, default values are chosen for \fBcolumn\fR, \fBrow\fR, \fBcolumnspan\fR and \fBrowspan\fR at the time the \fIslave\fR is managed. The values are chosen based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the \fIslave\fR relative to other \fIslave\fRs in the same grid command, and the presence of the characters \fB\-\fR, \fBx\fR, and \fB^\fR in \fBgrid\fR command where \fIslave\fR names are normally expected. .RS .TP \fB\-\fR This increases the columnspan of the \fIslave\fR to the left. Several \fB\-\fR's in a row will successively increase the columnspan. A \fB\-\fR may not follow a \fB^\fR or a \fBx\fR, nor may it be the first \fIslave\fR argument to \fBgrid configure\fR. .TP \fBx\fR This leaves an empty column between the \fIslave\fR on the left and the \fIslave\fR on the right. .TP \fB^\fR This extends the \fBrowspan\fR of the \fIslave\fR above the \fB^\fR's in the grid. The number of \fB^\fR's in a row must match the number of columns spanned by the \fIslave\fR above it. .RE .SH "THE GRID ALGORITHM" .PP The grid geometry manager lays out its slaves in three steps. In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the slaves is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made of the master window to become that size. In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size of the master. If the sizes are different, then spaces is added to or taken away from the layout as needed. For the final step, each slave is positioned in its row(s) and column(s) based on the setting of its \fIsticky\fR flag. .PP To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager first looks at all slaves whose columnspan and rowspan values are one, and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the \fIminsize\fR for that row or column, or the sum of the \fIpad\fRding plus the size of the largest slave, whichever is greater. After that the rows or columns in each uniform group adapt to each other. Then the slaves whose rowspans or columnspans are greater than one are examined. If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size in order to accommodate these slaves, then extra space is added to each row or column in the group according to its \fIweight\fR. For each group whose weights are all zero, the additional space is apportioned equally. .PP When multiple rows or columns belong to a uniform group, the space allocated to them is always in proportion to their weights. (A weight of zero is considered to be 1.) In other words, a row or column configured with \fB\-weight 1 \-uniform a\fR will have exactly the same size as any other row or column configured with \fB\-weight 1 \-uniform a\fR. A row or column configured with \fB\-weight 2 \-uniform b\fR will be exactly twice as large as one that is configured with \fB\-weight 1 \-uniform b\fR. .PP More technically, each row or column in the group will have a size equal to \fIk*weight\fR for some constant \fIk\fR. The constant \fIk\fR is chosen so that no row or column becomes smaller than its minimum size. For example, if all rows or columns in a group have the same weight, then each row or column will have the same size as the largest row or column in the group. .PP .VS 8.5 For masters whose size is larger than the requested layout, the additional space is apportioned according to the row and column weights. If all of the weights are zero, the layout is placed within its master according to the \fIanchor\fR value. For masters whose size is smaller than the requested layout, space is taken away from columns and rows according to their weights. However, once a column or row shrinks to its minsize, its weight is taken to be zero. If more space needs to be removed from a layout than would be permitted, as when all the rows or columns are at their minimum sizes, the layout is placed and clipped according to the \fIanchor\fR value. .VE 8.5 .SH "GEOMETRY PROPAGATION" .PP The grid geometry manager normally computes how large a master must be to just exactly meet the needs of its slaves, and it sets the requested width and height of the master to these dimensions. This causes geometry information to propagate up through a window hierarchy to a top-level window so that the entire sub-tree sizes itself to fit the needs of the leaf windows. However, the \fBgrid propagate\fR command may be used to turn off propagation for one or more masters. If propagation is disabled then grid will not set the requested width and height of the master window. This may be useful if, for example, you wish for a master window to have a fixed size that you specify. .SH "RESTRICTIONS ON MASTER WINDOWS" .PP The master for each slave must either be the slave's parent (the default) or a descendant of the slave's parent. This restriction is necessary to guarantee that the slave can be placed over any part of its master that is visible without danger of the slave being clipped by its parent. In addition, all slaves in one call to \fBgrid\fR must have the same master. .SH "STACKING ORDER" .PP If the master for a slave is not its parent then you must make sure that the slave is higher in the stacking order than the master. Otherwise the master will obscure the slave and it will appear as if the slave has not been managed correctly. The easiest way to make sure the slave is higher than the master is to create the master window first: the most recently created window will be highest in the stacking order. .SH CREDITS .PP The \fBgrid\fR command is based on ideas taken from the \fIGridBag\fR geometry manager written by Doug. Stein, and the \fBblt_table\fR geometry manager, written by George Howlett. .SH EXAMPLES A toplevel window containing a text widget and two scrollbars: .CS # Make the widgets toplevel .t text .t.txt \-wrap none \-xscroll {.t.h set} \-yscroll {.t.v set} scrollbar .t.v \-orient vertical \-command {.t.txt yview} scrollbar .t.h \-orient horizontal \-command {.t.txt xview} # Lay them out \fBgrid\fR .t.txt .t.v \-sticky nsew \fBgrid\fR .t.h \-sticky nsew # Tell the text widget to take all the extra room \fBgrid rowconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1 \fBgrid columnconfigure\fR .t .t.txt \-weight 1 .CE .PP Three widgets of equal width, despite their different .QW natural widths: .CS button .b \-text "Foo" entry .e \-variable foo label .l \-text "This is a fairly long piece of text" \fBgrid\fR .b .e .l \-sticky ew \fBgrid columnconfigure\fR . "all" \-uniform allTheSame .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" pack(n), place(n) .SH KEYWORDS geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack 0707010004719b000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c5851000026730000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_vsapi.n'\" -*- nroff -*- '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Pat Thoyts '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_vsapi.n,v 1.4.2.2 2009/05/14 00:53:04 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk_vsapi n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk_vsapi \- Define a Microsoft Visual Styles element .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::style element create \fIname\fR \fBvsapi\fR \fIclassName\fR \fIpartId\fR ?\fIstateMap\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION The \fIvsapi\fR element factory creates a new element in the current theme whose visual appearance is drawn using the Microsoft Visual Styles API which is reponsible for the themed styles on Windows XP and Vista. This factory permits any of the Visual Styles parts to be declared as ttk elements that can then be included in a style layout to modify the appearance of ttk widgets. .PP \fIclassName\fR and \fIpartId\fR are required parameters and specify the Visual Styles class and part as given in the Microsoft documentation. The \fIstateMap\fR may be provided to map ttk states to Visual Styles API states (see \fBSTATE MAP\fR). .SH "OPTIONS" Valid \fIoptions\fR are: .TP \fB\-padding\fR \fIpadding\fR Specify the element's interior padding. \fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively. This option may not be mixed with any other options. .TP \fB\-margins\fR \fIpadding\fR Specifies the elements exterior padding. \fIpadding\fR is a list of up to four integers specifying the left, top, right and bottom padding quantities respectively. This option may not be mixed with any other options. .TP \fB\-width\fR \fIwidth\fR Specifies the height for the element. If this option is set then the Visual Styles API will not be queried for the recommended size or the part. If this option is set then \fI-height\fR should also be set. The \fI-width\fR and \fI-height\fR options cannot be mixed with the \fI-padding\fR or \fI-margins\fR options. .TP \fB\-height\fR \fIheight\fR Specifies the height of the element. See the comments for \fI-width\fR. .SH "STATE MAP" The \fIstateMap\fR parameter is a list of ttk states and the corresponding Visual Styles API state value. This permits the element appearence to respond to changes in the widget state such as becoming active or being pressed. The list should be as described for the \fBttk::style map\fR command but note that the last pair in the list should be the default state and is typically and empty list and 1. Unfortunately all the Visual Styles parts have different state values and these must be looked up either in the Microsoft documentation or more likely in the header files. The original header to use was \fItmschema.h\fR but in more recent versions of the Windows Development Kit this is \fIvssym32.h\fR. .PP If no \fIstateMap\fR parameter is given there is an implicit default map of {{} 1} .SH "EXAMPLE" Create a correctly themed close button by changing the layout of a \fBttk::button\fR(n). This uses the WINDOW part WP_SMALLCLOSEBUTTON and as documented the states CBS_DISABLED, CBS_HOT, CBS_NORMAL and CBS_PUSHED are mapped from ttk states. .CS ttk::style element create smallclose vsapi WINDOW 19 \\ {disabled 4 pressed 3 active 2 {} 1} ttk::style layout CloseButton {CloseButton.smallclose -sticky news} pack [ttk::button .close -style CloseButton] .CE .PP Change the appearence of a \fBttk::checkbutton\fR(n) to use the Explorer pin part EBP_HEADERPIN. .CS ttk::style element create pin vsapi EXPLORERBAR 3 { {pressed !selected} 3 {active !selected} 2 {pressed selected} 6 {active selected} 5 {selected} 4 {} 1 } ttk::style layout Explorer.Pin {Explorer.Pin.pin -sticky news} pack [ttk::checkbutton .pin -style Explorer.Pin] .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::intro(n), ttk::widget(n), ttk::style(n), ttk_image(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" style, theme, appearance, windows 07070100047198000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585000001e6b0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_sizegrip.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2006 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_sizegrip.n,v 1.15.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::sizegrip n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::sizegrip \- Bottom-right corner resize widget .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::sizegrip\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::sizegrip\fR widget (also known as a \fIgrow box\fR) allows the user to resize the containing toplevel window by pressing and dragging the grip. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-state \-style \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" Sizegrip widgets support the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR methods. No other widget methods are used. .SH "PLATFORM-SPECIFIC NOTES" On Mac OSX, toplevel windows automatically include a built-in size grip by default. Adding a \fBttk::sizegrip\fR there is harmless, since the built-in grip will just mask the widget. .SH EXAMPLES .PP Using pack: .CS pack [ttk::frame $top.statusbar] \-side bottom \-fill x pack [\fBttk::sizegrip\fR $top.statusbar.grip] \-side right \-anchor se .CE .PP Using grid: .CS grid [\fBttk::sizegrip\fR $top.statusbar.grip] \e \-row $lastRow \-column $lastColumn \-sticky se # ... optional: add vertical scrollbar in $lastColumn, # ... optional: add horizontal scrollbar in $lastRow .CE .SH "BUGS" If the containing toplevel's position was specified relative to the right or bottom of the screen (e.g., .QW "\fBwm geometry ... \fIw\fBx\fIh\fB\-\fIx\fB\-\fIy\fR" instead of .QW "\fBwm geometry ... \fIw\fBx\fIh\fB+\fIx\fB+\fIy\fR" ), the sizegrip widget will not resize the window. .PP \fBttk::sizegrip\fR widgets only support .QW southeast resizing. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, sizegrip, grow box 0707010004719a000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c5850000054e60000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_treeview.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_treeview.n,v 1.17 2008/01/29 15:38:00 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::treeview n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::treeview \- hierarchical multicolumn data display widget .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::treeview\fR \fIpathname \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION The \fBttk::treeview\fR widget displays a hierarchical collection of items. Each item has a textual label, an optional image, and an optional list of data values. The data values are displayed in successive columns after the tree label. .PP The order in which data values are displayed may be controlled by setting the \fB\-displaycolumns\fR widget option. The tree widget can also display column headings. Columns may be accessed by number or by symbolic names listed in the \fB\-columns\fR widget option; see \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR. .PP Each item is identified by a unique name. The widget will generate item IDs if they are not supplied by the caller. There is a distinguished root item, named \fB{}\fR. The root item itself is not displayed; its children appear at the top level of the hierarchy. .PP Each item also has a list of \fItags\fR, which can be used to associate event bindings with individual items and control the appearance of the item. .\" .PP .\" @@@HERE: describe selection, focus item .PP Treeview widgets support horizontal and vertical scrolling with the standard \fB\-\fR[\fBxy\fR]\fBscrollcommand\fR options and [\fBxy\fR]\fBview\fR widget commands. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-takefocus \-style \-xscrollcommand \-yscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-columns columns Columns A list of column identifiers, specifying the number of columns and their names. .\"X: This is a read-only option; it may only be set when the widget is created. .OP \-displaycolumns displayColumns DisplayColumns A list of column identifiers (either symbolic names or integer indices) specifying which data columns are displayed and the order in which they appear, or the string \fB#all\fP. .RS .PP If set to \fB#all\fP (the default), all columns are shown in the order given. .RE .OP \-height height Height Specifies the number of rows which should be visible. Note: the requested width is determined from the sum of the column widths. .OP \-padding padding Padding Specifies the internal padding for the widget. The padding is a list of up to four length specifications; see \fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj()\fR for details. .OP \-selectmode selectMode SelectMode Controls how the built-in class bindings manage the selection. One of \fBextended\fR, \fBbrowse\fR, or \fBnone\fR. .RS .PP If set to \fBextended\fR (the default), multiple items may be selected. If \fBbrowse\fR, only a single item will be selected at a time. If \fBnone\fR, the selection will not be changed. .PP Note that application code and tag bindings can set the selection however they wish, regardless of the value of \fB\-selectmode\fR. .RE .OP \-show show Show A list containing zero or more of the following values, specifying which elements of the tree to display. .RS .IP \fBtree\fR Display tree labels in column #0. .IP \fBheadings\fR Display the heading row. .PP The default is \fBtree headings\fR, i.e., show all elements. .PP \fBNOTE:\fR Column #0 always refers to the tree column, even if \fB\-show tree\fR is not specified. .RE .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .TP \fIpathname \fBbbox\fR \fIitem\fR ?\fIcolumn\fR? Returns the bounding box (relative to the treeview widget's window) of the specified \fIitem\fR in the form \fIx y width height\fR. If \fIcolumn\fR is specified, returns the bounding box of that cell. If the \fIitem\fR is not visible (i.e., if it is a descendant of a closed item or is scrolled offscreen), returns the empty list. .TP \fIpathname \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the specified \fIoption\fR; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBchildren\fR \fIitem\fR ?\fInewchildren\fR? If \fInewchildren\fR is not specified, returns the list of children belonging to \fIitem\fR. .RS .PP If \fInewchildren\fR is specified, replaces \fIitem\fR's child list with \fInewchildren\fR. Items in the old child list not present in the new child list are detached from the tree. None of the items in \fInewchildren\fR may be an ancestor of \fIitem\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBcolumn\fR \fIcolumn\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR? Query or modify the options for the specified \fIcolumn\fR. If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of option/value pairs. If a single \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that option. Otherwise, the options are updated with the specified values. The following options may be set on each column: .RS .TP \fB\-id \fIname\fR The column name. This is a read-only option. For example, [\fI$pathname \fBcolumn #\fIn \fB\-id\fR] returns the data column associated with display column #\fIn\fR. .TP \fB\-anchor\fR Specifies how the text in this column should be aligned with respect to the cell. One of \fBn\fR, \fBne\fR, \fBe\fR, \fBse\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBsw\fR, \fBw\fR, \fBnw\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. .TP \fB\-minwidth\fR The minimum width of the column in pixels. The treeview widget will not make the column any smaller than \fB\-minwidth\fR when the widget is resized or the user drags a column separator. .TP \fB\-stretch\fR Specifies whether or not the column's width should be adjusted when the widget is resized. .TP \fB\-width \fIw\fR The width of the column in pixels. Default is something reasonable, probably 200 or so. .PP Use \fIpathname column #0\fR to configure the tree column. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Modify or query widget options; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBdelete\fR \fIitemList\fR Deletes each of the items in \fIitemList\fR and all of their descendants. The root item may not be deleted. See also: \fBdetach\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBdetach\fR \fIitemList\fR Unlinks all of the specified items in \fIitemList\fR from the tree. The items and all of their descendants are still present and may be reinserted at another point in the tree but will not be displayed. The root item may not be detached. See also: \fBdelete\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBexists \fIitem\fR Returns 1 if the specified \fIitem\fR is present in the tree, 0 otherwise. .TP \fIpathname \fBfocus \fR?\fIitem\fR? If \fIitem\fR is specified, sets the focus item to \fIitem\fR. Otherwise, returns the current focus item, or \fB{}\fR if there is none. .\" Need: way to clear the focus item. {} works for this... .TP \fIpathname \fBheading\fR \fIcolumn\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR? Query or modify the heading options for the specified \fIcolumn\fR. Valid options are: .RS .TP \fB\-text \fItext\fR The text to display in the column heading. .TP \fB\-image \fIimageName\fR Specifies an image to display to the right of the column heading. .TP \fB\-anchor \fIanchor\fR Specifies how the heading text should be aligned. One of the standard Tk anchor values. .TP \fB\-command \fIscript\fR A script to evaluate when the heading label is pressed. .PP Use \fIpathname heading #0\fR to configure the tree column heading. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify \fIcomponent x y\fR Returns a description of the specified \fIcomponent\fR under the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, or the empty string if no such \fIcomponent\fR is present at that position. The following subcommands are supported: .RS .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify row\fR \fIx y\fR Returns the item ID of the item at position \fIy\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBidentify column\fR \fIx y\fR Returns the data column identifier of the cell at position \fIx\fR. The tree column has ID \fB#0\fR. .PP See \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR for a discussion of display columns and data columns. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBindex \fIitem\fR Returns the integer index of \fIitem\fR within its parent's list of children. .TP \fIpathname \fBinsert\fR \fIparent\fR \fIindex\fR ?\fB\-id \fIid\fR? \fIoptions...\fR Creates a new item. \fIparent\fR is the item ID of the parent item, or the empty string \fB{}\fR to create a new top-level item. \fIindex\fR is an integer, or the value \fBend\fR, specifying where in the list of \fIparent\fR's children to insert the new item. If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero, the new node is inserted at the beginning; if \fIindex\fR is greater than or equal to the current number of children, it is inserted at the end. If \fB\-id\fR is specified, it is used as the item identifier; \fIid\fR must not already exist in the tree. Otherwise, a new unique identifier is generated. .RS .PP \fIpathname \fBinsert\fR returns the item identifier of the newly created item. See \fBITEM OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBinstate \fIstatespec\fR ?\fIscript\fR? Test the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBitem\fR \fIitem\fR ?\fI\-option \fR?\fIvalue \-option value...\fR? Query or modify the options for the specified \fIitem\fR. If no \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns a dictionary of option/value pairs. If a single \fI\-option\fR is specified, returns the value of that option. Otherwise, the item's options are updated with the specified values. See \fBITEM OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .TP \fIpathname \fBmove \fIitem parent index\fR Moves \fIitem\fR to position \fIindex\fR in \fIparent\fR's list of children. It is illegal to move an item under one of its descendants. .RS .PP If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero, \fIitem\fR is moved to the beginning; if greater than or equal to the number of children, it is moved to the end. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBnext \fIitem\fR Returns the identifier of \fIitem\fR's next sibling, or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is the last child of its parent. .TP \fIpathname \fBparent \fIitem\fR Returns the ID of the parent of \fIitem\fR, or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is at the top level of the hierarchy. .TP \fIpathname \fBprev \fIitem\fR Returns the identifier of \fIitem\fR's previous sibling, or \fB{}\fR if \fIitem\fR is the first child of its parent. .TP \fIpathname \fBsee\fR \fIitem\fR Ensure that \fIitem\fR is visible: sets all of \fIitem\fR's ancestors to \fB\-open true\fR, and scrolls the widget if necessary so that \fIitem\fR is within the visible portion of the tree. .TP \fIpathname \fBselection\fR ?\fIselop\fR \fIitemList\fR? If \fIselop\fR is not specified, returns the list of selected items. Otherwise, \fIselop\fR is one of the following: .RS .TP \fIpathname \fBselection set \fIitemList\fR \fIitemList\fR becomes the new selection. .TP \fIpathname \fBselection add \fIitemList\fR Add \fIitemList\fR to the selection .TP \fIpathname \fBselection remove \fIitemList\fR Remove \fIitemList\fR from the selection .TP \fIpathname \fBselection toggle \fIitemList\fR Toggle the selection state of each item in \fIitemList\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathname \fBset\fR \fIitem\fR ?\fIcolumn\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? With one argument, returns a dictionary of column/value pairs for the specified \fIitem\fR. With two arguments, returns the current value of the specified \fIcolumn\fR. With three arguments, sets the value of column \fIcolumn\fR in item \fIitem\fR to the specified \fIvalue\fR. See also \fBCOLUMN IDENTIFIERS\fR. .TP \fIpathname \fBstate\fR ?\fIstateSpec\fR? Modify or query the widget state; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBtag \fIargs...\fR .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBtag bind \fItagName \fR?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fIscript\fR? Add a Tk binding script for the event sequence \fIsequence\fR to the tag \fItagName\fR. When an X event is delivered to an item, binding scripts for each of the item's \fB\-tags\fR are evaluated in order as per \fIbindtags(n)\fR. .RS .PP \fB\fR, \fB\fR, and virtual events are sent to the focus item. \fB\fR, \fB\fR, and \fB\fR events are sent to the item under the mouse pointer. No other event types are supported. .PP The binding \fIscript\fR undergoes \fB%\fR-substitutions before evaluation; see \fBbind(n)\fR for details. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR \fItagName\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value...\fR? Query or modify the options for the specified \fItagName\fR. If one or more \fIoption/value\fR pairs are specified, sets the value of those options for the specified tag. If a single \fIoption\fR is specified, returns the value of that option (or the empty string if the option has not been specified for \fItagName\fR). With no additional arguments, returns a dictionary of the option settings for \fItagName\fR. See \fBTAG OPTIONS\fR for the list of available options. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBxview \fIargs\fR Standard command for horizontal scrolling; see \fIwidget(n)\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fByview \fIargs\fR Standard command for vertical scrolling; see \fIttk::widget(n)\fR. .SH "ITEM OPTIONS" The following item options may be specified for items in the \fBinsert\fR and \fBitem\fR widget commands. .OP \-text text Text The textual label to display for the item. .OP \-image image Image A Tk image, displayed to the left of the label. .OP \-values values Values The list of values associated with the item. .RS .PP Each item should have the same number of values as the \fB\-columns\fR widget option. If there are fewer values than columns, the remaining values are assumed empty. If there are more values than columns, the extra values are ignored. .RE .OP \-open open Open A boolean value indicating whether the item's children should be displayed (\fB\-open true\fR) or hidden (\fB\-open false\fR). .OP \-tags tags Tags A list of tags associated with this item. .SH "TAG OPTIONS" The following options may be specified on tags: .IP \fB\-foreground\fR Specifies the text foreground color. .IP \fB\-background\fR Specifies the cell or item background color. .IP \fB\-font\fR Specifies the font to use when drawing text. .\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-anchor .\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-padding .\" ??? Maybe: .IP \-text .IP \fB\-image\fR Specifies the item image, in case the item's \fB\-image\fR option is empty. .PP \fI(@@@ TODO: sort out order of precedence for options)\fR .SH "COLUMN IDENTIFIERS" Column identifiers take any of the following forms: .IP \(bu A symbolic name from the list of \fB\-columns\fR. .IP \(bu An integer \fIn\fR, specifying the \fIn\fRth data column. .IP \(bu A string of the form \fB#\fIn\fR, where \fIn\fR is an integer, specifying the \fIn\fRth display column. .PP \fBNOTE:\fR Item \fB\-values\fR may be displayed in a different order than the order in which they are stored. .PP \fBNOTE:\fR Column #0 always refers to the tree column, even if \fB\-show tree\fR is not specified. .PP A \fIdata column number\fR is an index into an item's \fB\-values\fR list; a \fIdisplay column number\fR is the column number in the tree where the values are displayed. Tree labels are displayed in column #0. If \fB\-displaycolumns\fR is not set, then data column \fIn\fR is displayed in display column \fB#\fIn+1\fR. Again, \fBcolumn #0 always refers to the tree column\fR. .SH "VIRTUAL EVENTS" The treeview widget generates the following virtual events. .IP <> Generated whenever the selection changes. .IP <> Generated just before setting the focus item to \fB\-open true\fR. .IP <> Generated just after setting the focus item to \fB\-open false\fR. .PP The \fBfocus\fR and \fBselection\fR widget commands can be used to determine the affected item or items. '\" Not yet: '\" In Tk 8.5, the affected item is also passed as the \fB\-detail\fR field '\" of the virtual event. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n), listbox(n), image(n), bind(n) 07070100047154000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00006b2a0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/colors.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" Copyright (c) 2003 ActiveState Corporation. '\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen '\" Copyright (c) 2008 Donal K. Fellows '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: colors.n,v 1.9 2008/03/07 23:33:40 dkf Exp $ '\" '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH colors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS .\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME colors \- symbolic color names recognized by Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Tk recognizes many symbolic color names (e.g., \fBred\fR) when specifying colors. The symbolic names recognized by Tk and their 8-bit-per-channel RGB values are: .DS .ta 7.2cR 9.5cR 11cR \fBName\fR \fBRed\fR \fBGreen\fR \fBBlue\fR alice blue 240 248 255 AliceBlue 240 248 255 antique white 250 235 215 AntiqueWhite 250 235 215 AntiqueWhite1 255 239 219 AntiqueWhite2 238 223 204 AntiqueWhite3 205 192 176 AntiqueWhite4 139 131 120 aquamarine 127 255 212 aquamarine1 127 255 212 aquamarine2 118 238 198 aquamarine3 102 205 170 aquamarine4 69 139 116 azure 240 255 255 azure1 240 255 255 azure2 224 238 238 azure3 193 205 205 azure4 131 139 139 beige 245 245 220 bisque 255 228 196 bisque1 255 228 196 bisque2 238 213 183 bisque3 205 183 158 bisque4 139 125 107 black 0 0 0 blanched almond 255 235 205 BlanchedAlmond 255 235 205 blue 0 0 255 blue violet 138 43 226 blue1 0 0 255 blue2 0 0 238 blue3 0 0 205 blue4 0 0 139 BlueViolet 138 43 226 brown 165 42 42 brown1 255 64 64 brown2 238 59 59 brown3 205 51 51 brown4 139 35 35 burlywood 222 184 135 burlywood1 255 211 155 burlywood2 238 197 145 burlywood3 205 170 125 burlywood4 139 115 85 cadet blue 95 158 160 CadetBlue 95 158 160 CadetBlue1 152 245 255 CadetBlue2 142 229 238 CadetBlue3 122 197 205 CadetBlue4 83 134 139 chartreuse 127 255 0 chartreuse1 127 255 0 chartreuse2 118 238 0 chartreuse3 102 205 0 chartreuse4 69 139 0 chocolate 210 105 30 chocolate1 255 127 36 chocolate2 238 118 33 chocolate3 205 102 29 chocolate4 139 69 19 coral 255 127 80 coral1 255 114 86 coral2 238 106 80 coral3 205 91 69 coral4 139 62 47 cornflower blue 100 149 237 CornflowerBlue 100 149 237 cornsilk 255 248 220 cornsilk1 255 248 220 cornsilk2 238 232 205 cornsilk3 205 200 177 cornsilk4 139 136 120 cyan 0 255 255 cyan1 0 255 255 cyan2 0 238 238 cyan3 0 205 205 cyan4 0 139 139 dark blue 0 0 139 dark cyan 0 139 139 dark goldenrod 184 134 11 dark gray 169 169 169 dark green 0 100 0 dark grey 169 169 169 dark khaki 189 183 107 dark magenta 139 0 139 dark olive green 85 107 47 dark orange 255 140 0 dark orchid 153 50 204 dark red 139 0 0 dark salmon 233 150 122 dark sea green 143 188 143 dark slate blue 72 61 139 dark slate gray 47 79 79 dark slate grey 47 79 79 dark turquoise 0 206 209 dark violet 148 0 211 DarkBlue 0 0 139 DarkCyan 0 139 139 DarkGoldenrod 184 134 11 DarkGoldenrod1 255 185 15 DarkGoldenrod2 238 173 14 DarkGoldenrod3 205 149 12 DarkGoldenrod4 139 101 8 DarkGray 169 169 169 DarkGreen 0 100 0 DarkGrey 169 169 169 DarkKhaki 189 183 107 DarkMagenta 139 0 139 DarkOliveGreen 85 107 47 DarkOliveGreen1 202 255 112 DarkOliveGreen2 188 238 104 DarkOliveGreen3 162 205 90 DarkOliveGreen4 110 139 61 DarkOrange 255 140 0 DarkOrange1 255 127 0 DarkOrange2 238 118 0 DarkOrange3 205 102 0 DarkOrange4 139 69 0 DarkOrchid 153 50 204 DarkOrchid1 191 62 255 DarkOrchid2 178 58 238 DarkOrchid3 154 50 205 DarkOrchid4 104 34 139 DarkRed 139 0 0 DarkSalmon 233 150 122 DarkSeaGreen 143 188 143 DarkSeaGreen1 193 255 193 DarkSeaGreen2 180 238 180 DarkSeaGreen3 155 205 155 DarkSeaGreen4 105 139 105 DarkSlateBlue 72 61 139 DarkSlateGray 47 79 79 DarkSlateGray1 151 255 255 DarkSlateGray2 141 238 238 DarkSlateGray3 121 205 205 DarkSlateGray4 82 139 139 DarkSlateGrey 47 79 79 DarkTurquoise 0 206 209 DarkViolet 148 0 211 deep pink 255 20 147 deep sky blue 0 191 255 DeepPink 255 20 147 DeepPink1 255 20 147 DeepPink2 238 18 137 DeepPink3 205 16 118 DeepPink4 139 10 80 DeepSkyBlue 0 191 255 DeepSkyBlue1 0 191 255 DeepSkyBlue2 0 178 238 DeepSkyBlue3 0 154 205 DeepSkyBlue4 0 104 139 dim gray 105 105 105 dim grey 105 105 105 DimGray 105 105 105 DimGrey 105 105 105 dodger blue 30 144 255 DodgerBlue 30 144 255 DodgerBlue1 30 144 255 DodgerBlue2 28 134 238 DodgerBlue3 24 116 205 DodgerBlue4 16 78 139 firebrick 178 34 34 firebrick1 255 48 48 firebrick2 238 44 44 firebrick3 205 38 38 firebrick4 139 26 26 floral white 255 250 240 FloralWhite 255 250 240 forest green 34 139 34 ForestGreen 34 139 34 gainsboro 220 220 220 ghost white 248 248 255 GhostWhite 248 248 255 gold 255 215 0 gold1 255 215 0 gold2 238 201 0 gold3 205 173 0 gold4 139 117 0 goldenrod 218 165 32 goldenrod1 255 193 37 goldenrod2 238 180 34 goldenrod3 205 155 29 goldenrod4 139 105 20 gray 190 190 190 gray0 0 0 0 gray1 3 3 3 gray2 5 5 5 gray3 8 8 8 gray4 10 10 10 gray5 13 13 13 gray6 15 15 15 gray7 18 18 18 gray8 20 20 20 gray9 23 23 23 gray10 26 26 26 gray11 28 28 28 gray12 31 31 31 gray13 33 33 33 gray14 36 36 36 gray15 38 38 38 gray16 41 41 41 gray17 43 43 43 gray18 46 46 46 gray19 48 48 48 gray20 51 51 51 gray21 54 54 54 gray22 56 56 56 gray23 59 59 59 gray24 61 61 61 gray25 64 64 64 gray26 66 66 66 gray27 69 69 69 gray28 71 71 71 gray29 74 74 74 gray30 77 77 77 gray31 79 79 79 gray32 82 82 82 gray33 84 84 84 gray34 87 87 87 gray35 89 89 89 gray36 92 92 92 gray37 94 94 94 gray38 97 97 97 gray39 99 99 99 gray40 102 102 102 gray41 105 105 105 gray42 107 107 107 gray43 110 110 110 gray44 112 112 112 gray45 115 115 115 gray46 117 117 117 gray47 120 120 120 gray48 122 122 122 gray49 125 125 125 gray50 127 127 127 gray51 130 130 130 gray52 133 133 133 gray53 135 135 135 gray54 138 138 138 gray55 140 140 140 gray56 143 143 143 gray57 145 145 145 gray58 148 148 148 gray59 150 150 150 gray60 153 153 153 gray61 156 156 156 gray62 158 158 158 gray63 161 161 161 gray64 163 163 163 gray65 166 166 166 gray66 168 168 168 gray67 171 171 171 gray68 173 173 173 gray69 176 176 176 gray70 179 179 179 gray71 181 181 181 gray72 184 184 184 gray73 186 186 186 gray74 189 189 189 gray75 191 191 191 gray76 194 194 194 gray77 196 196 196 gray78 199 199 199 gray79 201 201 201 gray80 204 204 204 gray81 207 207 207 gray82 209 209 209 gray83 212 212 212 gray84 214 214 214 gray85 217 217 217 gray86 219 219 219 gray87 222 222 222 gray88 224 224 224 gray89 227 227 227 gray90 229 229 229 gray91 232 232 232 gray92 235 235 235 gray93 237 237 237 gray94 240 240 240 gray95 242 242 242 gray96 245 245 245 gray97 247 247 247 gray98 250 250 250 gray99 252 252 252 gray100 255 255 255 green 0 255 0 green yellow 173 255 47 green1 0 255 0 green2 0 238 0 green3 0 205 0 green4 0 139 0 GreenYellow 173 255 47 grey 190 190 190 grey0 0 0 0 grey1 3 3 3 grey2 5 5 5 grey3 8 8 8 grey4 10 10 10 grey5 13 13 13 grey6 15 15 15 grey7 18 18 18 grey8 20 20 20 grey9 23 23 23 grey10 26 26 26 grey11 28 28 28 grey12 31 31 31 grey13 33 33 33 grey14 36 36 36 grey15 38 38 38 grey16 41 41 41 grey17 43 43 43 grey18 46 46 46 grey19 48 48 48 grey20 51 51 51 grey21 54 54 54 grey22 56 56 56 grey23 59 59 59 grey24 61 61 61 grey25 64 64 64 grey26 66 66 66 grey27 69 69 69 grey28 71 71 71 grey29 74 74 74 grey30 77 77 77 grey31 79 79 79 grey32 82 82 82 grey33 84 84 84 grey34 87 87 87 grey35 89 89 89 grey36 92 92 92 grey37 94 94 94 grey38 97 97 97 grey39 99 99 99 grey40 102 102 102 grey41 105 105 105 grey42 107 107 107 grey43 110 110 110 grey44 112 112 112 grey45 115 115 115 grey46 117 117 117 grey47 120 120 120 grey48 122 122 122 grey49 125 125 125 grey50 127 127 127 grey51 130 130 130 grey52 133 133 133 grey53 135 135 135 grey54 138 138 138 grey55 140 140 140 grey56 143 143 143 grey57 145 145 145 grey58 148 148 148 grey59 150 150 150 grey60 153 153 153 grey61 156 156 156 grey62 158 158 158 grey63 161 161 161 grey64 163 163 163 grey65 166 166 166 grey66 168 168 168 grey67 171 171 171 grey68 173 173 173 grey69 176 176 176 grey70 179 179 179 grey71 181 181 181 grey72 184 184 184 grey73 186 186 186 grey74 189 189 189 grey75 191 191 191 grey76 194 194 194 grey77 196 196 196 grey78 199 199 199 grey79 201 201 201 grey80 204 204 204 grey81 207 207 207 grey82 209 209 209 grey83 212 212 212 grey84 214 214 214 grey85 217 217 217 grey86 219 219 219 grey87 222 222 222 grey88 224 224 224 grey89 227 227 227 grey90 229 229 229 grey91 232 232 232 grey92 235 235 235 grey93 237 237 237 grey94 240 240 240 grey95 242 242 242 grey96 245 245 245 grey97 247 247 247 grey98 250 250 250 grey99 252 252 252 grey100 255 255 255 honeydew 240 255 240 honeydew1 240 255 240 honeydew2 224 238 224 honeydew3 193 205 193 honeydew4 131 139 131 hot pink 255 105 180 HotPink 255 105 180 HotPink1 255 110 180 HotPink2 238 106 167 HotPink3 205 96 144 HotPink4 139 58 98 indian red 205 92 92 IndianRed 205 92 92 IndianRed1 255 106 106 IndianRed2 238 99 99 IndianRed3 205 85 85 IndianRed4 139 58 58 ivory 255 255 240 ivory1 255 255 240 ivory2 238 238 224 ivory3 205 205 193 ivory4 139 139 131 khaki 240 230 140 khaki1 255 246 143 khaki2 238 230 133 khaki3 205 198 115 khaki4 139 134 78 lavender 230 230 250 lavender blush 255 240 245 LavenderBlush 255 240 245 LavenderBlush1 255 240 245 LavenderBlush2 238 224 229 LavenderBlush3 205 193 197 LavenderBlush4 139 131 134 lawn green 124 252 0 LawnGreen 124 252 0 lemon chiffon 255 250 205 LemonChiffon 255 250 205 LemonChiffon1 255 250 205 LemonChiffon2 238 233 191 LemonChiffon3 205 201 165 LemonChiffon4 139 137 112 light blue 173 216 230 light coral 240 128 128 light cyan 224 255 255 light goldenrod 238 221 130 light goldenrod yellow 250 250 210 light gray 211 211 211 light green 144 238 144 light grey 211 211 211 light pink 255 182 193 light salmon 255 160 122 light sea green 32 178 170 light sky blue 135 206 250 light slate blue 132 112 255 light slate gray 119 136 153 light slate grey 119 136 153 light steel blue 176 196 222 light yellow 255 255 224 LightBlue 173 216 230 LightBlue1 191 239 255 LightBlue2 178 223 238 LightBlue3 154 192 205 LightBlue4 104 131 139 LightCoral 240 128 128 LightCyan 224 255 255 LightCyan1 224 255 255 LightCyan2 209 238 238 LightCyan3 180 205 205 LightCyan4 122 139 139 LightGoldenrod 238 221 130 LightGoldenrod1 255 236 139 LightGoldenrod2 238 220 130 LightGoldenrod3 205 190 112 LightGoldenrod4 139 129 76 LightGoldenrodYellow 250 250 210 LightGray 211 211 211 LightGreen 144 238 144 LightGrey 211 211 211 LightPink 255 182 193 LightPink1 255 174 185 LightPink2 238 162 173 LightPink3 205 140 149 LightPink4 139 95 101 LightSalmon 255 160 122 LightSalmon1 255 160 122 LightSalmon2 238 149 114 LightSalmon3 205 129 98 LightSalmon4 139 87 66 LightSeaGreen 32 178 170 LightSkyBlue 135 206 250 LightSkyBlue1 176 226 255 LightSkyBlue2 164 211 238 LightSkyBlue3 141 182 205 LightSkyBlue4 96 123 139 LightSlateBlue 132 112 255 LightSlateGray 119 136 153 LightSlateGrey 119 136 153 LightSteelBlue 176 196 222 LightSteelBlue1 202 225 255 LightSteelBlue2 188 210 238 LightSteelBlue3 162 181 205 LightSteelBlue4 110 123 139 LightYellow 255 255 224 LightYellow1 255 255 224 LightYellow2 238 238 209 LightYellow3 205 205 180 LightYellow4 139 139 122 lime green 50 205 50 LimeGreen 50 205 50 linen 250 240 230 magenta 255 0 255 magenta1 255 0 255 magenta2 238 0 238 magenta3 205 0 205 magenta4 139 0 139 maroon 176 48 96 maroon1 255 52 179 maroon2 238 48 167 maroon3 205 41 144 maroon4 139 28 98 medium aquamarine 102 205 170 medium blue 0 0 205 medium orchid 186 85 211 medium purple 147 112 219 medium sea green 60 179 113 medium slate blue 123 104 238 medium spring green 0 250 154 medium turquoise 72 209 204 medium violet red 199 21 133 MediumAquamarine 102 205 170 MediumBlue 0 0 205 MediumOrchid 186 85 211 MediumOrchid1 224 102 255 MediumOrchid2 209 95 238 MediumOrchid3 180 82 205 MediumOrchid4 122 55 139 MediumPurple 147 112 219 MediumPurple1 171 130 255 MediumPurple2 159 121 238 MediumPurple3 137 104 205 MediumPurple4 93 71 139 MediumSeaGreen 60 179 113 MediumSlateBlue 123 104 238 MediumSpringGreen 0 250 154 MediumTurquoise 72 209 204 MediumVioletRed 199 21 133 midnight blue 25 25 112 MidnightBlue 25 25 112 mint cream 245 255 250 MintCream 245 255 250 misty rose 255 228 225 MistyRose 255 228 225 MistyRose1 255 228 225 MistyRose2 238 213 210 MistyRose3 205 183 181 MistyRose4 139 125 123 moccasin 255 228 181 navajo white 255 222 173 NavajoWhite 255 222 173 NavajoWhite1 255 222 173 NavajoWhite2 238 207 161 NavajoWhite3 205 179 139 NavajoWhite4 139 121 94 navy 0 0 128 navy blue 0 0 128 NavyBlue 0 0 128 old lace 253 245 230 OldLace 253 245 230 olive drab 107 142 35 OliveDrab 107 142 35 OliveDrab1 192 255 62 OliveDrab2 179 238 58 OliveDrab3 154 205 50 OliveDrab4 105 139 34 orange 255 165 0 orange red 255 69 0 orange1 255 165 0 orange2 238 154 0 orange3 205 133 0 orange4 139 90 0 OrangeRed 255 69 0 OrangeRed1 255 69 0 OrangeRed2 238 64 0 OrangeRed3 205 55 0 OrangeRed4 139 37 0 orchid 218 112 214 orchid1 255 131 250 orchid2 238 122 233 orchid3 205 105 201 orchid4 139 71 137 pale goldenrod 238 232 170 pale green 152 251 152 pale turquoise 175 238 238 pale violet red 219 112 147 PaleGoldenrod 238 232 170 PaleGreen 152 251 152 PaleGreen1 154 255 154 PaleGreen2 144 238 144 PaleGreen3 124 205 124 PaleGreen4 84 139 84 PaleTurquoise 175 238 238 PaleTurquoise1 187 255 255 PaleTurquoise2 174 238 238 PaleTurquoise3 150 205 205 PaleTurquoise4 102 139 139 PaleVioletRed 219 112 147 PaleVioletRed1 255 130 171 PaleVioletRed2 238 121 159 PaleVioletRed3 205 104 127 PaleVioletRed4 139 71 93 papaya whip 255 239 213 PapayaWhip 255 239 213 peach puff 255 218 185 PeachPuff 255 218 185 PeachPuff1 255 218 185 PeachPuff2 238 203 173 PeachPuff3 205 175 149 PeachPuff4 139 119 101 peru 205 133 63 pink 255 192 203 pink1 255 181 197 pink2 238 169 184 pink3 205 145 158 pink4 139 99 108 plum 221 160 221 plum1 255 187 255 plum2 238 174 238 plum3 205 150 205 plum4 139 102 139 powder blue 176 224 230 PowderBlue 176 224 230 purple 160 32 240 purple1 155 48 255 purple2 145 44 238 purple3 125 38 205 purple4 85 26 139 red 255 0 0 red1 255 0 0 red2 238 0 0 red3 205 0 0 red4 139 0 0 rosy brown 188 143 143 RosyBrown 188 143 143 RosyBrown1 255 193 193 RosyBrown2 238 180 180 RosyBrown3 205 155 155 RosyBrown4 139 105 105 royal blue 65 105 225 RoyalBlue 65 105 225 RoyalBlue1 72 118 255 RoyalBlue2 67 110 238 RoyalBlue3 58 95 205 RoyalBlue4 39 64 139 saddle brown 139 69 19 SaddleBrown 139 69 19 salmon 250 128 114 salmon1 255 140 105 salmon2 238 130 98 salmon3 205 112 84 salmon4 139 76 57 sandy brown 244 164 96 SandyBrown 244 164 96 sea green 46 139 87 SeaGreen 46 139 87 SeaGreen1 84 255 159 SeaGreen2 78 238 148 SeaGreen3 67 205 128 SeaGreen4 46 139 87 seashell 255 245 238 seashell1 255 245 238 seashell2 238 229 222 seashell3 205 197 191 seashell4 139 134 130 sienna 160 82 45 sienna1 255 130 71 sienna2 238 121 66 sienna3 205 104 57 sienna4 139 71 38 sky blue 135 206 235 SkyBlue 135 206 235 SkyBlue1 135 206 255 SkyBlue2 126 192 238 SkyBlue3 108 166 205 SkyBlue4 74 112 139 slate blue 106 90 205 slate gray 112 128 144 slate grey 112 128 144 SlateBlue 106 90 205 SlateBlue1 131 111 255 SlateBlue2 122 103 238 SlateBlue3 105 89 205 SlateBlue4 71 60 139 SlateGray 112 128 144 SlateGray1 198 226 255 SlateGray2 185 211 238 SlateGray3 159 182 205 SlateGray4 108 123 139 SlateGrey 112 128 144 snow 255 250 250 snow1 255 250 250 snow2 238 233 233 snow3 205 201 201 snow4 139 137 137 spring green 0 255 127 SpringGreen 0 255 127 SpringGreen1 0 255 127 SpringGreen2 0 238 118 SpringGreen3 0 205 102 SpringGreen4 0 139 69 steel blue 70 130 180 SteelBlue 70 130 180 SteelBlue1 99 184 255 SteelBlue2 92 172 238 SteelBlue3 79 148 205 SteelBlue4 54 100 139 tan 210 180 140 tan1 255 165 79 tan2 238 154 73 tan3 205 133 63 tan4 139 90 43 thistle 216 191 216 thistle1 255 225 255 thistle2 238 210 238 thistle3 205 181 205 thistle4 139 123 139 tomato 255 99 71 tomato1 255 99 71 tomato2 238 92 66 tomato3 205 79 57 tomato4 139 54 38 turquoise 64 224 208 turquoise1 0 245 255 turquoise2 0 229 238 turquoise3 0 197 205 turquoise4 0 134 139 violet 238 130 238 violet red 208 32 144 VioletRed 208 32 144 VioletRed1 255 62 150 VioletRed2 238 58 140 VioletRed3 205 50 120 VioletRed4 139 34 82 wheat 245 222 179 wheat1 255 231 186 wheat2 238 216 174 wheat3 205 186 150 wheat4 139 126 102 white 255 255 255 white smoke 245 245 245 WhiteSmoke 245 245 245 yellow 255 255 0 yellow green 154 205 50 yellow1 255 255 0 yellow2 238 238 0 yellow3 205 205 0 yellow4 139 139 0 YellowGreen 154 205 50 .DE .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP \fBMac OS X\fR . On Mac OS X, the following additional system colors are available (note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme, and typically many of these will in fact be patterns rather than pure colors): .RS .DS systemActiveAreaFill systemAlertActiveText systemAlertBackgroundActive systemAlertBackgroundInactive systemAlertInactiveText systemAlternatePrimaryHighlightColor systemAppleGuideCoachmark systemBevelActiveDark systemBevelActiveLight systemBevelButtonActiveText systemBevelButtonInactiveText systemBevelButtonPressedText systemBevelButtonStickyActiveText systemBevelButtonStickyInactiveText systemBevelInactiveDark systemBevelInactiveLight systemBlack systemBlackText systemButtonActiveDarkHighlight systemButtonActiveDarkShadow systemButtonActiveLightHighlight systemButtonActiveLightShadow systemButtonFace systemButtonFaceActive systemButtonFaceInactive systemButtonFacePressed systemButtonFrame systemButtonFrameActive systemButtonFrameInactive systemButtonInactiveDarkHighlight systemButtonInactiveDarkShadow systemButtonInactiveLightHighlight systemButtonInactiveLightShadow systemButtonPressedDarkHighlight systemButtonPressedDarkShadow systemButtonPressedLightHighlight systemButtonPressedLightShadow systemButtonText systemChasingArrows systemDialogActiveText systemDialogBackgroundActive systemDialogBackgroundInactive systemDialogInactiveText systemDocumentWindowBackground systemDocumentWindowTitleActiveText systemDocumentWindowTitleInactiveText systemDragHilite systemDrawerBackground systemFinderWindowBackground systemFocusHighlight systemHighlight systemHighlightAlternate systemHighlightSecondary systemHighlightText systemIconLabelBackground systemIconLabelBackgroundSelected systemIconLabelSelectedText systemIconLabelText systemListViewBackground systemListViewColumnDivider systemListViewEvenRowBackground systemListViewOddRowBackground systemListViewSeparator systemListViewSortColumnBackground systemListViewText systemListViewWindowHeaderBackground systemMenu systemMenuActive systemMenuActiveText systemMenuBackground systemMenuBackgroundSelected systemMenuDisabled systemMenuItemActiveText systemMenuItemDisabledText systemMenuItemSelectedText systemMenuText systemMetalBackground systemModelessDialogActiveText systemModelessDialogBackgroundActive systemModelessDialogBackgroundInactive systemModelessDialogInactiveText systemMovableModalBackground systemMovableModalWindowTitleActiveText systemMovableModalWindowTitleInactiveText systemNotificationText systemNotificationWindowBackground systemPlacardActiveText systemPlacardBackground systemPlacardInactiveText systemPlacardPressedText systemPopupArrowActive systemPopupArrowInactive systemPopupArrowPressed systemPopupButtonActiveText systemPopupButtonInactiveText systemPopupButtonPressedText systemPopupLabelActiveText systemPopupLabelInactiveText systemPopupWindowTitleActiveText systemPopupWindowTitleInactiveText systemPrimaryHighlightColor systemPushButtonActiveText systemPushButtonInactiveText systemPushButtonPressedText systemRootMenuActiveText systemRootMenuDisabledText systemRootMenuSelectedText systemScrollBarDelimiterActive systemScrollBarDelimiterInactive systemSecondaryGroupBoxBackground systemSecondaryHighlightColor systemSheetBackground systemSheetBackgroundOpaque systemSheetBackgroundTransparent systemStaticAreaFill systemSystemDetailText systemTabFrontActiveText systemTabFrontInactiveText systemTabNonFrontActiveText systemTabNonFrontInactiveText systemTabNonFrontPressedText systemTabPaneBackground systemToolbarBackground systemTransparent systemUtilityWindowBackgroundActive systemUtilityWindowBackgroundInactive systemUtilityWindowTitleActiveText systemUtilityWindowTitleInactiveText systemWhite systemWhiteText systemWindowBody systemWindowHeaderActiveText systemWindowHeaderBackground systemWindowHeaderInactiveText .DE .RE .TP \fBWindows\fR . On Windows, the following additional system colors are available (note that the actual color values depend on the currently active OS theme): .RS .DS .ta 6c 3dDarkShadow Highlight 3dLight HighlightText ActiveBorder InactiveBorder ActiveCaption InactiveCaption AppWorkspace InactiveCaptionText Background InfoBackground ButtonFace InfoText ButtonHighlight Menu ButtonShadow MenuText ButtonText Scrollbar CaptionText Window DisabledText WindowFrame GrayText WindowText .DE .RE .SH "SEE ALSO" options(n), Tk_GetColor(3) .SH KEYWORDS color, option 0707010004714d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c000093950000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/bind.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 1998 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bind.n,v 1.29.2.1 2009/01/03 00:18:08 ferrieux Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH bind n 8.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bind \- Arrange for X events to invoke Tcl scripts .SH SYNOPSIS \fBbind\fI tag\fR ?\fIsequence\fR? ?\fB+\fR??\fIscript\fR? .BE .SH "INTRODUCTION" .PP The \fBbind\fR command associates Tcl scripts with X events. If all three arguments are specified, \fBbind\fR will arrange for \fIscript\fR (a Tcl script) to be evaluated whenever the event(s) given by \fIsequence\fR occur in the window(s) identified by \fItag\fR. If \fIscript\fR is prefixed with a .QW + , then it is appended to any existing binding for \fIsequence\fR; otherwise \fIscript\fR replaces any existing binding. If \fIscript\fR is an empty string then the current binding for \fIsequence\fR is destroyed, leaving \fIsequence\fR unbound. In all of the cases where a \fIscript\fR argument is provided, \fBbind\fR returns an empty string. .PP If \fIsequence\fR is specified without a \fIscript\fR, then the script currently bound to \fIsequence\fR is returned, or an empty string is returned if there is no binding for \fIsequence\fR. If neither \fIsequence\fR nor \fIscript\fR is specified, then the return value is a list whose elements are all the sequences for which there exist bindings for \fItag\fR. .PP The \fItag\fR argument determines which window(s) the binding applies to. If \fItag\fR begins with a dot, as in \fB.a.b.c\fR, then it must be the path name for a window; otherwise it may be an arbitrary string. Each window has an associated list of tags, and a binding applies to a particular window if its tag is among those specified for the window. Although the \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to assign an arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding tags provide the following behavior: .IP \(bu 3 If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies to that window. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies to the toplevel window and all its internal windows. .IP \(bu 3 If the tag is the name of a class of widgets, such as \fBButton\fR, the binding applies to all widgets in that class; .IP \(bu 3 If \fItag\fR has the value \fBall\fR, the binding applies to all windows in the application. .SH "EVENT PATTERNS" .PP The \fIsequence\fR argument specifies a sequence of one or more event patterns, with optional white space between the patterns. Each event pattern may take one of three forms. In the simplest case it is a single printing ASCII character, such as \fBa\fR or \fB[\fR. The character may not be a space character or the character \fB<\fR. This form of pattern matches a \fBKeyPress\fR event for the particular character. The second form of pattern is longer but more general. It has the following syntax: .CS \fB<\fImodifier\-modifier\-type\-detail\fB>\fR .CE The entire event pattern is surrounded by angle brackets. Inside the angle brackets are zero or more modifiers, an event type, and an extra piece of information (\fIdetail\fR) identifying a particular button or keysym. Any of the fields may be omitted, as long as at least one of \fItype\fR and \fIdetail\fR is present. The fields must be separated by white space or dashes. .PP The third form of pattern is used to specify a user-defined, named virtual event. It has the following syntax: .CS \fB<<\fIname\fB>>\fR .CE The entire virtual event pattern is surrounded by double angle brackets. Inside the angle brackets is the user-defined name of the virtual event. Modifiers, such as \fBShift\fR or \fBControl\fR, may not be combined with a virtual event to modify it. Bindings on a virtual event may be created before the virtual event is defined, and if the definition of a virtual event changes dynamically, all windows bound to that virtual event will respond immediately to the new definition. .PP Some widgets (e.g. \fBmenu\fR and \fBtext\fR) issue virtual events when their internal state is updated in some ways. Please see the manual page for each widget for details. .SS "MODIFIERS" .PP Modifiers consist of any of the following values: .DS .ta 6c \fBControl\fR \fBMod1\fR, \fBM1\fR, \fBCommand\fR \fBAlt\fR \fBMod2\fR, \fBM2\fR, \fBOption\fR \fBShift\fR \fBMod3\fR, \fBM3\fR \fBLock\fR \fBMod4\fR, \fBM4\fR \fBExtended\fR \fBMod5\fR, \fBM5\fR \fBButton1\fR, \fBB1\fR \fBMeta\fR, \fBM\fR \fBButton2\fR, \fBB2\fR \fBDouble\fR \fBButton3\fR, \fBB3\fR \fBTriple\fR \fBButton4\fR, \fBB4\fR \fBQuadruple\fR \fBButton5\fR, \fBB5\fR .DE Where more than one value is listed, separated by commas, the values are equivalent. Most of the modifiers have the obvious X meanings. For example, \fBButton1\fR requires that button 1 be depressed when the event occurs. For a binding to match a given event, the modifiers in the event must include all of those specified in the event pattern. An event may also contain additional modifiers not specified in the binding. For example, if button 1 is pressed while the shift and control keys are down, the pattern \fB\fR will match the event, but \fB\fR will not. If no modifiers are specified, then any combination of modifiers may be present in the event. .PP \fBMeta\fR and \fBM\fR refer to whichever of the \fBM1\fR through \fBM5\fR modifiers is associated with the Meta key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms \fBMeta_R\fR and \fBMeta_L\fR). If there are no Meta keys, or if they are not associated with any modifiers, then \fBMeta\fR and \fBM\fR will not match any events. Similarly, the \fBAlt\fR modifier refers to whichever modifier is associated with the alt key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms \fBAlt_L\fR and \fBAlt_R\fR). .PP The \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR and \fBQuadruple\fR modifiers are a convenience for specifying double mouse clicks and other repeated events. They cause a particular event pattern to be repeated 2, 3 or 4 times, and also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a sequence of events to match a \fBDouble\fR, \fBTriple\fR or \fBQuadruple\fR pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and without substantial mouse motion in between. For example, \fB\fR is equivalent to \fB\fR with the extra time and space requirement. .PP The \fBCommand\fR and \fBOption\fR modifiers are equivalents of \fBMod1\fR resp. \fBMod2\fR, they correspond to Macintosh-specific modifier keys. .PP .VS 8.5 The \fBExtended\fR modifier is, at present, specific to Windows. It appears on events that are associated with the keys on the .QW "extended keyboard" . On a US keyboard, the extended keys include the \fBAlt\fR and \fBControl\fR keys at the right of the keyboard, the cursor keys in the cluster to the left of the numeric pad, the \fBNumLock\fR key, the \fBBreak\fR key, the \fBPrintScreen\fR key, and the \fB/\fR and \fBEnter\fR keys in the numeric keypad. .VE 8.5 .SS "EVENT TYPES" .PP The \fItype\fR field may be any of the standard X event types, with a few extra abbreviations. The \fItype\fR field will also accept a couple non-standard X event types that were added to better support the Macintosh and Windows platforms. Below is a list of all the valid types; where two names appear together, they are synonyms. .DS .ta \w'\fBButtonPress, Button\0\0\0\fR'u +\w'\fBKeyPress, Key\0\0\0\fR'u \fBActivate\fR \fBDestroy\fR \fBMap\fR \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButton\fR \fBEnter\fR \fBMapRequest\fR \fBButtonRelease\fR \fBExpose\fR \fBMotion\fR \fBCirculate\fR \fBFocusIn\fR \fBMouseWheel\fR \fBCirculateRequest\fR \fBFocusOut\fR \fBProperty\fR \fBColormap\fR \fBGravity\fR \fBReparent\fR \fBConfigure\fR \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKey\fR \fBResizeRequest\fR \fBConfigureRequest\fR \fBKeyRelease\fR \fBUnmap\fR \fBCreate\fR \fBLeave\fR \fBVisibility\fR \fBDeactivate\fR .DE Most of the above events have the same fields and behaviors as events in the X Windowing system. You can find more detailed descriptions of these events in any X window programming book. A couple of the events are extensions to the X event system to support features unique to the Macintosh and Windows platforms. We provide a little more detail on these events here. These include: .IP "\fBActivate\fR, \fBDeactivate\fR" 5 These two events are sent to every sub-window of a toplevel when they change state. In addition to the focus Window, the Macintosh platform and Windows platforms have a notion of an active window (which often has but is not required to have the focus). On the Macintosh, widgets in the active window have a different appearance than widgets in deactive windows. The \fBActivate\fR event is sent to all the sub-windows in a toplevel when it changes from being deactive to active. Likewise, the \fBDeactive\fR event is sent when the window's state changes from active to deactive. There are no useful percent substitutions you would make when binding to these events. .IP \fBMouseWheel\fR 5 Many contemporary mice support a mouse wheel, which is used for scrolling documents without using the scrollbars. By rolling the wheel, the system will generate \fBMouseWheel\fR events that the application can use to scroll. Like \fBKey\fR events the event is always routed to the window that currently has focus. When the event is received you can use the \fB%D\fR substitution to get the \fIdelta\fR field for the event, which is a integer value describing how the mouse wheel has moved. The smallest value for which the system will report is defined by the OS. On Windows 95 & 98 machines this value is at least 120 before it is reported. However, higher resolution devices may be available in the future. The sign of the value determines which direction your widget should scroll. Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll down. .IP "\fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR" 5 The \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are generated whenever a key is pressed or released. \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events are sent to the window which currently has the keyboard focus. .IP "\fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR" 5 The \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events are generated when the user presses or releases a mouse button. \fBMotion\fR events are generated whenever the pointer is moved. \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events are normally sent to the window containing the pointer. .RS .PP When a mouse button is pressed, the window containing the pointer automatically obtains a temporary pointer grab. Subsequent \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events will be sent to that window, regardless of which window contains the pointer, until all buttons have been released. .RE .IP \fBConfigure\fR 5 A \fBConfigure\fR event is sent to a window whenever its size, position, or border width changes, and sometimes when it has changed position in the stacking order. .IP "\fBMap\fR, \fBUnmap\fR" 5 The \fBMap\fR and \fBUnmap\fR events are generated whenever the mapping state of a window changes. .RS .PP Windows are created in the unmapped state. Top-level windows become mapped when they transition to the \fBnormal\fR state, and are unmapped in the \fBwithdrawn\fR and \fBiconic\fR states. Other windows become mapped when they are placed under control of a geometry manager (for example \fBpack\fR or \fBgrid\fR). .PP A window is \fIviewable\fR only if it and all of its ancestors are mapped. Note that geometry managers typically do not map their children until they have been mapped themselves, and unmap all children when they become unmapped; hence in Tk \fBMap\fR and \fBUnmap\fR events indicate whether or not a window is viewable. .RE .IP \fBVisibility\fR 5 A window is said to be \fIobscured\fR when another window above it in the stacking order fully or partially overlaps it. \fBVisibility\fR events are generated whenever a window's obscurity state changes; the \fIstate\fR field (\fB%s\fR) specifies the new state. .IP \fBExpose\fR 5 An \fBExpose\fR event is generated whenever all or part of a window should be redrawn (for example, when a window is first mapped or if it becomes unobscured). It is normally not necessary for client applications to handle \fBExpose\fR events, since Tk handles them internally. .IP \fBDestroy\fR 5 A \fBDestroy\fR event is delivered to a window when it is destroyed. .RS .PP When the \fBDestroy\fR event is delivered to a widget, it is in a .QW half-dead state: the widget still exists, but most operations on it will fail. .RE .IP "\fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR" 5 The \fBFocusIn\fR and \fBFocusOut\fR events are generated whenever the keyboard focus changes. A \fBFocusOut\fR event is sent to the old focus window, and a \fBFocusIn\fR event is sent to the new one. .RS .PP In addition, if the old and new focus windows do not share a common parent, .QW "virtual crossing" focus events are sent to the intermediate windows in the hierarchy. Thus a \fBFocusIn\fR event indicates that the target window or one of its descendants has acquired the focus, and a \fBFocusOut\fR event indicates that the focus has been changed to a window outside the target window's hierarchy. .PP The keyboard focus may be changed explicitly by a call to \fBfocus\fR, or implicitly by the window manager. .RE .IP "\fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR" 5 An \fBEnter\fR event is sent to a window when the pointer enters that window, and a \fBLeave\fR event is sent when the pointer leaves it. .RS .PP If there is a pointer grab in effect, \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events are only delivered to the window owning the grab. .PP In addition, when the pointer moves between two windows, \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR .QW "virtual crossing" events are sent to intermediate windows in the hierarchy in the same manner as for \fBFocusIn\fR and \fBFocusOut\fR events. .RE .IP \fBProperty\fR A \fBProperty\fR event is sent to a window whenever an X property belonging to that window is changed or deleted. \fBProperty\fR events are not normally delivered to Tk applications as they are handled by the Tk core. .IP \fBColormap\fR A \fBColormap\fR event is generated whenever the colormap associated with a window has been changed, installed, or uninstalled. .RS .PP Widgets may be assigned a private colormap by specifying a \fB\-colormap\fR option; the window manager is responsible for installing and uninstalling colormaps as necessary. .PP Note that Tk provides no useful details for this event type. .RE '\" The following events were added in TIP#47 .IP "\fBMapRequest\fR, \fBCirculateRequest\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR" 5 These events are not normally delivered to Tk applications. They are included for completeness, to make it possible to write X11 window managers in Tk. (These events are only delivered when a client has selected \fBSubstructureRedirectMask\fR on a window; the Tk core does not use this mask.) .IP "\fBGravity\fR, \fBReparent\fR, \fBCirculate\fR" 5 The events \fBGravity\fR and \fBReparent\fR are not normally delivered to Tk applications. They are included for completeness. .RS .PP A \fBCirculate\fR event indicates that the window has moved to the top or to the bottom of the stacking order as a result of an \fBXCirculateSubwindows\fR protocol request. Note that the stacking order may be changed for other reasons which do not generate a \fBCirculate\fR event, and that Tk does not use \fBXCirculateSubwindows()\fR internally. This event type is included only for completeness; there is no reliable way to track changes to a window's position in the stacking order. .RE .SS "EVENT DETAILS" .PP The last part of a long event specification is \fIdetail\fR. In the case of a \fBButtonPress\fR or \fBButtonRelease\fR event, it is the number of a button (1\-5). If a button number is given, then only an event on that particular button will match; if no button number is given, then an event on any button will match. Note: giving a specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier; in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released, while in the second it refers to some other button that is already depressed when the matching event occurs. If a button number is given then \fItype\fR may be omitted: if will default to \fBButtonPress\fR. For example, the specifier \fB<1>\fR is equivalent to \fB\fR. .PP If the event type is \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBKeyRelease\fR, then \fIdetail\fR may be specified in the form of an X keysym. Keysyms are textual specifications for particular keys on the keyboard; they include all the alphanumeric ASCII characters (e.g. .QW a is the keysym for the ASCII character .QW a ), plus descriptions for non-alphanumeric characters .PQ comma "is the keysym for the comma character" , plus descriptions for all the non-ASCII keys on the keyboard (e.g. .QW Shift_L is the keysym for the left shift key, and .QW F1 is the keysym for the F1 function key, if it exists). The complete list of keysyms is not presented here; it is available in other X documentation and may vary from system to system. If necessary, you can use the \fB%K\fR notation described below to print out the keysym name for a particular key. If a keysym \fIdetail\fR is given, then the \fItype\fR field may be omitted; it will default to \fBKeyPress\fR. For example, \fB\fR is equivalent to \fB\fR. .SH "BINDING SCRIPTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS" .PP The \fIscript\fR argument to \fBbind\fR is a Tcl script, which will be executed whenever the given event sequence occurs. \fICommand\fR will be executed in the same interpreter that the \fBbind\fR command was executed in, and it will run at global level (only global variables will be accessible). If \fIscript\fR contains any \fB%\fR characters, then the script will not be executed directly. Instead, a new script will be generated by replacing each \fB%\fR, and the character following it, with information from the current event. The replacement depends on the character following the \fB%\fR, as defined in the list below. Unless otherwise indicated, the replacement string is the decimal value of the given field from the current event. Some of the substitutions are only valid for certain types of events; if they are used for other types of events the value substituted is undefined. .IP \fB%%\fR 5 Replaced with a single percent. .IP \fB%#\fR 5 The number of the last client request processed by the server (the \fIserial\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%a\fR 5 The \fIabove\fR field from the event, formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR events. Indicates the sibling window immediately below the receiving window in the stacking order, or \fB0\fR if the receiving window is at the bottom. .IP \fB%b\fR 5 The number of the button that was pressed or released. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR and \fBButtonRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%c\fR 5 The \fIcount\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates that there are \fIcount\fR pending \fBExpose\fR events which have not yet been delivered to the window. .IP \fB%d\fR 5 The \fIdetail\fR .VS 8.5 or \fIuser_data\fR .VE 8.5 field from the event. The \fB%d\fR is replaced by a string identifying the detail. For \fBEnter\fR, \fBLeave\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, and \fBFocusOut\fR events, the string will be one of the following: .RS .DS .ta 6c \fBNotifyAncestor\fR \fBNotifyNonlinearVirtual\fR \fBNotifyDetailNone\fR \fBNotifyPointer\fR \fBNotifyInferior\fR \fBNotifyPointerRoot\fR \fBNotifyNonlinear\fR \fBNotifyVirtual\fR .DE For \fBConfigureRequest\fR events, the string will be one of: .DS .ta 6c \fBAbove\fR \fBOpposite\fR \fBBelow\fR \fBNone\fR \fBBottomIf\fR \fBTopIf\fR .DE .VS 8.5 For virtual events, the string will be whatever value is stored in the \fIuser_data\fR field when the event was created (typically with \fBevent generate\fR), or the empty string if the field is NULL. Virtual events corresponding to key sequence presses (see \fBevent add\fR for details) set the \fIuser_data\fR to NULL. .VE 8.5 For events other than these, the substituted string is undefined. .RE .IP \fB%f\fR 5 The \fIfocus\fR field from the event (\fB0\fR or \fB1\fR). Valid only for \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events. \fB1\fR if the receiving window is the focus window or a descendant of the focus window, \fB0\fR otherwise. .IP \fB%h\fR 5 The \fIheight\fR field from the event. Valid for the \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. Indicates the new or requested height of the window. .IP \fB%i\fR 5 The \fIwindow\fR field from the event, represented as a hexadecimal integer. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%k\fR 5 The \fIkeycode\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%m\fR 5 The \fImode\fR field from the event. The substituted string is one of \fBNotifyNormal\fR, \fBNotifyGrab\fR, \fBNotifyUngrab\fR, or \fBNotifyWhileGrabbed\fR. Valid only for \fBEnter\fR, \fBFocusIn\fR, \fBFocusOut\fR, and \fBLeave\fR events. .IP \fB%o\fR 5 The \fIoverride_redirect\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBMap\fR, \fBReparent\fR, and \fBConfigure\fR events. .IP \fB%p\fR 5 The \fIplace\fR field from the event, substituted as one of the strings \fBPlaceOnTop\fR or \fBPlaceOnBottom\fR. Valid only for \fBCirculate\fR and \fBCirculateRequest\fR events. .IP \fB%s\fR 5 The \fIstate\fR field from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBEnter\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, \fBLeave\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events, a decimal string is substituted. For \fBVisibility\fR, one of the strings \fBVisibilityUnobscured\fR, \fBVisibilityPartiallyObscured\fR, and \fBVisibilityFullyObscured\fR is substituted. For \fBProperty\fR events, substituted with either the string \fBNewValue\fR (indicating that the property has been created or modified) or \fBDelete\fR (indicating that the property has been removed). .IP \fB%t\fR 5 The \fItime\fR field from the event. This is the X server timestamp (typically the time since the last server reset) in milliseconds, when the event occurred. Valid for most events. .IP \fB%w\fR 5 The \fIwidth\fR field from the event. Indicates the new or requested width of the window. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, \fBCreate\fR, \fBResizeRequest\fR, and \fBExpose\fR events. .IP "\fB%x\fR, \fB%y\fR" 5 The \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR fields from the event. For \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBMotion\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, and \fBMouseWheel\fR events, \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR indicate the position of the mouse pointer relative to the receiving window. For \fBEnter\fR and \fBLeave\fR events, the position where the mouse pointer crossed the window, relative to the receiving window. For \fBConfigure\fR and \fBCreate\fR requests, the \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates of the window relative to its parent window. .IP \fB%A\fR 5 Substitutes the UNICODE character corresponding to the event, or the empty string if the event does not correspond to a UNICODE character (e.g. the shift key was pressed). \fBXmbLookupString\fR (or \fBXLookupString\fR when input method support is turned off) does all the work of translating from the event to a UNICODE character. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%B\fR 5 The \fIborder_width\fR field from the event. Valid only for \fBConfigure\fR, \fBConfigureRequest\fR, and \fBCreate\fR events. .IP \fB%D\fR 5 This reports the \fIdelta\fR value of a \fBMouseWheel\fR event. The \fIdelta\fR value represents the rotation units the mouse wheel has been moved. On Windows 95 & 98 systems the smallest value for the delta is 120. Future systems may support higher resolution values for the delta. The sign of the value represents the direction the mouse wheel was scrolled. .IP \fB%E\fR 5 The \fIsend_event\fR field from the event. Valid for all event types. \fB0\fR indicates that this is a .QW normal event, \fB1\fR indicates that it is a .QW synthetic event generated by \fBSendEvent\fR. .IP \fB%K\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a textual string. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%N\fR 5 The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a decimal number. Valid only for \fBKeyPress\fR and \fBKeyRelease\fR events. .IP \fB%P\fR 5 The name of the property being updated or deleted (which may be converted to an XAtom using \fBwinfo atom\fR.) Valid only for \fBProperty\fR events. .IP \fB%R\fR 5 The \fIroot\fR window identifier from the event. Valid only for events containing a \fIroot\fR field. .IP \fB%S\fR 5 The \fIsubwindow\fR window identifier from the event, formatted as a hexadecimal number. Valid only for events containing a \fIsubwindow\fR field. .IP \fB%T\fR 5 The \fItype\fR field from the event. Valid for all event types. .IP \fB%W\fR 5 The path name of the window to which the event was reported (the \fIwindow\fR field from the event). Valid for all event types. .IP "\fB%X\fR, \fB%Y\fR" 5 The \fIx_root\fR and \fIy_root\fR fields from the event. If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted values are the corresponding x-coordinate and y-coordinate in the virtual root. Valid only for \fBButtonPress\fR, \fBButtonRelease\fR, \fBKeyPress\fR, \fBKeyRelease\fR, and \fBMotion\fR events. Same meaning as \fB%x\fR and \fB%y\fR, except relative to the (virtual) root window. .LP The replacement string for a %-replacement is formatted as a proper Tcl list element. This means that spaces or special characters such as \fB$\fR and \fB{\fR may be preceded by backslashes. This guarantees that the string will be passed through the Tcl parser when the binding script is evaluated. Most replacements are numbers or well-defined strings such as \fBAbove\fR; for these replacements no special formatting is ever necessary. The most common case where reformatting occurs is for the \fB%A\fR substitution. For example, if \fIscript\fR is .CS \fBinsert\0%A\fR .CE and the character typed is an open square bracket, then the script actually executed will be .CS \fBinsert\0\e[\fR .CE This will cause the \fBinsert\fR to receive the original replacement string (open square bracket) as its first argument. If the extra backslash had not been added, Tcl would not have been able to parse the script correctly. .SH "MULTIPLE MATCHES" .PP It is possible for several bindings to match a given X event. If the bindings are associated with different \fItag\fR's, then each of the bindings will be executed, in order. By default, a binding for the widget will be executed first, followed by a class binding, a binding for its toplevel, and an \fBall\fR binding. The \fBbindtags\fR command may be used to change this order for a particular window or to associate additional binding tags with the window. .PP The \fBcontinue\fR and \fBbreak\fR commands may be used inside a binding script to control the processing of matching scripts. If \fBcontinue\fR is invoked, then the current binding script is terminated but Tk will continue processing binding scripts associated with other \fItag\fR's. If the \fBbreak\fR command is invoked within a binding script, then that script terminates and no other scripts will be invoked for the event. .PP If more than one binding matches a particular event and they have the same \fItag\fR, then the most specific binding is chosen and its script is evaluated. The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of several matching sequences is more specific: .RS .IP (a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific than one that does not; .IP (b) a longer sequence (in terms of number of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence; .IP (c) if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers is more specific. .IP (d) a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a virtual event. .IP (e) given a sequence that matches two or more virtual events, one of the virtual events will be chosen, but the order is undefined. .RE .PP If the matching sequences contain more than one event, then tests (c)\-(e) are applied in order from the most recent event to the least recent event in the sequences. If these tests fail to determine a winner, then the most recently registered sequence is the winner. .PP If there are two (or more) virtual events that are both triggered by the same sequence, and both of those virtual events are bound to the same window tag, then only one of the virtual events will be triggered, and it will be picked at random: .CS event add <> event add <> event add <> \fBbind\fR Entry <> {puts Paste} \fBbind\fR Entry <> {puts Scroll} .CE If the user types Control\-y, the \fB<>\fR binding will be invoked, but if the user presses button 2 then one of either the \fB<>\fR or the \fB<>\fR bindings will be invoked, but exactly which one gets invoked is undefined. .PP If an X event does not match any of the existing bindings, then the event is ignored. An unbound event is not considered to be an error. .SH "MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS" .PP When a \fIsequence\fR specified in a \fBbind\fR command contains more than one event pattern, then its script is executed whenever the recent events (leading up to and including the current event) match the given sequence. This means, for example, that if button 1 is clicked repeatedly the sequence \fB\fR will match each button press but the first. If extraneous events that would prevent a match occur in the middle of an event sequence then the extraneous events are ignored unless they are \fBKeyPress\fR or \fBButtonPress\fR events. For example, \fB\fR will match a sequence of presses of button 1, even though there will be \fBButtonRelease\fR events (and possibly \fBMotion\fR events) between the \fBButtonPress\fR events. Furthermore, a \fBKeyPress\fR event may be preceded by any number of other \fBKeyPress\fR events for modifier keys without the modifier keys preventing a match. For example, the event sequence \fBaB\fR will match a press of the \fBa\fR key, a release of the \fBa\fR key, a press of the \fBShift\fR key, and a press of the \fBb\fR key: the press of \fBShift\fR is ignored because it is a modifier key. Finally, if several \fBMotion\fR events occur in a row, only the last one is used for purposes of matching binding sequences. .SH "ERRORS" .PP If an error occurs in executing the script for a binding then the \fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error. The \fBbgerror\fR command will be executed at global level (outside the context of any Tcl procedure). .SH "EXAMPLES" Arrange for a string describing the motion of the mouse to be printed out when the mouse is double-clicked: .CS \fBbind\fR . { puts "hi from (%x,%y)" } .CE .PP A little GUI that displays what the keysym name of the last key pressed is: .CS set keysym "Press any key" pack [label .l \-textvariable keysym \-padx 2m \-pady 1m] \fBbind\fR . { set keysym "You pressed %K" } .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bgerror(n), bindtags(n), event(n), focus(n), grab(n), keysyms(n) .SH KEYWORDS binding, event 07070100047181000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e00001cdb0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002300000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tk_popup.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: popup.n,v 1.4 2004/06/21 20:59:29 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tk_popup n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_popup \- Post a popup menu .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_popup \fImenu x y \fR?\fIentry\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure posts a menu at a given position on the screen and configures Tk so that the menu and its cascaded children can be traversed with the mouse or the keyboard. \fIMenu\fR is the name of a menu widget and \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are the root coordinates at which to display the menu. If \fIentry\fR is omitted or an empty string, the menu's upper left corner is positioned at the given point. Otherwise \fIentry\fR gives the index of an entry in \fImenu\fR and the menu will be positioned so that the entry is positioned over the given point. .SH EXAMPLE How to attach a simple popup menu to a widget. .CS # Create a menu set m [menu .popupMenu] $m add command \-label "Example 1" \-command bell $m add command \-label "Example 2" \-command bell # Create something to attach it to pack [label .l \-text "Click me!"] # Arrange for the menu to pop up when the label is clicked bind .l <1> {\fBtk_popup\fR .popupMenu %X %Y} .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" bind(n), menu(n), tk_optionMenu(n) .SH KEYWORDS menu, popup 07070100047170000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f000046560000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/mann/radiobutton.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: radiobutton.n,v 1.16 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH radiobutton n 4.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME radiobutton \- Create and manipulate radiobutton widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBradiobutton\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-compound \-image \-underline \-cursor \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-command command Command Specifies a Tcl command to associate with the button. This command is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button window. The button's global variable (\fB\-variable\fR option) will be updated before the command is invoked. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the button. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in lines of text. If this option is not specified, the button's desired height is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .OP \-indicatoron indicatorOn IndicatorOn Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn. Must be a proper boolean value. If false, the \fBrelief\fR option is ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is selected and raised otherwise. .OP \-selectcolor selectColor Background Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected. If \fBindicatorOn\fR is true then the color applies to the indicator. Under Windows, this color is used as the background for the indicator regardless of the select state. If \fBindicatorOn\fR is false, this color is used as the background for the entire widget, in place of \fBbackground\fR or \fBactiveBackground\fR, whenever the widget is selected. If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for displaying when the widget is selected. .OP \-offrelief offRelief OffRelief Specifies the relief for the checkbutton when the indicator is not drawn and the checkbutton is off. The default value is .QW raised . By setting this option to .QW flat and setting \fB\-indicatoron\fR to false and \fB\-overrelief\fR to .QW raised , the effect is achieved of having a flat button that raises on mouse-over and which is depressed when activated. This is the behavior typically exhibited by the Align-Left, Align-Right, and Center radiobuttons on the toolbar of a word-processor, for example. .OP \-overrelief overRelief OverRelief Specifies an alternative relief for the radiobutton, to be used when the mouse cursor is over the widget. This option can be used to make toolbar buttons, by configuring \fB\-relief flat \-overrelief raised\fR. If the value of this option is the empty string, then no alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the radiobutton. The empty string is the default value. .OP \-selectimage selectImage SelectImage Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fBimage\fR option) when the radiobutton is selected. This option is ignored unless the \fBimage\fR option has been specified. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of three states for the radiobutton: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In normal state the radiobutton is displayed using the \fBforeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options. The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the radiobutton. In active state the radiobutton is displayed using the \fBactiveForeground\fR and \fBactiveBackground\fR options. Disabled state means that the radiobutton should be insensitive: the default bindings will refuse to activate the widget and will ignore mouse button presses. In this state the \fBdisabledForeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options determine how the radiobutton is displayed. .OP \-tristateimage tristateImage TristateImage .VS 8.5 Specifies an image to display (in place of the \fBimage\fR option) when the radiobutton is selected. This option is ignored unless the \fBimage\fR option has been specified. .VE 8.5 .OP \-tristatevalue tristateValue Value .VS 8.5 Specifies the value that causes the radiobutton to display the multi-value selection, also known as the tri-state mode. Defaults to .QW "" . .VE 8.5 .OP \-value value Value Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever this button is selected. .OP \-variable variable Variable Specifies name of global variable to set whenever this button is selected. Changes in this variable also cause the button to select or deselect itself. Defaults to the value \fBselectedButton\fR. .OP \-width width Width Specifies a desired width for the button. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button, the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in characters. If this option is not specified, the button's desired width is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a radiobutton widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the radiobutton such as its colors, font, text, and initial relief. The \fBradiobutton\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A radiobutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image and a diamond or circle called an \fIindicator\fR. If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines or if wrapping occurs because of the \fBwrapLength\fR option) and one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the \fBunderline\fR option. A radiobutton has all of the behavior of a simple button: it can display itself in either of three different ways, according to the \fBstate\fR option; it can be made to appear raised, sunken, or flat; it can be made to flash; and it invokes a Tcl command whenever mouse button 1 is clicked over the check button. .PP In addition, radiobuttons can be \fIselected\fR. If a radiobutton is selected, the indicator is normally drawn with a selected appearance, and a Tcl variable associated with the radiobutton is set to a particular value (normally 1). Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a sunken relief and a special color. Under Windows, the indicator is drawn with a round mark inside. If the radiobutton is not selected, then the indicator is drawn with a deselected appearance, and the associated variable is set to a different value (typically 0). The indicator is drawn without a round mark inside. Typically, several radiobuttons share a single variable and the value of the variable indicates which radiobutton is to be selected. When a radiobutton is selected it sets the value of the variable to indicate that fact; each radiobutton also monitors the value of the variable and automatically selects and deselects itself when the variable's value changes. .VS 8.5 If the variable's value matches the \fBtristateValue\fR, then the radiobutton is drawn using the tri-state mode. This mode is used to indicate mixed or multiple values. (This is used when the radiobutton represents the state of multiple items.) .VE 8.5 By default the variable \fBselectedButton\fR is used; its contents give the name of the button that is selected, or the empty string if no button associated with that variable is selected. The name of the variable for a radiobutton, plus the variable to be stored into it, may be modified with options on the command line or in the option database. Configuration options may also be used to modify the way the indicator is displayed (or whether it is displayed at all). By default a radiobutton is configured to select itself on button clicks. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBradiobutton\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for radiobutton widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBradiobutton\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBdeselect\fR Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an empty string. If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has no effect. .TP \fIpathName \fBflash\fR Flashes the radiobutton. This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton several times, alternating between active and normal colors. At the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active state as when the command was invoked. This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBinvoke\fR Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton with the mouse: selects the button and invokes its associated Tcl command, if there is one. The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton. This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR. .TP \fIpathName \fBselect\fR Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the value corresponding to this widget. .SH BINDINGS .PP Tk automatically creates class bindings for radiobuttons that give them the following default behavior: .IP [1] On Unix systems, a radiobutton activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the radiobutton. On Mac and Windows systems, when mouse button 1 is pressed over a radiobutton, the button activates whenever the mouse pointer is inside the button, and deactivates whenever the mouse pointer leaves the button. .IP [2] When mouse button 1 is pressed over a radiobutton it is invoked (it becomes selected and the command associated with the button is invoked, if there is one). .IP [3] When a radiobutton has the input focus, the space key causes the radiobutton to be invoked. .PP If the radiobutton's state is \fBdisabled\fR then none of the above actions occur: the radiobutton is completely non-responsive. .PP The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings. .SH "SEE ALSO" checkbutton(n), labelframe(n), listbox(n), options(n), scale(n), ttk::radiobutton(n) .SH KEYWORDS radiobutton, widget 0707010004717a000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00001d120000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseColor.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseColor.n,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH tk_chooseColor n 4.2 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME tk_chooseColor \- pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color. .SH SYNOPSIS \fBtk_chooseColor \fR?\fIoption value ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The procedure \fBtk_chooseColor\fR pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color. The following \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are possible as command line arguments: .TP \fB\-initialcolor\fR \fIcolor\fR Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops up. \fIcolor\fR must be in a form acceptable to the \fBTk_GetColor\fR function. .TP \fB\-parent\fR \fIwindow\fR Makes \fIwindow\fR the logical parent of the color dialog. The color dialog is displayed on top of its parent window. .TP \fB\-title\fR \fItitleString\fR Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed. .LP If the user selects a color, \fBtk_chooseColor\fR will return the name of the color in a form acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If the user cancels the operation, both commands will return the empty string. .SH EXAMPLE .CS button .b \-bg [tk_chooseColor \-initialcolor gray \-title "Choose color"] .CE .SH KEYWORDS color selection dialog 07070100047157000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00001c000000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/destroy.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: destroy.n,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH destroy n "" Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME destroy \- Destroy one or more windows .SH SYNOPSIS \fBdestroy \fR?\fIwindow window ...\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command deletes the windows given by the \fIwindow\fR arguments, plus all of their descendants. If a \fIwindow\fR .QW . is deleted then all windows will be destroyed and the application will (normally) exit. The \fIwindow\fRs are destroyed in order, and if an error occurs in destroying a window the command aborts without destroying the remaining windows. No error is returned if \fIwindow\fR does not exist. .SH EXAMPLE Destroy all checkbuttons that are direct children of the given widget: .CS proc killCheckbuttonChildren {parent} { foreach w [winfo children $parent] { if {[winfo class $w] eq "Checkbutton"} { \fBdestroy\fR $w } } } .CE .SH KEYWORDS application, destroy, window 07070100047197000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c585000001aca0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/mann/ttk_separator.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_separator.n,v 1.8.2.1 2008/05/11 00:31:03 patthoyts Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH ttk::separator n 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME ttk::separator \- Separator bar .SH SYNOPSIS \fBttk::separator\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION A \fBttk::separator\fR widget displays a horizontal or vertical separator bar. .SO ttk_widget \-class \-cursor \-state \-style \-takefocus .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-orient orient Orient One of \fBhorizontal\fR or \fBvertical\fR. Specifies the orientation of the separator. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" Separator widgets support the standard \fBcget\fR, \fBconfigure\fR, \fBidentify\fR, \fBinstate\fR, and \fBstate\fR methods. No other widget methods are used. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::widget(n) .SH "KEYWORDS" widget, separator 07070100047156000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00001fe10000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/mann/cursors.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Daniel A. Steffen '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: cursors.n,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH cursors n 8.3 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME cursors \- mouse cursors available in Tk .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fB\-cursor\fR widget option allows a Tk programmer to change the mouse cursor for a particular widget. The cursor names recognized by Tk on all platforms are: .CS X_cursor arrow based_arrow_down based_arrow_up boat bogosity bottom_left_corner bottom_right_corner bottom_side bottom_tee box_spiral center_ptr circle clock coffee_mug cross cross_reverse crosshair diamond_cross dot dotbox double_arrow draft_large draft_small draped_box exchange fleur gobbler gumby hand1 hand2 heart icon iron_cross left_ptr left_side left_tee leftbutton ll_angle lr_angle man middlebutton mouse none pencil pirate plus question_arrow right_ptr right_side right_tee rightbutton rtl_logo sailboat sb_down_arrow sb_h_double_arrow sb_left_arrow sb_right_arrow sb_up_arrow sb_v_double_arrow shuttle sizing spider spraycan star target tcross top_left_arrow top_left_corner top_right_corner top_side top_tee trek ul_angle umbrella ur_angle watch xterm .CE .PP The \fBnone\fR cursor can be specified to eliminate the cursor. .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES" .TP \fBWindows\fR On Windows systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors: .RS .CS arrow center_ptr crosshair fleur ibeam icon none sb_h_double_arrow sb_v_double_arrow watch xterm .CE And the following additional cursors are available: .CS no starting size size_ne_sw size_ns size_nw_se size_we uparrow wait .CE .RE .TP \fBMac OS X\fR On Mac OS X systems, the following cursors are mapped to native cursors: .RS .CS arrow cross crosshair ibeam none plus watch xterm .CE And the following additional native cursors are available: .CS copyarrow aliasarrow contextualmenuarrow text cross-hair closedhand openhand pointinghand resizeleft resizeright resizeleftright resizeup resizedown resizeupdown notallowed poof countinguphand countingdownhand countingupanddownhand spinning .CE .RE .SH KEYWORDS cursor, option 0707010004716d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584e0000483c0000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/mann/panedwindow.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: panedwindow.n,v 1.14 2008/01/31 16:29:34 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH panedwindow n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME panedwindow \- Create and manipulate panedwindow widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBpanedwindow\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-background \-borderwidth \-cursor \-orient \-relief .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-handlepad handlePad HandlePad When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or left end of the sash (depending on the orientation of the widget) at which to draw the handle. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-handlesize handleSize HandleSize Specifies the side length of a sash handle. Handles are always drawn as squares. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the overall panedwindow widget. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If an empty string, the widget will be made high enough to allow all contained widgets to have their natural height. .OP \-opaqueresize opaqueResize OpaqueResize Specifies whether panes should be resized as a sash is moved (true), or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false). .OP \-sashcursor sashCursor SashCursor Mouse cursor to use when over a sash. If null, \fBsb_h_double_arrow\fR will be used for horizontal panedwindows, and \fBsb_v_double_arrow\fR will be used for vertical panedwindows. .OP \-sashpad sashPad SashPad Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-sashrelief sashRelief SashRelief Relief to use when drawing a sash. May be any of the standard Tk relief values. .OP \-sashwidth sashWidth SashWidth Specifies the width of each sash. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .OP \-showhandle showHandle ShowHandle Specifies whether sash handles should be shown. May be any valid Tcl boolean value. .OP \-width width Width Specifies a desired width for the overall panedwindow widget. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. If an empty string, the widget will be made wide enough to allow all contained widgets to have their natural width. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a panedwindow widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the panedwindow such as its default background color and relief. The \fBpanedwindow\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A panedwindow widget contains any number of panes, arranged horizontally or vertically, according to the value of the \fB\-orient\fR option. Each pane contains one widget, and each pair of panes is separated by a moveable (via mouse movements) sash. Moving a sash causes the widgets on either side of the sash to be resized. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBpanedwindow\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is the same as the path name of the panedwindow's window. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIPathName\fR is the name of the command, which is the same as the panedwindow widget's path name. \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for panedwindow widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBadd \fIwindow ?window ...? ?option value ...?\fR Add one or more windows to the panedwindow, each in a separate pane. The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBconfigure\fR subcommand. .TP \fIpathName \fBcget \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure \fI?option? ?value option value ...?\fR Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBpanedwindow\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBforget \fIwindow ?window ...?\fR Remove the pane containing \fIwindow\fR from the panedwindow. All geometry management options for \fIwindow\fR will be forgotten. .TP \fIpathName \fBidentify \fIx y\fR Identify the panedwindow component underneath the point given by \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, in window coordinates. If the point is over a sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over a sash or a handle, such as {0 sash} or {2 handle}. If the point is over any other part of the panedwindow, the result is an empty list. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy \fI?args?\fR This command is used to query and change the position of the sash proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy coord\fR Return a list containing the x and y coordinates of the most recent proxy location. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy forget\fR Remove the proxy from the display. .TP \fIpathName \fBproxy place \fIx y\fR Place the proxy at the given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBsash \fI?args?\fR This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the panedwindow. It can take any of the following forms: .RS .TP \fIpathName \fBsash coord \fIindex\fR Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by \fIindex\fR. \fIIndex\fR must be an integer between 0 and 1 less than the number of panes in the panedwindow. The coordinates given are those of the top left corner of the region containing the sash. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash dragto \fIindex x y\fR This command computes the difference between the given coordinates and the coordinates given to the last \fBsash mark\fR command for the given sash. It then moves that sash the computed difference. The return value is the empty string. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash mark \fIindex x y\fR Records \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR for the sash given by \fIindex\fR; used in conjunction with later \fBsash dragto\fR commands to move the sash. .TP \fIpathName \fBsash place \fIindex x y\fR Place the sash given by \fIindex\fR at the given coordinates. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpanecget \fIwindow option\fR Query a management option for \fIwindow\fR. \fIOption\fR may be any value allowed by the \fBpaneconfigure\fR subcommand. .TP \fIpathName \fBpaneconfigure \fIwindow ?option? ?value option value ...?\fR Query or modify the management options for \fIwindow\fR. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. The following options are supported: .RS .TP \fB\-after \fIwindow\fR Insert the window after the window specified. \fIwindow\fR should be the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fB\-before \fIwindow\fR Insert the window before the window specified. \fIwindow\fR should be the name of a window already managed by \fIpathName\fR. .TP \fB\-height \fIsize\fR Specify a height for the window. The height will be the outer dimension of the window including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if \fB\-height\fR is not specified, then the height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the panedwindow. \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-hide \fIboolean\fR .VS 8.5 Controls the visibility of a pane. When the \fIboolean\fR is true (according to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR) the pane will not be visible, but it will still be maintained in the list of panes. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-minsize \fIn\fR Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than \fIn\fR. This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the paned dimension \(em the x dimension for horizontal panedwindows, the y dimension for vertical panedwindows. May be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-padx \fIn\fR Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to leave on each side of the window in the X-direction. The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-pady \fIn\fR Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction. The value may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .TP \fB\-sticky \fIstyle\fR If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window within its pane. \fIStyle\fR is a string that contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR or \fBw\fR. The string can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored. Each letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window will .QW stick to. If both \fBn\fR and \fBs\fR (or \fBe\fR and \fBw\fR) are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height (or width) of its cavity. .TP \fB\-stretch \fIwhen\fR .VS 8.5 Controls how extra space is allocated to each of the panes. \fIWhen\fR is one of \fBalways\fR, \fBfirst\fR, \fBlast\fR, \fBmiddle\fR, and \fBnever\fR. The panedwindow will calculate the required size of all its panes. Any remaining (or deficit) space will be distributed to those panes marked for stretching. The space will be distributed based on each panes current ratio of the whole. The \fIwhen\fR values have the following definition: .RS .TP \fBalways\fR This pane will always stretch. .TP \fBfirst\fR Only if this pane is the first pane (left-most or top-most) will it stretch. .TP \fBlast\fR Only if this pane is the last pane (right-most or bottom-most) will it stretch. This is the default value. .TP \fBmiddle\fR Only if this pane is not the first or last pane will it stretch. .TP \fBnever\fR This pane will never stretch. .RE .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\-width \fIsize\fR Specify a width for the window. The width will be the outer dimension of the window including its border, if any. If \fIsize\fR is an empty string, or if \fB\-width\fR is not specified, then the width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the panedwindow. \fISize\fR may be any value accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. .RE .TP \fIpathName \fBpanes\fR Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by \fIpathName\fR. .SH "RESIZING PANES" A pane is resized by grabbing the sash (or sash handle if present) and dragging with the mouse. This is accomplished via mouse motion bindings on the widget. When a sash is moved, the sizes of the panes on each side of the sash, and thus the widgets in those panes, are adjusted. .PP When a pane is resized from outside (e.g. it is packed to expand and fill, and the containing toplevel is resized), space is added to the final (rightmost or bottommost) pane in the window. .SH "SEE ALSO" ttk::panedwindow(n) .SH KEYWORDS panedwindow, widget, geometry management 07070100047161000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584d00002b570000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000002000000000root/usr/local/man/mann/label.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: label.n,v 1.12 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH label n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME label \- Create and manipulate label widgets .SH SYNOPSIS \fBlabel\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? .SO \-activebackground \-disabledforeground \-padx \-activeforeground \-font \-pady \-anchor \-foreground \-relief \-background \-highlightbackground \-takefocus \-bitmap \-highlightcolor \-text \-borderwidth \-highlightthickness \-textvariable \-compound \-image \-underline \-cursor \-justify \-wraplength .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-height height Height Specifies a desired height for the label. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in lines of text. If this option is not specified, the label's desired height is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .OP \-state state State Specifies one of three states for the label: \fBnormal\fR, \fBactive\fR, or \fBdisabled\fR. In normal state the button is displayed using the \fBforeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options. In active state the label is displayed using the \fBactiveForeground\fR and \fBactiveBackground\fR options. In the disabled state the \fBdisabledForeground\fR and \fBbackground\fR options determine how the button is displayed. .OP \-width width Width Specifies a desired width for the label. If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR); for text it is in characters. If this option is not specified, the label's desired width is computed from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a label widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the label such as its colors, font, text, and initial relief. The \fBlabel\fR command returns its \fIpathName\fR argument. At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window named \fIpathName\fR, but \fIpathName\fR's parent must exist. .PP A label is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image. If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines or if wrapping occurs because of the \fBwrapLength\fR option) and one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the \fBunderline\fR option. The label can be manipulated in a few simple ways, such as changing its relief or text, using the commands described below. .SH "WIDGET COMMAND" .PP The \fBlabel\fR command creates a new Tcl command whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This command may be used to invoke various operations on the widget. It has the following general form: .CS \fIpathName option \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR? .CE \fIOption\fR and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command. The following commands are possible for label widgets: .TP \fIpathName \fBcget\fR \fIoption\fR Returns the current value of the configuration option given by \fIoption\fR. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR command. .TP \fIpathName \fBconfigure\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue option value ...\fR? Query or modify the configuration options of the widget. If no \fIoption\fR is specified, returns a list describing all of the available options for \fIpathName\fR (see \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR for information on the format of this list). If \fIoption\fR is specified with no \fIvalue\fR, then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no \fIoption\fR is specified). If one or more \fIoption\-value\fR pairs are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty string. \fIOption\fR may have any of the values accepted by the \fBlabel\fR command. .SH BINDINGS .PP When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings: labels are not intended to be interactive. .SH EXAMPLE .CS # Make the widgets \fBlabel\fR .t \-text "This widget is at the top" \-bg red \fBlabel\fR .b \-text "This widget is at the bottom" \-bg green \fBlabel\fR .l \-text "Left\enHand\enSide" \fBlabel\fR .r \-text "Right\enHand\enSide" text .mid \.mid insert end "This layout is like Java's BorderLayout" # Lay them out pack .t \-side top \-fill x pack .b \-side bottom \-fill x pack .l \-side left \-fill y pack .r \-side right \-fill y pack .mid \-expand 1 \-fill both .CE .SH "SEE ALSO" labelframe(n), button(n), ttk::label(n) .SH KEYWORDS label, widget 0707010004714c000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584c00001b870000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/bell.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bell.n,v 1.4 2000/09/07 17:38:16 hobbs Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH bell n 8.4 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bell \- Ring a display's bell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBbell \fR?\fB\-displayof \fIwindow\fR? ?\fB\-nice\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This command rings the bell on the display for \fIwindow\fR and returns an empty string. If the \fB\-displayof\fR option is omitted, the display of the application's main window is used by default. The command uses the current bell-related settings for the display, which may be modified with programs such as \fBxset\fR. .PP If \fB\-nice\fR is not specified, this command also resets the screen saver for the screen. Some screen savers will ignore this, but others will reset so that the screen becomes visible again. .SH KEYWORDS beep, bell, ring 07070100047177000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c584f0001b0220000010000010036ffffffffffffffff0000001f00000000root/usr/local/man/mann/text.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: text.n,v 1.53 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH text n 8.5 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME text, tk_textCopy, tk_textCut, tk_textPaste \- Create and manipulate text widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fBtext\fR \fIpathName \fR?\fIoptions\fR? \fBtk_textCopy\fR \fIpathName\fR \fBtk_textCut\fR \fIpathName\fR \fBtk_textPaste\fR \fIpathName\fR .SO \-background \-highlightthickness \-relief \-borderwidth \-insertbackground \-selectbackground \-cursor \-insertborderwidth \-selectborderwidth \-exportselection \-insertofftime \-selectforeground \-font \-insertontime \-setgrid \-foreground \-insertwidth \-takefocus \-highlightbackground \-padx \-xscrollcommand \-highlightcolor \-pady \-yscrollcommand .SE .SH "WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS" .OP \-autoseparators autoSeparators AutoSeparators Specifies a boolean that says whether separators are automatically inserted in the undo stack. Only meaningful when the \fB\-undo\fR option is true. .OP \-blockcursor blockCursor BlockCursor .VS 8.5 Specifies a boolean that says whether the blinking insertion cursor should be drawn as a character-sized rectangular block. If false (the default) a thin vertical line is used for the insertion cursor. .VE 8.5 .OP \-endline endLine EndLine .VS 8.5 Specifies an integer line index representing the last line of the underlying textual data store that should be contained in the widget. This allows a text widget to reflect only a portion of a larger piece of text. Instead of an integer, the empty string can be provided to this configuration option, which will configure the widget to end at the very last line in the textual data store. .VE 8.5 .OP \-height height Height Specifies the desired height for the window, in units of characters in the font given by the \fB\-font\fR option. Must be at least one. .OP \-inactiveselectbackground inactiveSelectBackground Foreground .VS 8.5 Specifies the colour to use for the selection (the \fBsel\fR tag) when the window does not have the input focus. If empty, \fB{}\fR, then no selection is shown when the window does not have the focus. .VE 8.5 .OP \-maxundo maxUndo MaxUndo Specifies the maximum number of compound undo actions on the undo stack. A zero or a negative value imply an unlimited undo stack. .OP \-spacing1 spacing1 Spacing1 Requests additional space above each text line in the widget, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display. This option may be overridden with \fB\-spacing1\fR options in tags. .OP \-spacing2 spacing2 Spacing2 For lines that wrap (so that they cover more than one line on the display) this option specifies additional space to provide between the display lines that represent a single line of text. The value may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This option may be overridden with \fB\-spacing2\fR options in tags. .OP \-spacing3 spacing3 Spacing3 Requests additional space below each text line in the widget, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display. This option may be overridden with \fB\-spacing3\fR options in tags. .OP \-startline startLine StartLine .VS 8.5 Specifies an integer line index representing the first line of the underlying textual data store that should be contained in the widget. This allows a text widget to reflect only a portion of a larger piece of text. Instead of an integer, the empty string can be provided to this configuration option, which will configure the widget to start at the very first line in the textual data store. .VE 8.5 .OP \-state state State Specifies one of two states for the text: \fBnormal\fR or \fBdisabled\fR. If the text is disabled then characters may not be inserted or deleted and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget. .OP \-tabs tabs Tabs Specifies a set of tab stops for the window. The option's value consists of a list of screen distances giving the positions of the tab stops, each of which is a distance relative to the left edge of the widget (excluding borders, padding, etc). Each position may optionally be followed in the next list element by one of the keywords \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, \fBcenter\fR, or \fBnumeric\fR, which specifies how to justify text relative to the tab stop. \fBLeft\fR is the default; it causes the text following the tab character to be positioned with its left edge at the tab position. \fBRight\fR means that the right edge of the text following the tab character is positioned at the tab position, and \fBcenter\fR means that the text is centered at the tab position. \fBNumeric\fR means that the decimal point in the text is positioned at the tab position; if there is no decimal point then the least significant digit of the number is positioned just to the left of the tab position; if there is no number in the text then the text is right-justified at the tab position. For example, .QW "\fB\-tabs {2c left 4c 6c center}\fR" creates three tab stops at two-centimeter intervals; the first two use left justification and the third uses center justification. .RS .PP If the list of tab stops does not have enough elements to cover all of the tabs in a text line, then Tk extrapolates new tab stops using the spacing and alignment from the last tab stop in the list. Tab distances must be strictly positive, and must always increase from one tab stop to the next (if not, an error is thrown). The value of the \fBtabs\fR option may be overridden by \fB\-tabs\fR options in tags. .PP If no \fB\-tabs\fR option is specified, or if it is specified as an empty list, then Tk uses default tabs spaced every eight (average size) characters. To achieve a different standard spacing, for example every 4 characters, simply configure the widget with .QW "\fB\-tabs \N'34'[expr {4 * [font measure $font 0]}] left\N'34' \-tabstyle wordprocessor\fR" . .RE .OP \-tabstyle tabStyle TabStyle Specifies how to interpret the relationship between tab stops on a line and tabs in the text of that line. The value must be \fBtabular\fR (the default) or \fBwordprocessor\fR. Note that tabs are interpreted as they are encountered in the text. If the tab style is \fBtabular\fR then the \fIn\fR'th tab character in the line's text will be associated with the \fIn\fR'th tab stop defined for that line. If the tab character's x coordinate falls to the right of the \fIn\fR'th tab stop, then a gap of a single space will be inserted as a fallback. If the tab style is \fBwordprocessor\fR then any tab character being laid out will use (and be defined by) the first tab stop to the right of the preceding characters already laid out on that line. The value of the \fBtabstyle\fR option may be overridden by \fB\-tabstyle\fR options in tags. .OP \-undo undo Undo Specifies a boolean that says whether the undo mechanism is active or not. .OP \-width width Width Specifies the desired width for the window in units of characters in the font given by the \fB\-font\fR option. If the font does not have a uniform width then the width of the character .QW 0 is used in translating from character units to screen units. .OP \-wrap wrap Wrap Specifies how to handle lines in the text that are too long to be displayed in a single line of the text's window. The value must be \fBnone\fR or \fBchar\fR or \fBword\fR. A wrap mode of \fBnone\fR means that each line of text appears as exactly one line on the screen; extra characters that do not fit on the screen are not displayed. In the other modes each line of text will be broken up into several screen lines if necessary to keep all the characters visible. In \fBchar\fR mode a screen line break may occur after any character; in \fBword\fR mode a line break will only be made at word boundaries. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The \fBtext\fR command creates a new window (given by the \fIpathName\fR argument) and makes it into a text widget. Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the text such as its default background color and relief. The \fBtext\fR command returns the path name of the new window. .PP A text widget displays one or more lines of text and allows that text to be edited. Text widgets support four different kinds of annotations on the text, called tags, marks, embedded windows or embedded images. Tags allow different portions of the text to be displayed with different fonts and colors. In addition, Tcl commands can be associated with tags so that scripts are invoked when particular actions such as keystrokes and mouse button presses occur in particular ranges of the text. See \fBTAGS\fR below for more details. .PP The second form of annotation consists of floating markers in the text called .QW marks . Marks are used to keep track of various interesting positions in the text as it is edited. See \fBMARKS\fR below for more details. .PP The third form of annotation allows arbitrary windows to be embedded in a text widget. See \fBEMBEDDED WINDOWS\fR below for more details. .PP The fourth form of annotation allows Tk images to be embedded in a text widget. See \fBEMBEDDED IMAGES\fR below for more details. .PP The text widget also has a built-in undo/redo mechanism. See \fBTHE UNDO MECHANISM\fR below for more details. .PP .VS 8.5 The text widget allows for the creation of peer widgets. These are other text widgets which share the same underlying data (text, marks, tags, images, etc). See \fBPEER WIDGETS\fR below for more details. .VE 8.5 .SH INDICES .PP Many of the widget commands for texts take one or more indices as arguments. An index is a string used to indicate a particular place within a text, such as a place to insert characters or one endpoint of a range of characters to delete. Indices have the syntax .CS \fIbase modifier modifier modifier ...\fR .CE Where \fIbase\fR gives a starting point and the \fImodifier\fRs adjust the index from the starting point (e.g. move forward or backward one character). Every index must contain a \fIbase\fR, but the \fImodifier\fRs are optional. .VS 8.5 Most modifiers (as documented below) allow an optional submodifier. Valid submodifiers are \fBany\fR and \fBdisplay\fR. If the submodifier is abbreviated, then it must be followed by whitespace, but otherwise there need be no space between the submodifier and the following \fImodifier\fR. Typically the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier adjusts the meaning of the following \fImodifier\fR to make it refer to visual or non-elided units rather than logical units, but this is explained for each relevant case below. Lastly, where \fIcount\fR is used as part of a modifier, it can be positive or negative, so .QW "\fIbase\fR \- \-3 lines" is perfectly valid (and equivalent to .QW "\fIbase\fR +3lines" ). .VE 8.5 .PP The \fIbase\fR for an index must have one of the following forms: .TP 12 \fIline\fB.\fIchar\fR Indicates \fIchar\fR'th character on line \fIline\fR. Lines are numbered from 1 for consistency with other UNIX programs that use this numbering scheme. Within a line, characters are numbered from 0. If \fIchar\fR is \fBend\fR then it refers to the newline character that ends the line. .TP 12 \fB@\fIx\fB,\fIy\fR Indicates the character that covers the pixel whose x and y coordinates within the text's window are \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR. .TP 12 \fBend\fR Indicates the end of the text (the character just after the last newline). .TP 12 \fImark\fR Indicates the character just after the mark whose name is \fImark\fR. .TP 12 \fItag\fB.first\fR Indicates the first character in the text that has been tagged with \fItag\fR. This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged with \fItag\fR. .TP 12 \fItag\fB.last\fR Indicates the character just after the last one in the text that has been tagged with \fItag\fR. This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged with \fItag\fR. .TP 12 \fIpathName\fR Indicates the position of the embedded window whose name is \fIpathName\fR. This form generates an error if there is no embedded window by the given name. .TP 12 \fIimageName\fR Indicates the position of the embedded image whose name is \fIimageName\fR. This form generates an error if there is no embedded image by the given name. .PP If the \fIbase\fR could match more than one of the above forms, such as a \fImark\fR and \fIimageName\fR both having the same value, then the form earlier in the above list takes precedence. If modifiers follow the base index, each one of them must have one of the forms listed below. Keywords such as \fBchars\fR and \fBwordend\fR may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous. .TP \fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBchars\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR characters, moving to later lines in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR characters in the text after the current index, then set the index to the last index in the text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided characters are skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all characters are counted. For historical reasons, if neither modifier is given then the count actually takes place in units of index positions (see \fBindices\fR for details). This behaviour may be changed in a future major release, so if you need an index count, you are encouraged to use \fBindices\fR instead wherever possible. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBchars\fR Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR characters, moving to earlier lines in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR characters in the text before the current index, then set the index to .VS 8.5 the first index in the text (1.0). Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided characters are skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all characters are counted. For historical reasons, if neither modifier is given then the count actually takes place in units of index positions (see \fBindices\fR for details). This behaviour may be changed in a future major release, so if you need an index count, you are encouraged to use \fBindices\fR instead wherever possible. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBindices\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR index positions, moving to later lines in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR index positions in the text after the current index, then set the index to the last index position in the text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. Note that an index position is either a single character or a single embedded image or embedded window. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided indices are skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all indices are counted; this is also the default behaviour if no modifier is given. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBindices\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR index positions, moving to earlier lines in the text if necessary. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR index positions in the text before the current index, then set the index to the first index position (1.0) in the text. Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, elided indices are skipped over without being counted. If \fBany\fR is given, then all indices are counted; this is also the default behaviour if no modifier is given. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB+ \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlines\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index forward by \fIcount\fR lines, retaining the same character position within the line. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR lines after the line containing the current index, then set the index to refer to the same character position on the last line of the text. Then, if the line is not long enough to contain a character at the indicated character position, adjust the character position to refer to the last character of the line (the newline). Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, then each visual display line is counted separately. Otherwise, if \fBany\fR (or no modifier) is given, then each logical line (no matter how many times it is visually wrapped) counts just once. If the relevant lines are not wrapped, then these two methods of counting are equivalent. .VE 8.5 .TP \fB\- \fIcount\fR ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlines\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index backward by \fIcount\fR logical lines, retaining the same character position within the line. If there are fewer than \fIcount\fR lines before the line containing the current index, then set the index to refer to the same character position on the first line of the text. Then, if the line is not long enough to contain a character at the indicated character position, adjust the character position to refer to the last character of the line (the newline). Spaces on either side of \fIcount\fR are optional. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, then each visual display line is counted separately. Otherwise, if \fBany\fR (or no modifier) is given, then each logical line (no matter how many times it is visually wrapped) counts just once. If the relevant lines are not wrapped, then these two methods of counting are equivalent. .VE 8.5 .TP ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlinestart\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index to refer to the first index on the line. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this is the first index on the display line, otherwise on the logical line. .VE 8.5 .TP ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBlineend\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index to refer to the last index on the line (the newline). If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this is the last index on the display line, otherwise on the logical line. .VE 8.5 .TP ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBwordstart\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index to refer to the first character of the word containing the current index. A word consists of any number of adjacent characters that are letters, digits, or underscores, or a single character that is not one of these. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this only examines non-elided characters, otherwise all characters (elided or not) are examined. .VE 8.5 .TP ?\fIsubmodifier\fR? \fBwordend\fR .VS 8.5 Adjust the index to refer to the character just after the last one of the word containing the current index. If the current index refers to the last character of the text then it is not modified. If the \fBdisplay\fR submodifier is given, this only examines non-elided characters, otherwise all characters (elided or not) are examined. .PP If more than one modifier is present then they are applied in left-to-right order. For example, the index .QW "\fBend \- 1 chars\fR" refers to the next-to-last character in the text and .QW "\fBinsert wordstart \- 1 c\fR" refers to the character just before the first one in the word containing the insertion cursor. Modifiers are applied one by one in this left to right order, and after each step the resulting index is constrained to be a valid index in the text widget. So, for example, the index .QW "\fB1.0 \-1c +1c\fR" refers to the index .QW \fB2.0\fR . .PP Where modifiers result in index changes by display lines, display chars or display indices, and the \fIbase\fR refers to an index inside an elided tag, that base index is considered to be equivalent to the first following non-elided index. .VE 8.5 .SH TAGS .PP The first form of annotation in text widgets is a tag. A tag is a textual string that is associated with some of the characters in a text. Tags may contain arbitrary characters, but it is probably best to avoid using the characters .QW " " (space), \fB+\fR, or \fB\-\fR: these characters have special meaning in indices, so tags containing them cannot be used as indices. There may be any number of tags associated with characters in a text. Each tag may refer to a single character, a range of characters, or several ranges of characters. An individual character may have any number of tags associated with it. .PP A priority order is defined among tags, and this order is used in implementing some of the tag-related functions described below. When a tag is defined (by associating it with characters or setting its display options or binding commands to it), it is given a priority higher than any existing tag. The priority order of tags may be redefined using the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag raise\fR" and .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag lower\fR" widget commands. .PP Tags serve three purposes in text widgets. First, they control the way information is displayed on the screen. By default, characters are displayed as determined by the \fB\-background\fR, \fB\-font\fR, and \fB\-foreground\fR options for the text widget. However, display options may be associated with individual tags using the .QW "\fIpathName \fBtag configure\fR" widget command. If a character has been tagged, then the display options associated with the tag override the default display style. The following options are currently supported for tags: .TP \fB\-background \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the background color to use for characters associated with the tag. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-bgstipple \fIbitmap\fR \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern for the background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used for the background. .TP \fB\-borderwidth \fIpixels\fR \fIPixels\fR specifies the width of a 3-D border to draw around the background. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. This option is used in conjunction with the \fB\-relief\fR option to give a 3-D appearance to the background for characters; it is ignored unless the \fB\-background\fR option has been set for the tag. .TP \fB\-elide \fIboolean\fR \fIElide\fR specifies whether the data should be elided. Elided data (characters, images, embedded windows, etc) is not displayed and takes no space on screen, but further on behaves just as normal data. .TP \fB\-fgstipple \fIbitmap\fR \fIBitmap\fR specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern when drawing text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. If \fIbitmap\fR has not been specified, or if it is specified as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used. .TP \fB\-font \fIfontName\fR \fIFontName\fR is the name of a font to use for drawing characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .TP \fB\-foreground \fIcolor\fR \fIColor\fR specifies the color to use when drawing text and other foreground information such as underlines. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetColor\fR. .TP \fB\-justify \fIjustify\fR If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIjustify\fR determines how to justify the line. It must be one of \fBleft\fR, \fBright\fR, or \fBcenter\fR. If a line wraps, then the justification for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided character of that display line. .TP \fB\-lmargin1 \fIpixels\fR If the first non-elided character of a text line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line of text wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display; the \fB\-lmargin2\fR option controls the indentation for subsequent lines. .TP \fB\-lmargin2 \fIpixels\fR If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, and if the display line is not the first for its text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then \fIpixels\fR specifies how much the line should be indented from the left edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only applies to the second and later display lines for a text line. .TP \fB\-offset \fIpixels\fR \fIPixels\fR specifies an amount by which the text's baseline should be offset vertically from the baseline of the overall line, in pixels. For example, a positive offset can be used for superscripts and a negative offset can be used for subscripts. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. .TP \fB\-overstrike \fIboolean\fR Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through the middle of characters. \fIBoolean\fR may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR. .TP \fB\-relief \fIrelief\fR \fIRelief\fR specifies the 3-D relief to use for drawing backgrounds, in any of the forms accepted by \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. This option is used in conjunction with the \fB\-borderwidth\fR option to give a 3-D appearance to the background for characters; it is ignored unless the \fB\-background\fR option has been set for the tag. .TP \fB\-rmargin \fIpixels\fR If the first non-elided character of a display line has a tag for which this option has been specified, then \fIpixels\fR specifies how wide a margin to leave between the end of the line and the right edge of the window. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. This option is only used when wrapping is enabled. If a text line wraps, the right margin for each line on the display is determined by the first non-elided character of that display line. .TP \fB\-spacing1 \fIpixels\fR \fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left above each text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the first line on the display. .TP \fB\-spacing2 \fIpixels\fR For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional space to leave between the display lines for a single text line. \fIPixels\fR may have any of the standard forms for screen distances. .TP \fB\-spacing3 \fIpixels\fR \fIPixels\fR specifies how much additional space should be left below each text line, using any of the standard forms for screen distances. If a line wraps, this option only applies to the last line on the display. .TP \fB\-tabs \fItabList\fR \fITabList\fR specifies a set of tab stops in the same form as for the \fB\-tabs\fR option for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it unspecified for the tag (the default). If the option is specified as a non-empty string that is an empty list, such as \fB\-tags\0{\0}\fR, then it requests default 8-character tabs as described for the \fB\-tags\fR widget option. .TP \fB\-tabstyle \fIstyle\fR \fIStyle\fR specifies either the \fItabular\fR or \fIwordprocessor\fR style of tabbing to use for the text widget. This option only applies to a display line if it applies to the first non-elided character on that display line. If this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels the option, leaving it unspecified for the tag (the default). .TP \fB\-underline \fIboolean\fR \fIBoolean\fR specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath characters. It may have any of the forms accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR. .TP \fB\-wrap \fImode\fR \fIMode\fR specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the text's window. It has th